Rock Mechanics Lab Manual PDF

ONWI-311
I Public Draft
Laboratory Rock Mechanics Testing Manual
Technical Report
tilASTER
October, 1981
Frank S. Shuri
John D. Cooper
M olly L Hamill
Foundation Sciences, inc.

1630 S.W. Morrison Street
Portland, OR 97205
o/Vw/
o f f ic e o flN u c le a rW a s te Is o la tio n
Battelle
fliSTRIBUTION IF TH!£ DOClHilflir IS IM U M fn i

DISCLAIMER
This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an

agency of the United States Government. Neither the United States
Government nor any agency Thereof, nor any of their employees,
makes any warranty, express or implied, or assumes any legal
liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or
usefulness of any information, apparatus, product, or process
disclosed, or represents that its use would not infringe privately
owned rights. Reference herein to any specific commercial product,
process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or
otherwise does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement,
recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any
agency thereof. The views and opinions of authors expressed herein
do not necessarily state or reflect those of the United States
Government or any agency thereof.
DISCLAIMER
Portions of this document may be illegible in

electronic image products. Images are produced
from the best available original document.
BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA _
F o un d atio n Sciences, Inc., 1981. Laboratory Rock M echanics Testing Manual, O N W I-311,
O ffic e o f N u cle a r W aste Iso la tio n , B atte lle M e m o ria l In s titu te , C o lu m b u s, OF1, P ub lic Draft.
•s
NOTICE
This re p o rt was p re p a re d as an a ccou n t o f w o rk sponsored by an agency o f the U n ite d States

G o ve rn m e n t. N e ith e r th e U n ite d States G o ve rn m e n t n or any agency th e re o f, nor any o f th e ir
em ployees, makes any w a rra n ty, express or im p lie d , o r assumes any legal lia b ility or
re s p o n s ib ility fo r th e accuracy, com pleteness, o r usefulness o f any in fo rm a tio n , apparatus,
p ro d u c t, o r process disclosed, o r represents that its use w o u ld n ot in frin g e p riva tely o w n ed
rights. R eference h e re in to any sp e cific co m m e rcia l p ro d u c t, process, o r service by trade
nam e, tra d e m a rk, m a n u fa ctu re r, o r o th e rw ise , does not necessarily co n stitu te o r im p ly its
e n d o rse m e n t, re c o m m e n d a tio n , o r fa v o rin g by th e U n ite d States G o v e rn m e n t or any agency
th e re o f. The views and o p in io n s o f authors expressed h erein do n ot necessarily state o r re fle ct
those o f th e U n ite d States G o ve rn m e n t o r any agency th e re o f.
P rin te d in th e U n ite d States o f A m e ric a

A v a ila b le fro m
N a tio n a l T ec h n ic a l In fo rm a tio n S ervice
U.S. D e p a r tm e n t o f C o m m e rc e
5285 Port Royal Road
S p rin g fie ld , V A 22161
N TIS p ric e codes

P rin te d C o p y : A15
M ic r o fic h e copy: A01
_ d is c l a im e r •
, -he united States Governmer
, ot work sponsored bv an agencv _ err«clovees.
T . . » ■ ."V * " » r r r i ; :e°Po™,..uv .o-
,j,e united States Govern ,egal I'ab'l'tv " process d.srloseO,
-'“SH. := r: O N W I-3 n
Distribution Category UC-70
„ . a . n l v i O . °'™ '"=" ' " ° --------------------------------------------
! •
Public Draft
ONWI— 311
DE82 015763
Technical Report
October, 1981
Frank S. Shuri
John D. Cooper
M olly L. Hamill
Foundation Sciences, Inc.

Portland, OR 97205
^h;[ nribWENT is iKHIMITa)
T his r e p o r t w as p r e p a r e d by F o u n d a tio n S c ie n c e s , In c . u n d e r S u b c o n tra c t E 515-0 41 00 w ith B a tte lie

P ro je c t M a n a g e m e n t D iv is io n , O f f ic e o f N u c le a r W a s te is o la tio n , u n d e r C o n tr a c t N o . D E -A C 0 6 -
7 6 R L O 1 8 3 0 -O N W I w ith t h e U .S. D e p a r t m e n t o f E n e rg y . This s u b c o n tra c t was a d m in is te r e d by th e
B a tte lie O f f ic e o f N u c le a r W a s te is o la tio n .
ABSTRACT
Standardized lab ora tory rock mechanics te s tin g procedures have been
prepared f o r use In the National Terminal Waste Storage Program.
The procedures emphasize equipment performance s p e c ific a tio n s , docu
mentation and re p o r tin g , and Q ua lity Assurance acceptance c r i t e r i a .
S u f f ic ie n t th e o re tic a l background Is Included to allow the user to
perform the necessary data reduction. These procedures Incorporate
e x is tin g standards when p o ss ib le , otherwise they represent the
c u rre n t s ta te of the a r t . Maximum f l e x i b i l i t y In equipment design
has been Incorporated to allow use o f t h is manual by e x is tin g
groups and to encourage fu tu re Improvements.
Contents
General Inform ation

1.0 In tro d u c tio n 1
2.0 Generalized Laboratory Operations 3
3.0 Test Equipment PerformanceV e r if ic a t io n 8
4.0 S t a t i s t i c a l Methods 11
5.0 Q u a lity Assurance 15
A. Basic Physical Properties
L -A .l Bulk Density o f Rock Samples A. 1-1
L-A.2 Grain Density o f Rock Samples A .2-1
L-A.3 Composition o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis A .3-1
L-A.4 Grain Size o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis A .4-1
. L-A.5 Texture and Fabric o f Rock Samples byPetrographic
Analysis A .5-1
B. Strength
L -B .l U niaxial Compressive Strength of Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature B.1-1
L-B.2 U niaxial Compressive Strength o f Rock Core -
Elevated Temperature B.2-1
L-B.3 T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength o f Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature B.3-1
L-B.4 T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength o f Rock Core -
Elevated Temperature B.4-1
L-B.5 Tensile Strength o f Rock Core -
B ra z ilia n Tensile Method B.5-1
C. Short-Term Deformational Properties
L-C.l U niaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation
o f Rock Core - Ambient Temperature C.1-1
L-C.2 U niaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation
o f Rock Core - Elevated Temperature C.2-1
L-C.3 T r ia x ia l Compressive Modulus o f Deformation
o f Rock Core - Ambient Temperature C.3-1
L-C.4 T r ia x ia l Compressive Modulus o f Deformation
o f Rock Core - Elevated Temperature C.4-1
L-C.5 Deformation Constants o f Rock Core -
U ltra s o n ic Method C.5-1
D. Time-Dependent Deformational Properties
L-D .l U niaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature D.1-1
L-D.2 U niaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core -
Elevated Temperature D.2-1
L-D.3 T r ia x ia l Compressive Creep o f Rock Core -
Elevated Temperature D.3-1
E. Thermal Properties
L -E .l Thermal Expansion o f Laboratory Rock Samples E.1-1
L-E.2 S p e c ific Heat o f Laboratory Rock Samples E.2-1
L-E.3 Thermal C on ductivity o f Laboratory Rock Samples E.3-1
F. Hydrologic P roperties
L -F .l F lu id P erm eability o f a Rock Sample F.1-1
L-F.2 Water Content o f a Rock Sample F.2-1
L-F.3 Apparent P oro sity o f a Rock Sample F.3-1
1.0 In tro d u c tio n

1.1 Background.
The National Waste Terminal Storage (NWTS) program includes
several rock mechanics t e s t in g studies to f u l l y characterize
rock at candidate nuclear waste re p o s ito ry s ite s . Because of
the nature o f the NWTS program, these rock mechanics studies
must f u l f i l l several requirements:
.The studies should provide te c h n ic a lly sound,
h ig h - q u a lity data.
.S tudies conducted by in d iv id u a l groups should
be usable by o th e r researchers and e a s ily
in te g ra te d in to the o ve ra ll NWTS program.
.The studies should s a t is f y the data defen-
d a b i l i t y , pre se rva tio n , and r e t r i e v a b i l i t y
requirements o f the NWTS program.
To s a t is f y these requirements, standardized rock mechanics
t e s t procedures are necessary. While standard procedures are
in existence f o r c e r ta in t e s t s , th e re are many t e s t s , par
t i c u l a r l y high temperature mechanical t e s t s , fo r which no such
procedures e x is t . In a d d itio n , e x is tin g procedures do not
address such areas as equipment performance, c a lib r a tio n and
documentation requirements, and level of re p o rtin g in s u f f i
c ie n t d e ta il to be d i r e c t l y usable in the NWTS program. There
fo r e , a set of standard procedures inco rpo ratin g the state of
the a r t of rock te s tin g and oriented toward the NWTS program
requirements was commissioned by the O ffice o f Nuclear Waste
I s o la tio n (ONWI). This te s tin g manual is the re s u lt of th a t
e ffo r t .
The manual was prepared by Foundation Sciences, I n c . , Portland,
Oregon. Accepted standards and procedures, p a r t i c u l a r l y from
the American Society f o r Testing and M aterials (ASTM) and
In te rn a tio n a l Society f o r Rock Mechanics (ISRM), are incorpo
rated wherever possible. Where these are la c kin g , the pro
cedures are based on the s ta te of the a r t techniques used by
research la b o ra to rie s , u n iv e r s it ie s , and the geotechnical
in d u s try . This manual should be considered a l i v i n g document.
I t was the in te n tio n of the authors th a t changes in technology
and methodology could be incorporated in to these procedures
while m aintaining the general in te n t and level of q u a lity .
1.2.1 To provide a standard approach fo r conducting t e s t s . The
method of te s tin g can have a s ig n if ic a n t e ff e c t on the data
generated by the t e s t . A major purpose o f these procedures is
to describe in general terms a standard approach f o r measuring
s p e c if ic rock p ro p e rtie s . These procedures are as f l e x i b l e as
po ssible w h ile e s ta b lis h in g common ground f o r comparison and
e v a lu a tio n of re s u lts .
1.2.2 To e s ta b lis h performance requirements f o r apparatus. Two
im portant areas in rock mechanics te s t in g th a t have not received
s u f f i c i e n t emphasis in s t a t e - o f - t h e - a r t t e s t in g programs are the
leve l of accuracy f o r measurement o f t e s t parameters and the
e f f e c t of physical measurement e rro rs on the q u a lity of the
f i n a l data. A primary purpose o f these procedures is to es
t a b lis h performance c r i t e r i a f o r a l l re le van t equipment and
in s tru m e n ta tio n , in order to provide h ig h - q u a lity data con sistent
w ith re p o s ito ry s i t e c h a ra c te riz a tio n requirements. Another
purpose of these procedures is to i d e n t i f y and minimize the
l i m i t a t i o n s placed on the r e s u ltin g data by u n c e rta in tie s due
to measurement system e r r o r and sample v a r i a b i l i t y . The in te n t
i s to provide the person using the data w ith an idea of how
good the data r e a l l y are.
1.2.3 To e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance acceptance c r i t e r i a and
checkpoints. The r e s u lts o f rock mechanics te s t in g in the NWTS
program must be defendable, tra c e a b le , and recoverable. These
are r e s p o n s i b i l i t i e s o f a Q u a lity Assurance program. The pro
cedures in t h i s manual i d e n t i f y the re le van t areas of q u a l i f i
c a tio n , v e r i f i c a t i o n , in s p e c tio n , and documentation so th a t
each t e s t can s u c c e s s fu lly f u l f i l l Q u a lity Assurance re q u ire
ments.
1.2.4 To d e fin e re p o rtin g requirements. The p o t e n t ia lly wide
spread a p p lic a tio n of the re s u lts o f the t e s t in g programs re
q u ire s th a t re ports be complete, understandable, and usable
to workers who may o r may not have a background in rock me
chanics. The procedures in t h i s manual emphasize reporting
requirements in order to produce a document which can stand
alone and be c o r r e c tly applied.
1.3 L im ita tio n s o f the manual.
1.3.1 Data in t e r p r e t a t io n and a p p lic a tio n . The procedures in
t h i s manual are designed to produce usable data. The i n t e r
p r e ta tio n and a p p lic a tio n o f these data depend on the nature
of the p ro je c t and are h ig h ly s i t e s p e c ific . More im p o rta n tly ,
i n t e r p r e t a t io n and a p p lic a tio n are in pa rt c re a tiv e processes
which draw h e a v ily on the experience, judgment, and c a p a b ility
o f the i n d iv id u a l, and are not amenable to reduction to a
standard procedure.
1.3.2 Technical e x p e rtis e . Even in w e ll-d e fin e d and r e p e t it iv e
processes such as la b o ra to ry rock mechanics te s t in g , c o n tin -
gencies w i l l a ris e which are not and cannot be covered by a
procedure. These re q u ire an understanding o f the physical pro
cesses involved in the t e s t and the equipfnent used. The pro
cedure is not a s u b s titu te f o r tech nical knowledge and exper
ience.
1.3.3 Equipment s p e c ific a tio n s . To keep these procedures tim e ly
and avoid hardship on te s tin g la b o ra to rie s , no equipment or
apparatus has been sp e c ifie d by brand name. Equipment re q u ire
ments have been approached through performance s p e c ific a tio n s ,
to allow workers maximum f l e x i b i l i t y . I t is not the in te n t of
these procedures to r e s t r i c t fu tu re improvements in te s tin g
techniques in any way.
1.4 Acknowledgments.
The authors wish to acknowledge the various organizations i n
volved in rock mechanics te s tin g which have produced te s tin g
procedures in the past. In p a r t i c u l a r , the fo llo w in g supplied
background in fo rm a tio n which was incorporated in to t h is manual:
The American Society f o r Testing and M a te ria ls , Book o f
Annual Standards, Part 19: Soil and Rock; B u ild in g Stones;
Peats.
The In te rn a tio n a l Society f o r Rock Mechanics, Commission
on S tandardization o f Laboratory and F ie ld Tests
U. S. Army Corps o f Engineers, Rock Testing Handbook (Stan
dard and Recommended Methods)
U. S. Bureau o f Mines, Bureau of Mines Test Procedures fo r
Rocks
V u tu k u ri, V .S ., Lama, R .D ., and S a luja , S .S ., 1974, Handbook
on Mechanical P roperties o f Rocks, Testing Techniques and
R e s u lts , Trans Tech P u b lic a tio n s , C lausthal, Germany.
The authors also wish to extend t h e i r appreciation to the fo llo w
ing in d iv id u a ls who supplied m aterial p e rta in in g to the state
o f the a r t in rock mechanics te s t in g :
Dr. Ernest N. Lindner, U n iv e rs ity o f Minnesota
Dr. Paul E. Senseny, RE/SPEC Inc.
Dr. W illia m Thur, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
Dr. Wolfgang R. Wawarsik, Sandia National Laboratories
2.0 Generalized la b o ra to ry operations

2.1 Basic s k i l l s assumed by the procedures.
This manual presupposes f a m i l i a r i t y w ith basic laboratory oper
a tio n s such as weighing, volume and length measurements, e t c . ,
so these s k i l l s are not included in the procedures. The pre
q u a l i f i c a t i o n o f technicians and supervisors required in the
! • procedures and implemented in a basic Q ua lity Assurance pro-
gram i s an i m p l i c i t re c o g n itio n th a t capable in d iv id u a ls w i l l
be performing the te s t s .
2.2 E rro r in la b o ra to ry measurements.
2.2.1 D e f i n it io n of terms.
2 .2 .1 .1 Accuracy - the d e v ia tio n o f the measurement from
the " tr u e " value o f the parameter being measured. For
example, a pressure gage th a t reads 102 psi (0.703 MPa) at
a known pressure o f 100 psi (0.689 MPa) has an accuracy o f
2% at th a t p o in t.
2 .2 .1 .2 P recision - the a b i l i t y to reproduce a c e rta in
measurement, regardless o f the accuracy. For example, i f
the pressure gage o f section 2 .2 .1 .1 is read f i v e times and
the readings are 102, 101, 102, 102, and 101 psi (0.703,
0.696, 0.703, 0.703, and 0.696 MPa), the p re c isio n is 1% o f
the measured value.
2 .2 .1 .3 Resolution - the sm allest measurement in te rv a l
which an instrument i s capable o f reading. For example,
i f the sm allest graduations on a pressure gage are at
10 psi (0.069 MPa) in t e r v a l s , i t is possible to in te r p o la te
to the nearest 1 psi (0.007 MPa), thus g iv in g a re s o lu tio n
o f 1 psi (0.007 MPa).
2 .2 .1 .4 S e n s i t i v i t y - the r a t i o o f instrument output per
change in the measured parameter. For example, two d i f -
erent model LVDTs have s e n s i t i v i t i e s o f 10 V /in . (25.4 V/cm)
and 5 V /in . (12.7 V/cm).
2 .2 .1 .5 Systematic e rro rs - reproducible e rro rs i n t r o
duced by f a u lt y equipment, c a l i b r a t i o n , or technique. For
example, a pressure gage which reads 5% too high introduces
a systematic e r r o r o f 5% in to a l l pressure readings un
less t h i s inaccuracy is determined by c a lib r a t io n and the
data correcte d. Another example is a lab tech n ic ia n who
always reads the pressure gage 100 psi (0.689 MPa) too high
because o f p a ra lla x e rro rs between the gage needle and
scale. Systematic e rro rs can s e rio u s ly a f f e c t the accuracy
o f a measurement.
2 .2 .1 .6 Random e rro rs - the flu c t u a t io n in the measurement
due to the f i n i t e p re c is io n o f the t e s t equipment. For
example, the measurement o f a constant flow in a permea
b i l i t y t e s t can vary due to the u n c e rta in tie s in the mea
surement o f volume and elapsed tim e.
2 .2 .1 .7 U ncertainty - the combined e ff e c t o f random e rro rs
in a measurement. For a s u ite o f several samples, i t is
the combined e ffe c ts o f random v a ria tio n s o f the average
m aterial p ro p e rtie s .
2.2 .2 Measurement u n c e r ta in tie s . Each piece o f data obtained
from a la b o ra to ry t e s t has an u n c e rta in ty associated w ith i t
th a t i s the combination o f the in d iv id u a l u n c e rta in tie s of the
measurements required to obtain the data. A d e ta ile d d is
cussion of u n c e rta in ty a n alysis is hig h ly complex and beyond
the scope o f t h i s manual. The user is re fe rre d to standard
s t a t i s t i c s t e x t s . However, a few concepts w i l l be defined to
provide the background f o r the e r r o r analysis requirements in
the procedures.
The basis f o r u n c e rta in ty estimates o f measurements is the stan
dard theory o f propagation o f e r ro rs . I f a value, y , is a
fu n c tio n o f several independent measurements:
y = f(u ,v ,x ...) (1)
The theory o f propagation o f e rro rs re la te s the uncertainty

o f each measurement to the u n c e rta in ty o f the to t a l measurement
by:
w ^ = {— )^ w ^ + ( - ^ ) ^ w ^ w ^ ... (2)
y ' u' ^ v' V ' x' X ^ '
where w^ = u n c e rta in ty o f the value of y

w ,w ,w = u n c e rta in tie s in measurements o f u, v, and x.
U V A
For example, a modulus o f deformation te s t is run on a basalt

core. The fo llo w in g equipment is used:
pressure gage: range: 0-200 psi (0-1.38 MPa)
accuracy: 1% of f u l l scale
2 2
h y d ra u lic ram: area: 25.00 in . (161.25 cm )
LVDTs: c a lib r a t io n fa c to r : 0.200 in ./V (0.51 cm/V)
gage len gth: 2.000 in . (5.08 cm)
voltm e te r: accuracy: 0.05% of reading
diameter: 2.050 in . (5.207 cm)
The samples are stressed from 0 to 5000 psi (0 to 34.48 MPa) and
the deformation is lin e a r . The i n i t i a l voltm eter reading is
7.500 mV and the t o t a l change in output is 5.076 raV. The rock
modulus is calcu la te d to be 9.85x10 psi (6.79x10 MPa). How
accurate is th a t figu re?
The modulus, E, is calc u la te d using:
(3)
where o= stre ss in the sample

e= s t r a in in the sample.
The s tre s s in the sample, a , i s c a lc u la te d using:
SA
- (4)
where S = pressure gage reading

A = area of ram
r
A^ = area o f sample.
The s t r a in in the sample, e , i s c a lcu la te d using:
^ = ^ (5)
where AV = change in output voltage from LVDT

C = LVDT c a l i b r a t i o n fa c to r
L = gage length.
The area o f the sample, A^, i s c a lcu la te d using:
. IT ^
^s = T (6)
where d = the measured diameter.
Applying Equation 2 to Equation 6, the e r r o r , w^ , associated

w ith the sample area may be calcu la te d using: s
2 ” ^.2 2 (7)
“ Aj “ -T "d
where w^ = the u n c e rta in ty in the sample diameter.
The sample diameter was measured w ith a micrometer c a lip e r capable

o f reading to 0.001 in . (0.03 mm) and accurate to 0.001 in . (0.03
mm). T h erfo re, w .^ is 0 .0 01 ^(0.03). Working through the algebra,
w^ i s (0.003 in . (0.2 mm ).
s
To c a lc u la te the e r r o r associated w ith the stre ss measurement, vi^.
Equation 4 i s combined w ith Equation 2:
2 ^r 2 ^ 2 ^ ^ ^r 2 (8)
“a =
s s s
where w^ = e r r o r associated w ith the area o f the hyd rau lic
r ram
W = e r r o r associated w ith the pressure gage reading
The value o f S is chosen to correspond to 2500 psi (17.24 MPa)
sample s tre s s , the average value over the p re ss u rlza tlo n cycle.
The fo llo w in g parameters are inp ut in to Equation 8:
S = 100 psi (Q.689 MPa)

Wg = 2 psi (0.014 MPa) (from performance v e r if ic a t i o n t e s t )
A = 25.00 i n . ^2 (161.25 or cm^)
„2 >
r 2 2
w. = 0.01 in . (0.645 mm ) (from manufacturer; subse
quently v e r if ie d )
= 3.301 i n . ^ (21.29 cm^)
Was = 0.003 i n . ^ (0.2 mm^) (from above)
Solving Equation 8, w a i s found t o be approximately 15 psi (0.103 MPa).

To c a lc u la te the e r r o r associated w ith the s tr a in measurement, w^.
Equation 5 is combined w ith Equation 2;
.,2 ,, 2 ^ AV^ , 2 ^ A v V ,,2 (9)

” e ' -[7 “ iV * — 2 ” c —[T "l
The value of AV is chosen to correspond to the averagechange

in voltage over the p re s s u riz a tio n cycle. The e r ro r in the
voltage reading, may be approximated by the root mean square
of the e rro rs o f the i n i t i a l and f i n a l voltage, or 0.007 mV.
The fo llo w in g parameters are in p u t in to Equation 9:
A V = 2.538 mV
w^y = 0.007 mV
C = 0.0002 in./mV (0.005 mm/mV)
w^ = 0.000001 in./mV (2.5x10” ^ mm/mV) (from c a lib r a tio n )
L = 2.000 in . (5.08 cm)
w^^ = 0.001 in . (0.03 mm) (accuracyo f d ia l micrometer)
Solving Equation 9, the e r r o r associated w ith the s tra in measure

ment is 1.5x10" .
F i n a l l y , to c a lc u la te the e r r o r associated w ith the modulus
value, w^. Equation 3 is combined w ith Equation 2:
"'e = ^
z ‘-
^ e
The stress and s t r a in are evaluated at the midpoint o f the pres
s u r iz a tio n cycle . The fo llo w in g parameters are input in to Equa
t io n 10:
B m
CT= 2500 psi (17.24 MPa)
w = 15 psi (0.103 MPa) (from above)
^ -6
e= 254x10 °
w ^ = 1.5x10"^ (from above)
Solving Equation 10, W£ i s 0.83 x 10^ psi (5.72x10^ MPa). ThuSg
the e r r o r associated w ith the modulus determ ination is jfO.08x10
psi (0.06x10 MPa).
For t h i s t e s t , then, E = 9.85 0.08x10^ psi (7.79 j+^0.06x10^ MPa).
2.2 .3 Sources o f e r r o r . Measurement accuracy is determined
p r im a r ily by the a b i l i t y to c o n tro l systematic e rro rs . Precise
c a l i b r a t i o n of t e s t equipment, adequate t r a i n i n g o f t e s t per
sonnel, c o n tro l o f the t e s t environment, and design of e x p e ri
ments w ith redundant systems are areas o f major importance in
performing accurate te s t s .
Random e rro rs p r im a r ily r e f l e c t the l im it a t io n s o f the t e s t
equipment. C ertain environmental f a c t o r s , such as radio i n t e r
ference or v ib r a t io n , can also in flu e n c e measurements in q u ite
random ways. Careful experiment design and environmental con
t r o l are the two primary means o f minim izing random e rro rs .
3.0 Test equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n

3.1 D e f i n it io n of terms and concepts.
3.1.1 Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . The procedures in t h is manual
spe cify c e r ta in accuracies, re s o lu tio n s , and oth er requirements
f o r the equipment used in the te s t s . Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n
means demonstrating th a t the equipment does indeed perform w ith in
the required s p e c ific a tio n s . The demonstration must be con
ducted according to standard, accepted, defendable procedures.
. In general, c a l i b r a t i o n of the equipment is the method o f per
formance v e r i f i c a t i o n .
3.1.2 C a lib r a t io n . C a lib r a tio n means sub je ctin g a piece of
equipment to a change in the parameter o f in te r e s t by means
of a known in p u t, and m onitoring the actual output. The v a r ia
t io n between the input and output is used to c a lc u la te the
c o rre ct reading o f a measured value in an actual t e s t . A l t e r
n a t iv e ly , the c a lib r a t io n can v e r if y th a t the equipment per
formance i s w ith in a c e r ta in acceptable l i m i t o f e r ro r which
w i l l be used when eva luatin g the t e s t data.
3.2 Standards.
During c a l i b r a t i o n , the equipment is e f f e c t i v e l y being measured
against a known standard. C le a r ly , the accuracy o f the stan
dard w i l l be the l i m i t i n g fa c t o r in the c a lib r a t io n . The most
accurate standards are maintained by the U.S. National Bureau
o f Standards (NBS).
Not a l l equipment, o f course, can be c a lib ra te d d i r e c t l y against
NBS standards. Most equipment is c a lib ra te d against standards
th a t are tra ceab le to NBS standards. This means th a t the stan
dard was c a lib ra te d against another standard which was c a lib r a
ted against another standard and so fo r th u n t i l the la s t stan
dard is the NBS standard. T r a c e a b ility to NBS is the best prac
t i c a l way to ensure a minimum level of accuracy in the equip
ment c a lib r a t io n .
A ll c a l i b r a t i o n of equipment used in these procedures shall
be against standards traceable to NBS unless otherwise stated.
3.3 Performance s p e c ific a tio n s .
3.3.1 S p e c ific requirements. S p e c ific performance requirements
f o r equipment are l i s t e d in each t e s t procedure.
3.3.2 M anufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s . For equipment which does
not have s p e c ific requirements stated in the procedures, the
performance s p e c ific a tio n s supplied by the manufacturer shall
be the basis f o r performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . This is p a r t ic u la r ly
re le van t f o r e le c tro n ic equipment, such as voltmeters and o s c i l
loscopes. This type o f equipment is generally c a lib ra te d before
i t leaves the fa c to ry . The manufacturer can recommend the time
in te r v a ls and procedures f o r r e c a lib r a tio n .
3.4 E rro r estim ates.
As discussed in Section 2.2, the accuracy o f a piece of equip
ment influences the e r r o r associated w ith the data. The e r ro r
c o n trib u tio n s from several pieces of equipment in a te s t setup
can be estimated by performing a p ro p a g a tio n -o f-e rro r analysis
on the system, s im ila r to th a t in Section 2.2 .2. Not a l l i n
strument u n c e rta in tie s c o n trib u te the same amount to the f in a l
e r r o r , and the accuracy o f the te s t can often be improved by
upgrading those pieces o f equipment which con trol the e r ro r,
or by improving t h e i r c a lib r a t io n .
3.5 System c a l i b r a t i o n s .
Because o f the complex nature and possible in te ra c tio n o f e r r o r -
producing fa c to rs in a te s t system, c a lib r a tio n of the e n tire
system is preferred where possible to produce a more accurate
e r r o r estim ate. For example, c a lib r a t in g an u ltra s o n ic v e lo c ity
t e s t system by using standards o f known material properties is
pre fe ra b le to performing a p ro p a g a tio n -o f-e rro r analysis on i n d i
vidual pieces o f e le c tro n ic equipment.
3.6 S p e c ific c a lib r a t io n procedures.
(S p e c ific c a l i b r a t i o n procedures w i l l be included at a l a t e r d a te .)
10
•8
4.0 S t a t i s t i c a l methods
! •
4.1 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y .
No two rock samples w i l l give the same re s u lts when tested, even
i f cut from the same piece o f core adjacent to each oth er, because
the re are d iffe re n c e s in composition, h is t o r y , and stru ctu re s such
as fra c tu re s and pores. The re s u lts o f te s ts in a single s u ite of
rocks, then, w i l l show a range o f values. When applying these
r e s u lts , the u n c e rta in ty due to t h i s sample v a r i a b i l i t y must be
appreciated as well as the measurement e r r o r of the in d ivid u a l
data po in ts. To q u a n tify the u n ce rta in ty due to sample v a r ia
b i l i t y , the fo llo w in g s t a t i s t i c a l methods are use ful.
4.1.1 Average. The average, X, f o r a group of data is ca lc u la te d :
N
J
S < " >
i= l
where:
N = number of data points
X^. = values of in d iv id u a l data points.
For example, modulus te s ts are run on a s u ite of basalt samples

and the r e s u lts are 9.85, 8.97, 9.11, 10.24, and 9.90 x 10 psi
(6.79, 6.1 8,^6.28 , 7.06, and.6.83 x 10 MPa). The average value
i s 9.61 X 10 psi (6.63 x l o V a ) .
4.1 .2 Range. The range o f the data is expressed by the lowest and
highest values. Thus, the range of the data in Section 4.1.1 is
8.97 to 10.24 X 10 psi (6.18 to 7.06 x 10 MPa).
4.1 .3 Standard d e v ia tio n . The standard d e v ia tio n , s, f o r a group
o f data is a measure of the v a r ia tio n of each data point from the
average:
S= ( 12 )
In p r a c tic e , s is more e a s ily c alcu la ted from the a lg e b ra ic a lly

equivale nt form o f Equation 12:
s2 _
E
i= l 'V i= l V (13)
■ RTNTT)-----------------------------------
11
The standard d e v ia tio n o f the data in Section 4.1.1 i s 0.55 x • i
10° psi (0.38 X 10^ MPa).
4 .1 .4 U n c e rta in ty . The u n c e rta in ty o f the data is an estimate o f
the expected values o f more te s ts conducted on the sames u ite o f
samples. U n c e rta in tie s are evaluated w ith various degrees o f
confidence based on p r o b a b ilit y theory and on assumed d i s t r ib u t i o n
of the data. In most rock mechanics t e s t in g , the in d iv id u a l data
p o in ts can d e viate from the average by any value because o f the
complexity o f the m aterial and the t e s t procedures. However,
large d e v ia tio n s are r e l a t i v e l y less frequent than smaller
d e v ia tio n s . In t h i s case, the data is assumed to have a normal
d i s t r i b u t i o n of values about the average.
The u n c e rta in ty o f the t e s t data, U, is c a lcu la te d by:
(14)
U= t
where s = standard d e v ia tio n

N = number o f te s ts
t = confidence c o e f f ic ie n t s f o r the Student's t
d i s t r i b u t i o n , * from Table 4.1
For the data given in Section 4 .1 .1 , the number o f degrees o f
freedom (N-1) i s 4. The confidence c o e f f ic ie n t is thus 2.13 at
the 95% le v e l. Using thg standard d e v ia tio n calcu la ted above, the
u n c e rta in ty i s 0.59 x 10 psi (0.41 x 10 MPa). The average modulus
value f o r the sample s u ite may thus be w r it t e n :
E = 9.61 + 0.59 X 10^ psi (6.63 + 0.41 x 10^ MPa)
This means th a t i f more samples were tested from the same rock
s u ite , the mean modulus values o f oth er t e s t groups would have a
6
95% p r o b a b ilit y o f f a l l i n g w ith in the range o f 9.02 to 10.20 x 10
psi (6.22 to 7.04 x 10 MPa).
*The S tudent's t d i s t r i b u t i o n is s im ila r to the standard normal d i s

t r i b u t i o n , approaching i t as the number of te s ts approaches i n f i n i t y .
12
TABLE 4.1^
Confidence C o e ffic ie n ts f o r Student's t D is tr ib u tio n
t , a t confidence level
Degrees of
idom (N-1) 99% 95% 90%
1 31.82 6.31 3.08

2 6.96 2.92 1.89
3 4.54 2.35 1.64
4 3.75 2.13 1.53
5 3.36 2.02 1.48

6 3.14 1.94 1.44
7 3.00 1.90 1.42
8 2.90 1.86 1.40
9 2.82 1.83 1.38
10 2.76 1.81 1.37

11 2.72 1.80 1.36
12 2.68 1.78 1.36
13 2.65 1.77 1.35
14 2.62 1.76 1.34
15 2.60 1.75 1.34

16 2.58 1.75 1.34
17 2.57 1.74 1.33
18 2.55 1.73 1.33
19 2.54 1.73 1.33
20 2.53 1.72 1.32

21 2.52 1.72 1.32
22 2.51 1.72 1.32
23 2.50 1.71 1.32
24 2.49 1.71 1.32
25 2.48 1.71 1.32

26 2.48 1.71 1.32
27 2.47 1.70 1.31
28 2.47 1.70 1.31
29 2.46 1.70 1.31
30 2.46 1.70 1.31

40 2.42 1.68 1.30
60 2.39 1.67 1.30
120 2.36 1.66 1.29
» (normal 2.33 1.65 1.28
di s t r i b u t ion)
Adapted from M i l l e r , I . and Freund, J.E^ 1965, P ro b a b ility and S t a t is t ic s

f o r Engineers, P re n tic e -H a l1, Inc. New Jersey, p. 399.
13
4.2 Group c o r r e l a t io n .
I f rock su ite s have been tested from several areas w ith in a
s in g le fo rm a tio n , i t may be o f in t e r e s t to determine whether
d iffe re n c e s in re s u lts are due to sampling u n c e rta in tie s o f a
s in g le m a te r ia l, or whether they represent d i s t i n c t mechanical
v a ria tio n s in the rock. To compare two groups, a confidence
c o e f f i c i e n t , t , i s c a lc u la te d from the s t a t i s t i c s o f the groups
using:
*
t I
’‘l - Ih
j
" 2 (V « 2 -2 )
(1^)
V (N ^ -l)s ^ ^ + (N2-1)s2'' V + N2
where = average value o f group 1

Sj = standard d e v ia tio n o f group 1
Nj = number o f te s ts in group 1
1^ 2 = average value o f group 2
S2 = standard d e v ia tio n o f group 2
N2 = number o f te s ts in group 2.
The confidence level f o r the value o f t c a lcu la te d from Equation

15 is found from Table 4.1. The degrees o f freedom in t h is case
are equal to Nj+N2 ~2 . The confidence level is the p r o b a b ility
th a t the two groups o f te s ts are s i g n i f i c a n t l y d i f f e r e n t .
For example, two suite s o f ba salt cores are tested to determine
modulus of deform ation. The two s u ite s represent rock from
two boreholes several hundred fe e t apart in the same rock f o r
mation. The fo llo w in g s t a t i s t i c s are found f o r each group:
= 9.85 X 10® psi (6.79 x 10^ MPa)

s^ =0.71 X 10® psi (0.49 x 10^ MPa)
= 5
^ 2 =8.66 X 10® psi (5.97 x 10^ MPa)
S2 =1.20 X 10® psi (0.83 x 10^ MPa)
N2 =8
The t value c a lc u la te d from Equation 15 is 1.99. For 11 degrees

o f freedom, the t value at the 95% confidence level is 1.81.
Therefore, i t is more than 95% probable th a t the rock suites
from the two boreholes represent m a te ria ls o f d i s t i n c t l y d i f
fe re n t modulus.
14
4.3 Comparisons.
The u n c e rta in ty due to sample v a r i a b i l i t y should be compared to
the e r r o r of an in d iv id u a l measurement. The sample v a r i a b i l i t y
u n c e rta in ty should be s i g n i f i c a n t l y la rg e r than the measure
ment e r r o r (a t le a s t 2 to 3 times) to allow comment on the te s t
s u ite . For rocks, t h i s w i l l ge nerally be the case. I f not,
the t e s t system should be improved u n t i l the measurement e r ro r
decreases s u f f i c i e n t l y .
5.0 Q ua lity Assurance

5.1 Purpose.
5.1.1 Conformance to standards. The Q uality Assurance program
i s intended to ensure th a t the actual te s tin g program s a t is f ie s
the requirements and s p e c ific a tio n s established in these pro
cedures. The s p e c ific tasks involved in implementing the pro
gram are discussed in Section 5.2.
5.1.2 Documentation. Documentation is a key part of the NWTS
program. An e f f e c t iv e Q u a lity Assurance program w i l l monitor
p ro je c t documentation so th a t the fo llo w in g requirements are
s a tis fie d .
5 .1 .2 .1 T r a c e a b ility . The h is to ry o f each rock sample
and piece of t e s t equipment should be completely recorded.
For rock samples, the h is to ry from i n i t i a l recovery, logging,
and storage through shipping, prepa ratio n, and te s tin g must
be a v a ila b le to v e r if y the i d e n t i t y of the sample and allow
e v a lu a tio n of the t e s t r e s u lts in l i g h t of i t s previous
h is to r y . For equipment, a h is to ry from manufacture through
c a l i b r a t i o n and t e s t in g , w ith emphasis on repairs or modi
f i c a t i o n s , should be a v a ila b le to aid in evaluating equip
ment performance.
5 .1 .2 .2 Defendabi1i t y . Test program documentation should
provide a c le a r account o f what equipment was used, how
the t e s t was performed, and how the re s u lts were derived.
In t h i s way i t can be v e r if ie d at a l a t e r date th a t the
t e s t program was conducted in accordance w ith recommended
procedures and s p e c ific a tio n s .
5 .1 .2 .3 Preservation. A complete set o f documents on the
t e s t in g program should be preserved separately from the
working and re p o rtin g copies, so th a t no t e s t inform ation
is l o s t .
5 .1 .2 .4 R e t r ie v a b il i t y . The documentation should be o r
ganized and stored conveniently so th a t any piece may be
e a s ily recovered upon request.
5.2 Primary ta s k s .
5.2.1 Personnel p r e q u a l i f i c a t i o n . In rock mechanics laboratory
t e s t in g , the primary personnel are the Test Supervisor, who
15
d ir e c ts the o v e ra ll program. Inspects the t e s t in g apparatus,
evaluates the measurements, and troubleshoots when necessary,
and the Technicians, who prepare samples, assemble equipment,
and perform the t e s t . The Q u a lity Assurance program should
e s ta b lis h and v e r if y the q u a lif ic a t io n s f o r each type of p o s i
t io n . In general, the Test Supervisor should have performed
the t e s t p re v io u s ly , be able to reduce the data, have a good
understanding of the theory and a p p lic a tio n s o f the data ob
tained from the t e s t , and be f a m i l i a r w ith the equipment used.
The Technicians should understand the purpose o f each piece
of t e s t equipment, be able to assemble and operate the te s t
equipment, understand in general the purpose o f the data, and
be thoroughly f a m i li a r w ith the t e s t procedure. The Q uality
Assurance program can v e r i f y these q u a lif ic a t io n s by w r itte n
and oral t e s t in g of candidate t e s t personnel, by te s t in g the
candidate's a b i l i t y to assemble and operate the equipment in
the la b , and by e v a lu a tin g the candidate's background.
5.2.2 Instrument c a lib r a t io n c e r t i f i c a t i o n . The Q ua lity Assur-
ance program should v e r i f y th a t a l l equipment c a lib r a t io n and
performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is conducted according to accepted pro
cedures and th a t the standards are traceable to NBS as ap
p ro p ria te . C a lib r a tio n c e r t i f i c a t e s are ge nerally issued iden
t i f y i n g the piece of equipment, the c a lib r a t io n standard and i t s
NBS t r a c e a b i l i t y , the c a l i b r a t i o n data or r e s u lts , and the
time in te rv a l f o r which the c a lib r a t io n is acceptable. A
complete set of c a l i b r a t i o n c e r t i f i c a t e s should be maintained
by Q u a lity Assurance personnel.
5.2.3 Inspection during t e s t i n g . Q ua lity Assurance personnel
should inspect the t e s t setup p r io r to the s t a r t of any new
type of t e s t , and p e r io d ic a lly t h e r e a fte r , to v e r if y th a t the
c o rre ct equipment and procedure are being used. Deviations
from standard procedure or equipment should be documented,
j u s t i f i e d , a n d approved by tec h n ic a l personnel before the t e s t
proceeds.
16
Procedure L - A .l
Bulk Density o f Rock Samples
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective of t h i s t e s t . This t e s t determines the bulk
density o f a rock sample a t ambient temperature. The buoyancy
method I s used, which Is s u ita b le f o r both re g u la rly and I r r e g u la r ly
shaped samples.
1.2 General d e s c rip tio n o f the t e s t .
The sample Is weighed e i t h e r dry or at I t s natural moisture content.
The sample Is oven d r ie d , then submerged In a s u ita b le f l u i d and
saturated. The submerged saturated mass Is determined. The sample
Is surface d rie d and I t s saturated surface-dry mass Is determined.
Bulk volume and bulk de n sity are then calcu la ted .
1.3 Data re d u ctio n .
1.3.1 Terms and d e f i n i t i o n s .
1 .3 .1 .1 Bulk d e n s ity - the mass o f a u n it volume of the
sample. The bulk d e n sity Includes the e ffe c ts of a l l pores
and f i l l i n g s , a l t e r a t i o n zones, j o i n t s , etc.
1.3 .1 .2 Bulk volume - the volume o f the sample In I t s natural
s ta te . In c lu d in g the volume of pores, fra c tu re s , etc .
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2 .1 Bulk volume, Vj^, I s calcu la ted using:
*^sat ~ ^sub (1)

''b Pf
where :
^s a t ~ saturated surface-dry mass of the sample
^sub “ saturated submerged mass o f the sample
= de nsity o f the submergence f l u i d .
1 .3 .2 .2 The bulk d e n s ity , p|^. Is c a lcu la ted using:
M.
C
b ' v: ( 2)
where: M = the mass o f the sample, e ith e r dry or under

na tural c o n dition s.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Designation C97, "Standard Test Methods fo r
Absorption and Bulk S p e c ific G ravity o f Natural B u ilding Stone,"
Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 19.
A .1-1
1.4. 2 Foundation Sciences, I n c . , 1981, F ie ld and In S itu Rock
Mechanics Testing Manual, ONWI-310, O ffic e o f Nuclear Waste
I s o la t io n , B a t t e lie Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4 .3 ISRM, Commission on S tan dardization o f Laboratory and F ie ld
Tests, 1979, "Suggested Methods f o r Determining Water Content,
P o ro s ity , D en sity, A bsorption, and Related P roperties and Swelling
and S la k e - D u ra b ility Index P ro p e rtie s ," I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min.
Sci. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 16, No. 2.
2.0 P re re q u is ite s
2.1 Personnel p r e q u a l i f i c a t i o n .
A l l personnel involved in performing the t e s t , in c lu d in g the
Technicians and Test S upervisor, s h a ll be fo rm a lly p re q u a lifie d
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures established as part o f the
o v e ra ll t e s t in g program.
2.2 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n .
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the performance
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure s h a ll be v e r if ie d .
I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, the manufacturer's
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the required level o f
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n i s ge nerally done by
c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib ra tio n and
documentation s h a ll be accomplished according to standard Q u a lity
Assurance procedures.
2.3 C r i t e r i a f o r sample s e le c tio n .
2.3.1 P roje ct scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
depend p a r t l y on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the t e s t re s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n o f the s i t e
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations, w h ile a
d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate re p o s ito ry
rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le form ation. The f i n a l
te s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the tech nical judgment and
experience of p ro je c t personnel.
2 .3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested must
be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r
eva lu a tio n o f the re s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to
evaluate the r e s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3 .3 Nonhomogeneities. Fracture f i l l i n g s , in c lu s io n s , or a l t e r a
t io n zones may e x h ib it s i g n i f i c a n t l y d i f f e r e n t d e n s itie s than the
o v e ra ll rock mass. These s tru c tu re s should be included in the t e s t
program t o provide an estim ate o f t h e i r e f f e c t .
2.4 Preservation o f moisture c o n d itio n o f samples.
I f the density o f the rock under natural con dition s is to be
determined, the moisture content of the rock core s h a ll be preserved
between the time o f recovery and t e s t in g as described in
Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage o f Rock Core Samples,"
see Ref. 1.4.2.
A. 1-2
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample sh a ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to
standard Q u a lity Assurance procedures.
3.0 Equipment and apparatus

3.1 Weighing device.
The device f o r measuring the mass o f the sample sh a ll have an
accuracy o f at le a s t 7.0 x 10" oz ^ (0.02 g) and a re s o lu tio n o f
a t le a s t 3.5 x 10" oz (0.01 g). I t sha ll be equipped to weigh
the sample submerged.
3.2 Suspension device.
The sample is suspended in the t e s t f l u i d and weighed. A simple
f in e - w ir e basket is s u ita b le to support the sample.
3.3 Oven.
A c i r c u l a t i n g a i r oven s h a ll be used to dry the sample. I t sha ll
be capable o f m aintaining a temperature of 221° 4°F (105° _+ 2°C)
over a period of at le a s t 24 hours.
3.4 Submergence f l u i d .
For most rock types, d i s t i l l e d water sha ll be used. Should the
sample contain minerals which are water s o lu b le , change volume or
otherwise d e te rio ra te in water, an in e r t f l u i d , such as carbon
t e t r a c h lo r id e , naphtha, tolu ene , e tc . sh a ll be used. The density
of the f l u i d a t the t e s t temperature shall be known.
3.5 Vacuum equipment.
A vacuum system s h a ll be used to saturate the sample by removing
any a ir frorn the sample and i t s surface-connected pores. The
system s h a ll be capable o f m aintaining a vacuum of less than 0.1
psi f o r a period of at le a s t 1 hour. A vacuum gage shall be used
to m onitor the pressure on the sample. The gage sh a ll have an
accuracy o f at le a s t 0.05 psi (345 Pa) and a re s o lu tio n of at
le a s t 0.01 psi (69 Pa).
3.6 Temperature measurement.
The temperature of the submergence f l u i d s h a ll be measured during
the t e s t . The transducer sh a ll have an accuracay o f at lea st
0.2°C (0.4°F) and a re s o lu tio n of at le a s t 0.2°F (0.1°C). An
engraved stem thermometer is recommended.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Sample dimensions.
Regularly o r i r r e g u l a r l y shaped samples may be used in t h is
procedure. I t is recommended th a t the surface o f the sample be as
smooth as possible to minimize a i r entrapment. The sample shall
have a mass o f at le a s t 3.5 oz (100 g).
A. 1-3
4.2 T e s tin g .
4.2.1 I n i t i a l mass. Any loose m aterial s h a ll be c a r e f u lly and
completely removed from the sample p r i o r to t e s t in g . The i n i t i a l
mass o f the sample s h a ll be determined to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz
(0.01 g ). I t is recommended th a t t h i s step be performed w ith the
sample at the natural moisture c o n d itio n . I f the sample i s to be
tested d ry , i t s dry mass as described in Section 4.2 .2 s h a ll be the
i n i t i a l mass.
4.2 .2 D rying. The sample s h a ll be dried in the oven at 221° ^
4^F (lOS*^ 2°C) f o r not less than 24 hours. I f the natural
moisture c o n d itio n is not used as the basis f o r the d e n s ity , the
mass o f the sample s h a ll be determined to the nearest 3.5 x 10"
oz (0.01 g) a f t e r i t has cooled.
4.2.3 S a tu ra tio n . The sample s h a ll be submerged in the t e s t f l u i d
and saturated by applying a vacuum o f less than 0.1 psi f o r at
le a s t 1 hour. In any case, the vacuum s h a ll continue u n t i l
bubbles no longer form on the surface o f the sample. The sample
s h a ll be a g ita te d p e r i o d ic a l l y to remove any trapped a i r . I t is
recommended th a t the sample be placed in the weighing basket p r io r
to s a tu ra tio n .
4 .2 .4 Submergence during handling. The sample s h a ll remain
submerged a t a l 1 times between s a tu ra tio n and measurement o f
submerged mass.
4.2 .5 Submerged mass. The saturated submerged mass o f the sample
sh a ll be detennined to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz (0.01 g). The
basket s h a ll be immersed to the same depth as when i t s ta re was
determined.
4.2 .6 F lu id temperature. The temperature o f the submergence f l u i d
s h a ll be determined to the nearest 0.2°F (0.1°C).
4.2 .7 Surface d ry in g . The sample sh a ll be surface dried using a
c lo th moistened w ith the t e s t f l u i d . Care sha ll be exercised th a t
no p o rtio n of the sample i s l o s t during the surface drying process.
4.2 .8 Saturated mass. The saturated mass o f the surface-dry
sample s h a ll be immediately determined to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz
(0.01 g).
4.2 .9 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form L - A .1-1
sha ll be recorded as a minimum f o r t h i s t e s t .
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re p o rt. F u rthe r d e ta ils may be added as
a p p ro p ria te , and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary.
A p p lic a tio n s o f the t e s t r e s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s procedure,
but may be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s tin g programs. In th a t case, an
a p p lic a tio n s se ctio n compatible w ith the format described below should
be included.
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section o f the re p o r t.
The in tro d u c to ry section is intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s o f the
m aterial te s te d .
A. 1-4
5.1.1 Scope of te s t in g program.
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te s te d . In a large report covering
the r e s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, the t e s t m atrix is
best presented in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r the
number and types o f samples tested sh a ll be c le a r ly stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s t in g program. The areas o f
i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and the
l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n shall
be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tru c tu re
and f a b r i c , grain s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s or voids, and weathering of
the samples s h a ll be described, as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general is not
required. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several rock types, many
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recommended
fo r c la r ity .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the equipment
a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sh a ll be included in the re p o rt. The
name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s o f each major piece
s h a ll be l i s t e d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the t e s t shall
be l i s t e d in d e ta ile d steps.
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure varies
from the requirements contained in t h i s procedure, each v a r ia tio n
and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ffe c t of the v a r ia tio n
upon the t e s t re s u lts s h a ll be discussed.
5.3 Theoretical background.
5.3.1 Data reduction equations. A ll equations used to reduce the
data shal 1 be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assumptions
inherent in the equations or l im it a t io n s in t h e i r a p p lic a tio n s
sh a ll be noted, and the e ff e c t on the re s u lts discussed.
5.3.2 S it e - s p e c if ic in flu e n c e s .
5 .3 .2 .1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual
la b o ra to ry t e s t c on dition s conform to the assumptions contained
in the data reduction equations sha ll be discussed.
5 .3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to rs . Any fa c to rs or methods applied
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall be
f u l l y explained.
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary ta b le of re s u lts in clud ing the t e s t
suite s and average values w ith ranges and u n c e rta in tie s sha ll be
presented.
A.1-5
5.4.2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A ta b le of in d iv id u a l re s u lts in c lu d in g
a t le a s t sample numbers, rock types and form atio ns, bulk d e n s ity ,
and bulk volume i f a p p ro p ria te , s h a ll be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses and presenta
tio n s may be included as a p pro pria te.
5 .4 .3 .1 Bulk d e n s ity compared to g rain de nsity.
5 .4 .3 .2 Histogram o f re s u lts .
5 .4 .3 .3 C o rre la tio n w ith oth er rock p ro p e rtie s such as
p o r o s ity , s tre n g th , s t a t i c p ro p e rtie s .
5 .4 .3 .4 Comparison o f r e s u lts to o th e r rock suite s or to
previous stud ies.
5.5 E rro r estim ate.
The r e s u lts s h a ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be calc u la te d using a 95% confidence
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r r o r associated w ith a s in g le t e s t
sha ll be evaluated. TRTs includes the combined e ffe c ts o f a l l
temperature and mass determ inations.
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite o f rock samples, the
mean bulk d e n s ity , range, standard d e v ia tio n and 95% confidence
l i m i t s f o r the mean s h a ll be c a lcu la ted as a minimum. The
u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite sh a ll be compared w ith the measure
ment u n c e rta in ty to determine whether measurement e r r o r or sample
v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c t o r in the r e s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e l a t io n . When a p p ro p ria te , the means o f groups
sh a ll be compared to determine whether the observed d iffe re n c e
between groups is s i g n if ic a n t a t the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L - A .1-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.
6.0 Q u a lity Assurance

The fo llo w in g items are the minimum requirements to ensure th a t the
t e s t re s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to i d e n t i f y
those p o ints during the t e s t at which Q ua lity Assurance a ctio n is
requi red.
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p r e q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6.2 Test in s p e c tio n .
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the t e s t setup, procedure,
and performance v e r i f i c a t i o n o f the equipment. A fte r t e s t in g , the
completed Form L -A .1-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed o f f only i f
c o rre c t.
A.1-6
6.3 Required documentation.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q uality Assurance shall
maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3 .2 Equipment s e ria l numbers. Q ua lity Assurance shall v e r if y
th a t s e ria l numbers o f alT equipment used in the t e s t are recorded
on Form L -A .1-1.
6.3 .3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q ua lity Assurance shall maintain sig n e d -o ff
copies o f Form L -A .1-1.
A. 1-7
Bulk Density o f Rock Samples
Test Data Sheet - Fonn L -A .1-1
P ro je c t__________________________ Sample No._

Date_____________________________ Rock Type
Tested By________________________ Test F lu id
Test Temperature_________________ Type
Densi ty
Equipment Date of Next

D escrip tion Seri al No. C a lib ra tio n
Mass o f Sample, I n i t i a l
Mass o f Sample, Saturated and Submerged__
Mass o f Sample, Saturated and Surface Dry
Remarks:
I
Test Supervisor______________________________________ Date
Q ua lity Assurance____________________________________ Date
P ro je c t Engineer Date
Procedure L-A .2
Grain Density o f Rock Samples
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective of t h i s t e s t . This t e s t determines the density of
the s o lid p o rtio n o f a rock sample by .the pycnometric method.
1.2 General d e s c rip tio n of the t e s t .
The sample is powdered and passed through a sieve. I t is placed in
the pycnometer and dried to a constant mass. The sample mass is
determined. F lu id is added to the pycnometer. Trapped a i r is
removed from the sample e it h e r by heating or by a vacuum system.
The t o t a l mass o f the f l u i d , sample, and pycnometer is determined.
Grain density i s then c a lc u la te d .
1.3 Data Reduction.
1 .3 .1 .1 Grain density - the mass o f a u n it volume of the
s o lid p o rtio n of a rock. Voids, fra c tu re s , and other
d is c o n t in u it ie s in the in t a c t s tru c tu re o f the rock are not
accounted f o r .
1 .3 .1 .2 Pycnometer - a fla s k o f 0.68 to 3.4 f l oz (20 to
100 cc) capacity w ith a narrow scribed neck and stopper.
I t s design allows an accurate volume o f f l u i d to be repro-
d u c ib ly placed in the fla s k .
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2 .1 Grain d e n s ity , p^, i s calc u la te d using;
f"sPf
”9 °
where;
m^ = mass of the grains in the sample
m^^ = mass of the sample and f l u i d
= density o f f l u i d
Vfs = volume of f l u i d and sample (volume of pycnometer).
A.2-1
1 .3 .2 .2 The mass o f the sample and t e s t f l u i d , m ^ . Is
c a lc u la te d as:
"•sf " '"t ■ "’p (2)
where:
m^ = t o t a l mass o f pycnometer, sample,, and f l u i d
mp = mass o f pycnometer.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ISRM Commission on S tandardization o f Laboratory and F ie ld
Tests, 1979, "Suggested Methods f o r Determining Water Content,
P o ro s ity , D ensity, A bsorption, and Related P roperties and Swelling
and S la k e - D u ra b ility Index P ro p e rtie s ," I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min.
S c i. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 16, No. 2.
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures esta blishe d as pa rt o f the
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the performance
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure s h a ll be v e r if ie d .
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is general ly done by
documentation sh a ll be accomplished according to standard Q u a lity
2.3.1 P roject scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n of the s i t e
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations, w h ile a
te s tin g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the technical judgment and
experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
2.3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested must
be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r
e va luatio n of the r e s u lts . Rock types which are hig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to
evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
A .2-2
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. Fracture f i l l i n g s , in c lu s io n s , etc. may
e x h ib it s i g n i f i c a n t l y d i f f e r e n t gra in d e n s itie s than the parent
rock mass. F i l l i n g m a te ria ls and in t a c t rock should be tested
separately as w ell as in t h e i r natural proportions.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to

3.1 Sieve.
A 0 .0 09 8-in. (0.250-mm) mesh sieve (No. 50) shall be a v a ila b le .
3.2 Weighing device.
The weighing device s h a ll have an accuracy o f a t_ le a s t 7.0 x 10"^ oz
0.02 g) and a re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t 3.5 x 10” oz (0.01 g).
3.3 Pycnometer.
The pycnometer s h a ll have a capacity o f 0.68 to 3.4 f l oz (20 to
100 c c ).
3.4 Oven.
A c i r c u l a t i n g a i r oven capable o f m aintaining a temperature o f
221° ^ 4°F (105° 2°C) f o r a period o f 24 hours sha ll be a v a ila b le .
3.5 Test f l u i d .
For most rock types d i s t i l l e d water sha ll be used. Should the
sample contain minerals which are water soluble or which change
volume o r otherwise d e te rio ra te in water, an in e r t f l u i d , such as
carbon t e t r a c h lo r id e , naphtha, tolu e n e , e tc . sha ll be used. The
f l u i d s h a ll have good w e ttin g p ro p e rtie s . The density of the f l u i d
a t the t e s t temperature s h a ll be known.
3.6 Vacuum system.
A vacuum system may be used to d e -a ir the sample and t e s t f l u i d .
I t s h a ll be capable o f m aintaining a vacuum o f at le a s t 0.1 psi
(689 Pa) f o r a period o f at le a s t 1 hour. A vacuum gage sha ll be
used to m onitor the pressure in the sample. The gage shall have
an accuracy o f at le a s t + 0.05 psi (345 Pa) and a re s o lu tio n of
a t le a s t 0.01 psi (69 PaJ.
The temperature o f the submergence f l u i d sha ll be measured during
the t e s t . The transducer s h a ll have an accuracy o f at lea st
+_ 0.4°F (jf 0.2°C) and a re s o lu tio n of at le a s t 0.2°F (0.1°C). An
engraved stem thermometer is recommended.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Sample p re p a ra tio n .
4.1.1 C le an liness. The sample s h a ll be fre e from im p u ritie s such
as wrapping m a te ria ls , s o i l , d r i l l i n g mud, etc.
A .2-3
4.1.2 G rinding. The sample s h a ll be ground to a f in e powder using
a clean g rin d in g device. The g rin d in g surface s h a ll not contami
nate the sample during the g rin d in g process.
4.1 .3 S ie v in g . The ground sample s h a ll be passed through the
No. 60 mesh (0.250-mm; 0.0098 i n . ) sieve. Only the p o rtio n o f the
sample passing through the sieve sh a ll be used f o r the t e s t .
4.1 .4 S ize. The amount o f sample tested s h a ll be s u f f i c i e n t to
f i l l about 20% o f the volume o f the pycnometer. For a 1 . 7 - f l oz
(50-cc) pycnometer, 0.7 to 0.88 oz (20 to 25 g) o f sample is
recommended.
4.2 T e s tin g .
4.2.1 Pycnometer c a l i b r a t i o n . The pycnometer s h a ll be cleaned,
dried and weighed to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz (0.01 g). I t sh a ll
be f i l l e d to the designated mark w ith d e -a ire d , d i s t i l l e d water.
The f u l l pycnometer s h a ll be weighed to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz
(0.01 g) and the temperature of the water measured to the nearest
0.2°F ( 0 . 1°C). The volume o f the pycnometer s h a ll then be c a l
culated. The volume s h a ll be determined at le a s t three times and
the average value used.
4 .2 .2 Sample d r y in g . The sample sh a ll be placed in the pycnometer
and drie d in the oven a t 221°F + 4°F (105° _+ 2°C) f o r at le a s t
24 hours.
4 .2 .3 Dry mass. The mass o f the dry_sample and pycnometer s h a ll
be determined to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz (0.01 g).
4.2 .4 D e -a irin g . The pycnometer con tainin g the dry sample sh a ll
be f i l l e d to between 1/3 and 1/2 i t s volume w ith the t e s t f l u i d and
d e -aire d. I t i s recommended th a t the system be de-aired by applying
a vacuum o f at le a s t 0.1 psi (689 Pa) f o r at le a s t an hour, w ith
p e rio d ic a g it a t io n to remove trapped a i r . A lt e r n a t i v e l y , the system
may be heated to force the a i r out. The allow able temperature
depends on the type o f f l u i d , but sh a ll be low enough to avoid
excessive evaporation. P eriodic a g ita tio n is again recommended.
4.2 .5 Saturated mass. Test f l u i d s h a ll be added to f i l l the
pycnometer to the designated mark. The pycnometer containing
sample and f l u i d s h a ll be weighed to the nearest 3.5 x 10" oz
(0.01 g).
4 .2 .6 Temperature. The temperature of the t e s t f l u i d s h a ll be
measured to the nearest 0.2°F ( 0 . 1°C).
4 .2 .7 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form L -A .2-1
sh a ll be recorded, as a minimum.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re p o rt. Further d e ta ils may be added as appro
p r ia t e , and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary. A p p lic a tio n s
o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of t h i s procedure, but may be
an in te g ra l p a rt of some t e s t in g programs. In th a t case, an a p p lic a tio n s
section compatible w ith the format described below should be included.
A. 2-4
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section of the re p o r t.
The in tro d u c to ry section i s intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the te s t in g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tic s o f the
m aterial te s te s .
5.1.1 Scope o f te s t in g program.
5.1 .1 .1 Number of samples tested. In a large report covering
the r e s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, the t e s t m atrix is
t 5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r the
number and type of sample tested sh a ll be c le a r ly stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas of
in t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and the
l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n shall
5 .1 .2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. Rock type, s tru c tu re ,
f a b r i c , gra in s iz e , d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , voids, and weathering o f the
samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il depends
on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general is not required.
In v a ria b le m a teria l or f o r several rock types, many samples may be
described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the equipment
a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll be included in the re p o rt. The
name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s sha ll be lis t e d fo r
each major piece.
5.2 .2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the t e s t shall
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure has varied
from the requirements contained in t h is procedure, each v a r ia tio n
and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ff e c t o f the v a ria tio n
data s h a ll be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assumptions
inherent in the equations and any l im it a t io n s in t h e i r a p p licatio ns
sh a ll be noted, and t h e i r e ffe c ts on the re s u lts discussed.
5.3.2 S it e - s p e c i f i c in flu e n c e s .
la b o ra to ry t e s t con d itio n s conform to the assumptions contained
in the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
5.3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to rs . Any fa c to rs or methods applied
A .2-5
5.4 R esu lts. •8
5.4.1 Summary t a b le . A ta b le o f r e s u lts in c lu d in g the t e s t s u ite
i d e n t i f i c a t i o n and average grain de nsity values, w ith ranges and
u n c e r ta in tie s , s h a ll be presented.
5.4 .2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A ta b le o f in d iv id u a l re s u lts in c lu d in g ,
as a minimum, sample numbers, rock types and form ations, and grain
d e n s itie s , s h a ll be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g oth e r types o f analyses and presenta
tio n s may be included as ap pro pria te.
5 .4 .3 .1 Grain d e n s ity compared to bulk d e n s ity.
5 .4 .3 .2 C alculated t o t a l p o ro s ity .
5 .4 .3 .3 Grain de n sity compared to apparent and t o t a l p o ro s ity .
5 .4 .3 .4 Histogram o f r e s u lts .
5 .4 .3 .5 C o rre la tio n w ith o th e r rock p ro p e rtie s such as
p e rm e a b ility and s tre n g th .
5 .4 .3 .6 Comparison o f re s u lts to oth e r rock s u ite s or to
previous s tu d ie s.
5.5 E rro r estim a te .
A ll u n c e rta in tie s sh a ll be c a lc u la te d using a 95% confidence
in te rv a l.
sha ll be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts o f a l l
temperature and mass determ inations.
5.5 .2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite o f rock samples, the
mean g rain d e n s ity , the range, standard d e v ia tio n and 95% confidence
l i m i t s f o r the mean should be c a lc u la te d , as a minimum. The
u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite s h a ll be compared w ith the
measurement u n c e rta in ty to determine whether measurement e r r o r or
sample v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c t o r in the r e s u lts .
sh a ll be compared to determine whether the observed d iffe re n c e s
between groups are s i g n if ic a n t a t the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L -A .2-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.

t e s t r e s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t o f
those po in ts during the t e s t where Q u a lity Assurance actio n is required.
in Section 2.1.
A. 2-6
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the te s t setup, the t e s t
procedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t i o n . A fte r t e s t in g ,
the completed Form L -A .2-1 sh a ll be reviewed and signed o f f only i f
c o rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q uality Assurance sha ll
I maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q ua lity Assurance sha ll v e r if y
th a t s e r ia l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are recorded
on Form L -A .2-1.
6.3 .3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q ua lity Assurance sh a ll maintain s ig n e d -o ff
A .2-7
Grain Density o f Rock Samples
Test Data Sheet - Form L -A .2-1
P roje ct__________________________ Sample No._

Date_____________________________ Rock Type
Tested By________________________ Test F lu id
Test Temperature_________________ Type_
Density
Equipment Date o f Next

D e s c rip tio n S e ria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Pycnometer Mass__
Pycnometer Volume
Mass o f Pycnometer and Sample (Dry)__

Mass o f Pycnometer, Sample, and Fluid_
Rema rk s ;
Test Supervisor_____________________________ |_________ Date

Q ua lity Assurance_____________________________________ Date
P roject Engi neer ___________________________________ Date
Bm Procedure L-A .3
Composition o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bje ctive of t h i s a n a lys is. The primary purpose o f p e tro
graphic a n a ly sis using a p o la riz in g microscope is to i d e n t i f y the
component phases o f a rock and determine the r e la t iv e percentage of
each phase. The petrographic an alysis w i l l also provide a basic
chemical c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f a rock sample and, when used in
con junctio n w ith the gra in size and fa b r ic analyses (Procedures
L-A .4 "Grain Size o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis" and
L-A .5 "Texture and Fabric o f Rock Samples by Petrographic
A n a ly s is " ) , w i l l provide info rm a tion on the h is to ry o f the rock's
form ation and subsequent a lt e r a t io n or deformation.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s .
1 .1 .2 .1 A petrographic examination does not y i e l d a complete
chemical a n alysis o f a rock sample. I t does allow i d e n t i f i
c a tio n o f the mineral phases and oth er phases such as
m in e ra lo id s , elements, and glasses.
While the general composition o f a mineral is fix e d , io n ic
s u b s titu tio n causes the d e ta ile d composition to be hig h ly
v a r ia b le . Bulk chemical a n a ly s is , x-ray flourescence, or other
techniques o f q u a n t it a tiv e analysis are required f o r exact
chemical a n a ly s is . S im ila r ly , s p e c ific i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f a
sample's mineral phases may re q u ire x-ray d i f f r a c t i o n ,
microprobe or o th e r an a lysis.
1 .1 .2 .2 Petrographic examination provides only lim ite d data
on extremely fin e -g ra in e d or c r y p to c r y s ta llin e m inerals, such
as gla s s, clays or opal. Opaque m inerals, such as m e ta llic
s u lfid e s and oxides, re q u ire special techniques in v o lv in g
r e fle c te d l i g h t . These components may be id e n t if ie d and
q u a n tifie d only in the most general way using a p o la riz in g
microscope.
1 .1 .2 .3 Petrographic examination of extremely coarse-grained
m aterial which is m ineralogical ly v a ria b le ( e .g ., breccia,
conglomerate) i s not p r a c t ic a l. These rock samples may be
i d e n t i f i e d by examination w ith a stereoscopic binocular
microscope.
Thin sections of rock samples are i d e n t i f i e d using a p o la riz in g
microscope. The component minerals are i d e n t i f i e d by t h e i r o p tic a l
p ro p e rtie s such as 2V, e x tin c tio n angle, d is p e rs io n , e tc . The
r e la t iv e amounts o f each mineral are determined by counting the
number of mineral grains w ith in a given area of the sample.
A. 3-1
1.3 Terms and d e f i n i t i o n s .
1.3.1 Phases - g e n e ra lly m ine rals, but can Include m ine ralo ids,
such as a c h e r t; elements such as copper or diamond; or glasses
such as t a c h y l i t e .
1.3 .2 . Thin section - a s l i c e o f m in e ra l, rock or any o th e r
c r y s t a l l i n e m aterial ground down to a standard thickness o f about
30 microns, f o r microscopic examination.
1.3.3 P o la riz in g microscope - a microscope which has an analyzer
located above the stage and a p o la r iz e r below the stage
(Bloss, 1966, Figure 4-1, p. 29).
1.3 .4 R e lie f - appearance or v i s i b i l i t y o f o u tlin e and surface o f
a m in e ra l. R’e l i e f is dependent on the d iffe re n c e between the index
o f r e f r a c t io n (N) o f the mineral and the mounting medium. Minerals
w ith in d ice s o f r e f r a c t io n d i f f e r i n g considerably from th a t o f the
medium have high r e l i e f , w hile those w ith N values near th a t o f the
medium have low r e l i e f .
1.3.5 Color - the c o lo r o f the mineral in the th in section in
p la ne-polarized l i g h t .
1.3.6 Pleochroism - a change in the c o lo r o f a mineral as the stage
i s ro tate d in pla n e -p o la rize d l i g h t .
1.3.7 Is o tr o p ic - m inerals through which l i g h t tra v e ls w ith the
same speed regardless o f i t s d ir e c t io n o f v ib r a t io n ; includes
is o m e tric c r y s ta ls and glass.
1.3 .8 A n is o tro p ic - minerals through which a l i g h t ray may tra v e l
a t d i f f e r e n t speeds f o r d i f f e r e n t d ir e c tio n s o f v ib r a tio n .
1.3.9 B ire frin g e n c e - the r e f r a c t iv e index o f an a n is o tr o ic medium
f o r the slow ray minus the r e f r a c t iv e index f o r the fa s t ray;
double r e f r a c t io n .
1.3.10 In te rfe re n c e c o lo rs - co lo rs displayed by a b ir e fr in g e n t
c ry s ta l under crossed n ic h o ls .
1.3.11 Optic axes - those d ir e c tio n s in a n is o tro p ic minerals along
which the re is no double r e fr a c tio n .
1.3.12 U niaxial - m inerals w ith one o p tic a x is , c o in c id in g w ith
the c -a x is o f the c r y s t a l , as w ith tetragonal and hexagonal
minerals.
1.3.13 B ia x ia l - m inerals w ith two o p tic axes, found in the
orthorhombic, m o n o clin ic, and t r i c l i n i c systems.
1.3.14 Optic angle (2V) - the angle between the two o p tic axes o f
a b ia x ia l c r y s t a l.
1.4 Suggested references.
1.4.1 Allman, M. and Lawrence, D .F ., 1972, Geological Laboratory
Techniques, Blanford Press, London.
1.4.2 ASTM, 1975, Test Designation C295-65, "Standard Recommended
P ractice f o r Petrographic Examination o f Aggregate fo r Concrete,"
A. 3-2
1.4.3 AS7W, 1975, Test Designation C294-69, "Standard D escrip tive
Nomenclature o f C onstituents o f Natural Mineral Aggregates," Annual
Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 14.
1.4 .4 Bloss, F.D ., 1966, An In tro d u c tio n to the Methods of
Optical C ry s ta llo g ra p h y , H o lt, Rinehart and Winston, New York,
New York.
1.4.5 Dana, E .S ., and Ford, W.E., 1964, Dana's Textbook of
M ineralogy, 4th e d . , John Wiley and Sons, New York, New York.
1.4.6 Deer, W.A., Howie, R .A ., and Zussman, J. , 1975, An In to -
duction to Rock Forming M inerals, 8th Impression, Longman Group
Lim ite d , London.
1.4.7 D u r r e l l , C . , 1949, A Key to the Common Rock-Forming Minerals
in Thin S ection, W.H. Freeman and Co., San Francisco, C a lifo r n ia .
1.4.8 H e in ric h , E.W., 1965, Microscopic I d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f Minerals,
McGraw-Hi11, New York, New York.
1.4 .9 ISRM Commission on S tandardization o f Laboratory and F ie ld
Tests on Rock, 1978, "Suggested Methods f o r Petrographic D escription
of Rocks," I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr., 15,
No. 2.
1.4.10 K err, P .F ., 1959, Optical Mineralogy, McGraw-Hill, New York,
New York.
1.4.11 P h i l l i p s , W.R., 1971, Mineral Optics P rin c ip le s and
techniques, W.H. Freeman and Co., San Francisco, C a lifo r n ia .
1.4.12 Slemmons, D .8 ., 1962, "Determination of Volcanic and
P lu to n ic Plagioclase Using a Three- or Four-Axis Universal Stage,"
G.S.A. Special Paper, No. 69, New York, New York.
1.4.13 Troger, W.E., 1959, Optische Bestimmung der Gesteinsbi 1denden
M ln e ra le , E. Schweizerbart'sche Verlagsbuchhandlung, S tu ttg a r t ,
W. Germany.
1.4.14 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, Procedure RTH 102-80,
"Recommended P ractice f o r Petrographic Examination of Rock Cores,"
Rock Testing Handbook, Geotechnical Laboratory, Waterways E xperi
ment S ta tio n , Vicksburg, M is s is s ip p i.
An accurate petrographic an alysis r e lie s he avily on the knowledge,
a b i l i t y , and experience o f the petrographer. A ll personnel involved
in performing the a n a ly s is , in c lu d in g the Technicians and Test
Supervisor, s h a ll be fo rm a lly p re q u a lifie d under the Quality
Assurance procedures established as part of the o v e ra ll te s tin g program.
A. 3-3
•a
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sh a ll be v e r if ie d .
I f no requirements are stated in Section 3 .0 , the m anufacturer's
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is g e nerally done by
c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib r a tio n and
documentation sh a ll be accomplished according to standard Q ua lity
2.3.1 P roje ct scope. The number and type o f rock samples analyzed
depends p a r t l y on the u ltim a te a p p lic a tio n o f the re s u lts o f the
a n a ly s is . For example, an i n i t i a l s i t e c h a ra c te riz a tio n might
re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations, w hile a
d e ta ile d geochemical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate re p o sito ry rock
may re q u ire many te s t s from a s in g le form ation. The f in a l t e s t in g
program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the tech nical judgment and experience
of p ro je c t personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples analyzed

should be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r
e va luatio n of the re s u lts .
2 .3 .2 .1 Each rock formation should be characterized.
Representative samples should be taken from each rock formation
a t the s i t e , co n s is te n t w ith the scope o f the p r o je c t.
2 .3 .2 .2 V a ria tio n s o f m aterial w ith in a s in g le formation
should be analyzed, c o n s is te n t w ith the scope o f the p r o je c t.
An adequate number o f samples should be chosen to represent
each m ine ralo gical and/or s tr u c tu r a l r e la tio n s h ip ( e . g . , in
fin e -g ra in e d igneous rocks the presence o f opal, glass, and
c la y ) .
2 .3 .2 .3 In a n is o tro p ic m a te ria ls , t h in sections should be cut
from th re e m utually perpendicular d ir e c tio n s w ith in the same
sample, orie n te d w ith respect to f a b r i c , bedding, or cleavage.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be documented according to standard Q uality
H ig h -q u a lity t h i n sections s h a ll be prepared according to procedures
discussed in Allman and Lawrence (1972).
A. 3-4
3.0 Equipment
3.1 P o la riz in g microscope and accessories.
The p o la riz in g microscope includes the microscope body, o b je c tiv e s ,
o c u la rs , a n alyzer, p o la r iz e r and ro ta ry specimen stage. The
microscope s h a ll be capable o f several le v e ls o f m a gnifica tion
between 5X and 1,0G0X.
The microscope sh a ll be assembled to manufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s .
The analyzer, p o la r iz e r , o b je c tiv e s , and stage sha ll be centered
according to standard Q u a lity Assurance procedures.
3.1.1 Oculars. Several oculars sh a ll be a v a ila b le , in c lu d in g a
c ro s s -h a ir o cu lar and a micrometer scale ocu lar. M agnification
ranges from 2X to 25X s h a ll be a v a ila b le .
3.1.2 O b je c tiv e s . At le a s t three o b je ctiv e s able to produce
low (4X), medium (lOX to 20X) and high (40X to lOOX) i n i t i a l
m a gnifica tions sh a ll be a v a ila b le . A numerical aperture of 0.85 is
necessary to use the standard determ ination tables in most reference
manual s.
3.1.3 Bertrand lens. A Bertrand lens sh a ll be a v a ila b le on the
microscope. When in s e rte d in to the o p tic path, t h i s lens is used
to observe in te rfe re n c e fig u re s .
3.1 .4 Condenser. Condensers supply a cone o f l i g h t necessary to
give maximum i l lu m in a t io n . Two condensers sha ll be a v a ila b le ; one
w ith a numerical aperture equal to the medium-power o b je c tive and
one w ith a numerical aperture equal to th a t of the high-power
o b je c tiv e . (Some microscopes have a condenser which slid e s up or
down to change i t s numerical a p e rtu re .)
3.1.5 Accessory p la te s . F u l l - and quarter-wave compensators and a
quartz wedge are required f o r mineral i d e n t i f i c a t i o n .
3.2 Mechanical stage.
A mechanical stage sha ll be provided to permit the microscope s lid e
to be moved smoothly in m utually perpendicular d ire c tio n s on the
ro ta tin g stage. The movement s h a ll be measured in both d ire c tio n s
to an accuracy o f at le a s t + 0.004 in . (+^ 0.1 mm). The stage shall
be capable o f advancing the t h in section in accurate, equal in c re
ments f o r p o in t counting.
3.3 Monochrometer.
A monochrometer sh a ll be a v a ila b le . A monochromatic source, such
as a sodium arc l i g h t , i s p re fe ra b le ; however, a standard tungsten
l i g h t w ith f i l t e r s may be used.
3.4 Camera and accessories.
A camera w ith the accessories necessary to produce photomicrographs
f o r documentation sha ll be a v a ila b le .
E«
A. 3-5
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Mineral i d e n t i f i c a t i o n .
Minerals s h a ll be described and i d e n t i f i e d , and notes sha ll be taken
during the examination as in d ic a te d on Form L -A .3-1. Relevant
p ro p e rtie s f o r mineral i d e n t i f i c a t i o n include the fo llo w in g :
4.1.1 Opaque phases.
4 .1 .1 .1 Color w ith r e fle c te d l i g h t
4 .1 .1 .2 Habit
4 .1 .2 Transparent or tra n s lu c e n t phases.
4 .1 .2 .1 C olor, pleochroism, and b ire frin g e n c e .
4 .1 .2 .2 R e lie f and h a b it, in c lu d in g cleavage, tw in n in g , and
shape.
4 .1 .2 .3 A ppropriate o p tic a l p ro p e rtie s in c lu d in g o p tic group,
2Vz, e x t in c t io n angle, d is p e rs io n , index o f r e fr a c tio n (Nxyz).
4.2 R e la tiv e percentages.
The r e la t i v e (modal) percentages o f c o n s titu e n t minerals s h a ll be
determined by p o in t counting. The number o f po ints to be counted
depends on the number o f phases, the gra in sizes and d i s t r ib u t i o n s ,
and the frequency o f occurrence. A minimum o f 300 p o ints should
be counted.
4.3 S tru c tu re s .
Rock s tru c tu re s h a ll be described as in d ic a te d on Form L -A .3-1,
to aid in recognizing the p ro p e rtie s th a t may be expected to
in flu e n c e the behavior o f the m a te ria l.
4.3.1 Primary s tr u c tu r e s . J o in t in g , voids, b r e c c ia tio n , coo lin g
fe a tu re s , pseudomorphs, and d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , as well as ra te and
order o f c r y s t a l l i z a t i o n , and re a ctio n between phases.
4 .3 .2 Groundmass fe a tu re s. Percentage o f glass, c ry s ta l size and
form, voids.
4 .3 .3 Secondary fe a tu re s . D e v i t r i f i c a t i o n , m ic ro fra c tu re s ,
fr a c tu r e f i l l i n g , presence o f amygdules.
4 .3 .4 X e n o lith s . Mineralogy, x e n o lith - h o s t re a c tio n s , size and
percentage o f x e n o lith s w ith in the sample.
4.4 Weathering and a l t e r a t i o n .
The degree o f weathering and a l t e r a t i o n sh a ll be examined and
described in d e t a i l .
5.0 Reporting
The re s u lts o f a petrographic a n alysis f o r engineering purposes should
be presented in a concise, o b je c tiv e , and usable format. The purpose
o f t h i s sectio n is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements f o r a complete
A. 3-6
and usable re p o rt. F u rthe r d e ta ils may be added as appro pria te, and
order of items may be changed i f necessary. A pp lica tio n s o f the t e s t
r e s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s procedure, but may be an in te g ra l
pa rt o f some t e s t in g programs. In th a t case, an a p p lic a tio n s section
compatible w ith the format described below should be included.
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section of the re p o r t.
The in tro d u c to ry section of the re p o rt is intended to present the
purpose and scope o f the a n a ly s is , and the general c h a ra c te ris tie s
o f the m a teria l examined.
5.1.1 Scope o f an alys is.
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples analyzed. In a large report
covering the a n alysis o f several rock types, the number of
samples is best presented in a ta b u la r form.
number and types o f samples analyzed sha ll be c le a r ly stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the program. The areas o f in te r e s t
which are not covered by the analysis program, and the l i m i t a
tio n s o f the data w ith in the areas of a p p lic a tio n shall be
discussed in general terms.
5 .1.2 B r i e f macroscopic d e s c rip tio n of the samples. The general
rock type, s tru c tu re and f a b r i c , grain siz e , d is c o n tin u itie s or
voids, and weathering o f the samples sha ll be described as a
minimum. F u rthe r d e ta il depends on the a p p lic a tio n of the r e s u lts ,
but in general i s not required. In v a ria b le material or f o r
several rock types, many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r
presentation is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 R esults.
5.2.1 Tabular presentation o f composition. A ta b u la r presentation
of the phases present in the samples sha ll be included.
5.2.2 Rock i d e n t i f i c a t i o n . A discussion o f rock samples, w ith a
b r i e f statement concerning the physical and chemical prope rties of
each sample, s h a ll be included.
5.2.3 B r ie f c r y s t a l l i z a t i o n h i s t o r y . The c r y s t a l li z a t i o n h is to ry
of igneous and metamorphic rocks should be included i f i t is
re le van t to the scope o f the p r o je c t. C r y s t a lliz a t io n h is to ry
y ie ld s data on pressure-temperature conditions of rock formation
which in tu rn y i e l d data on s t a b i l i t y in present environment.
5.2.4 A lt e r a t io n products. A d e s c rip tio n o f a lt e r a t io n products
should be included, accompanied by a discussion o f the observed
changes and the processes th a t produced them.
5.3 Graphic p re s e n ta tio n s .
A map o f sample lo c a tio n s , phase diagrams, cross sections, drawings
of unusual or key mineral te x tu re s , or other graphics shall be
included when appropriate.
5.4 Recommendations.
! • Recommendations f o r fu r t h e r chemical or m ineralogical analysis may
be included.
A. 3-7
5.5 Appended data.
5.5.1 Example t h i n sectio n photographs o r drawings. Representative
photomicrographs o r drawings s h a ll be included e it h e r separately or
as p a rt o f the petrographic a n alysis forms.
5.5.2 Petrographic an a ly sis forms. A clean copy o f each p e tro -
graphic a n a ly s is tôrm L-A.3-1 s h a ll be included.

The fo llo w in g items are the minimum requirements to ensure th a t the t e s t
re s u lts are defendable and tra ce a b le . I t is not the in te n t o f t h i s
sectio n to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to i d e n t i f y those
p o in ts during the t e s t where Q u a lity Assurance a c tio n is required.
in Section 2.1.
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the t e s t setup, the te s t
procedure, and the equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . A fte r
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-A.3-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed-
o f f only i f c o r r e c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance sha ll
maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll v e r if y
on Form L-A.3-1.
6.3.3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain s ig n e d -o ff
copies of Form L -A .3-1.
A .3-8
pg - 1
Composition of Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis

Form L -A .3-1
P roject________
Sample Location
Sample Coordinates_
Sample No.________
Thin Section No.
Microscope S eria l No._
Rock Type____________
F ie ld C l a s s if ic a t io n
Petrographic C la s s if ic a t io n
Petrographer________________________ Date_
Q uality Assurance___________________ Date_
P roject Engineer____________________ Date
Macroscopic D e sc rip tio n

Degree o f Weathering:
Texture (C rystal l i n i t y . G ra n u la rity , Fabric):
D is c o n t in u itie s :
Major Minerals and Percentages:
Microscopic D e sc rip tio n

Rock S tru c tu re - Primary S tru c tu re s :
Ground Mass Features:
Secondary Features:
Xenoli th s :
A lte r a tio n and Weathering:

Form L-A.3-1 Pg. 2
Mineral I d e n t i f i c a t i o n
R e lie f
Major Color Cleav- (H,M,L Optic Group
age + or -) (I.U .B ) 2V and R elative
Constituents Habit Pleochroism + Or - Bi ref. Other Observations
Minor
Constituents
Accessory
Constituents
Procedure L-A .4
Grain Size o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective of t h i s t e s t . The primary o b je c tiv e of t h is
t e s t is to determine the grain size and the size d i s t r ib u t i o n
of the phases w ith in a rock sample.
1 .1 .2 .1 This procedure should not be applied to uncon
so lid a te d m a te ria ls such as sediments or some volcanic
m a te ria ls . These samples should be disaggregated and
sieved f o r a more accurate analysis (ASTM, 422). Hydro
meter and grain mount analyses are applicab le to the
subsieve sizes (ASTM E-20, C-295).
1 .1 .2 .2 Petrographic a n alysis is not s u ita b le fo r extremely
fin e -g ra in e d o r coarse-grained rocks. The lower l i m i t
i s imposed by the re so lvin g power o f the microscope. The
upper l i m i t is imposed by the size o f a th in section.
Thin sections o f each rock sample are examined using a p o la riz in g
microscope and micrometer scale. A graduated eyepiece or photo
micrograph is used to determine grain size. The d i s t r ib u t io n
of sizes is tabulated w ith a p o in t counter.
1.3.1 Phases - g e n e ra lly m ine rals, but can include m ineraloids,
such as c h e rt; elements such as copper or diamond; or glasses,
such as t a c h y l i t e .
1.3.2 Thin section - a s lic e o f m ineral, rock or any other
c r y s t a l li n e m aterial ground down to a standard thickness o f about
1.2 X 10” i n . (30 m icrons), f o r microscopic examination.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 Allman, M. and Lawrence, D .F ., 1972, Geological Laboratory
Techniques, Blanford Press, London.
1.4.2 ASTM, 1975, Test Designation C294-69, "Standard D escriptive
Nomenclature o f C onstituents o f Natural Mineral Aggregates",
1.4.3 ASTM, 1975, Test Designation 0295-65, "Standard Recommended
P ractice f o r Petrographic Examination of Aggregate fo r Concrete",
A. 4-1
1.4.4 ASTM, 1964, Test Designation E20-62, "Recommended P ractices
f o r A nalysis by Microscopical Methods f o r P a r tic le Size D is t r ib u
t io n o f P a r tic u la te Substances o f Subsieve S iz e ", Annual Book o f
ASTM Standard, Part 30.
1.4.5 ISRM Commission on S tandardization o f Laboratory and
F ie ld Tests on Rock, 1978, "Suggested Methods f o r Petrographic
D escrip tion o f Rocks", I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech.
A b s t r . , 15, 2.
1.4.6 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, Procedure RTH 102-80,
"Recommended P ra ctic e f o r Petrographic Examination o f Rock Cores",
Rock Testing Handbook, Geotechnical Laboratory, Waterways E x p e ri-
A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , in c lu d in g the
Technicians and Test S upervisor, s h a ll be fo rm a lly p r e q u a lifie d
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sh a ll be v e r if ie d .
I f no requirements are stated in Section 3 .0 , the manufacturer*s
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the required level
of performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is g e nerally done by
c a l i b r a t i n g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib r a tio n
and documentation s h a ll be accomplished according to standard
Q ua lity Assurance procedures.
2.3.1 P roje ct scope. The number and type o f rock cores tested
dpend p a r t l y on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the t e s t r e s u lts .
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations, w hile
te s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the tech nical judgment
and experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
2.3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirement. The number o f samples tested
must be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis
fo r e va lu a tio n o f the re s u lts .
2 .3 .2 .1 Each rock formation should be characterized.
Representative samples should be taken from each rock
form ation a t the s i t e , c o n s is te n t w ith the scope o f the
p r o je c t.
A. 4-2
2 .3 .2 .2 . V a ria tio n s o f m aterial w ith in a sing le formation
should be analyzed, c o n s is te n t w ith the scope of the p r o je c t.
An adequate number o f samples should be chosen to represent
each m ine ralo gical and/or s tr u c tu r a l re la tio n s h ip ( e .g .,
in fin e -g ra in e d igneous rocks the presence o f opal, glass,
and c la y ) .
2 .3 .2 .3 In a n is o tro p ic m a te ria ls , t h in sections should be
cut from th re e m utually perpendicular d ire c tio n s w ith in the
same sample, orie n te d w ith respect to f a b r ic , bedding, or
cleavage.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be documented according to standard Q uality
2.5 Thin sectio n prepared.
H ig h -q u a lity t h i n sections sh a ll be prepared according to
procedures described in Allman and Lawrence (1972).
2.6 M ine ralo gical composition determined.
Composition of the samples sh a ll be predetermined as described
in Procedure L -A .3, "Composition o f Rock Samples by Petrographic
A n a ly s is ."
3.0 Equipment
The p o la riz in g microscope includes the microscope body, o b je c tiv e s ,
o c u la rs , a n alyzer, p o la r iz e r and ro ta ry specimen stage. The
microscope s h a ll be capable o f several leve ls o f m agnification
between 5X and 1,QGGX. The microscope sha ll be assembled to
m anufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s . The analyzer, p o la r iz e r , o b je c tiv e s ,
and stage s h a ll be centered according to standard Q uality Assurance
procedures.
3.1.1 Graduated o c u la rs . For grain size a n a ly s is , a ca lib ra te d
micrometer eyepiece w ith e it h e r graduated cross lin e s or a net
micrometer s h a ll be a v a ila b le in a s e le c tio n of g rid sizes.
Several oculars sh a ll be a v a ila b le ranging in power from 2X to 25X.
3.1.2 G bjectives. At le a s t th re e o b jectives shall be a va ila b le
capable of low (4X), medium (IGX to 2GX), and high (4GX to IGGX)
i n i t i a l m a g n ific a tio n s . A numerical aperture of G.85 is necessary
to use the standard determ ination tab les in most reference manuals.
3.1.3 Bertrand lens. A Bertrand lens sha ll be a va ila b le on the
microscope. When in s e rte d in to the o p tic path, t h i s lens is used
to observe in te rfe re n c e fig u re s .
A. 4-3
3.1 .4 Condenser. Condensers supply a cone o f l i g h t necessary to
give maximum i l lu m in a t io n . Two condensers s h a ll be a v a ila b le ; one
w ith a numerical aperture equal to the medium power o b je c tiv e
and one w ith a numerical aperture equal to th a t o f the high
power o b je c tiv e . (Some microscopes have a condenser which
s lid e s up o r down to change i t s numerical a p e rtu re .)
3.1.5 Accessory p la te s . F u l l - and quarter-wave compensators
and a quartz wedge are required f o r mineral i d e n t i f i c a t i o n .
3.2 Stage micrometer.
A stage micrometer w ith a photographic scale is required fo r
use w ith the graduated eyepiece.
A mechanical stage sh a ll be provided to permit the microscope
s lid e to be moved in m utually perpendicular d ire c tio n s on the
ro ta tin g stage. The movement sh a ll be measured in both d ire c tio n s
to an accuracy o f a t le a s t 0.004 in . (0.1 mm). The stage s h a ll be
capable o f advancing the section in accurate, equal increments fo r
p o in t counting.
3.4 Point counter.
A p o in t counter sh a ll be provided. One th a t attaches to the
mechanical stage is recommended.
3.5 Monochrometer.
A monochrometer sh a ll be a v a ila b le . A monochromatic l i g h t
source, such as a sodium arc l i g h t , i s p re fe ra b le ; however,
a standard tungsten l i g h t w ith f i l t e r s may be used.
A camera w ith the accessories necessary to produce photomicro
graphs s h a ll be a v a ila b le .
3.6 Grid cover sheet.
A c le a r , graduated overlay sh a ll be a v a ila b le f o r grain size
measurements from photomicrographs.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Ocular c a lib r a t io n .
To c a lib r a t e the f i e l d o f view o f the eyepiece, the stage m icro
meter o r g rid o f exact dimensions sh a ll be examined a t in te r v a ls
during the counting procedure, and whenever the process is
re s ta rte d a f t e r stopping.
4.2 Observation technique.
Since the petrographer's eyesight and the distance from the
ocular w i l l a f f e c t the f i e l d o f view, t h i s procedure shall be
A. 4-4
accomplished w ith o u t eye-glasses ( i f p o s s ib le ), and using a
hard rubber eyepiece attachment to minimize v a ria tio n s in distance.
4.3 Grain size measurements.
4.3.1 D ire c t method. Grain size may be measured d i r e c t l y
through the petrographic microscope using the graduated ocular.
4.3 .2 Photographic method. Grain size may be measured from a
photomicrograph or p ro je c tio n o f the t h in section. The photo
graphic scale sh a ll be accu rate ly known to be w ith in 1% o f the
f i e l d o f view.
4.3 .3 General.
4 .3 .3 .1 The grain size s h a ll be taken as the longest
dimension o f the grain.
4 .3 .3 .2 Grain sizes s h a ll be tabulated in re gula r size i n t e r
v a ls , e.g . less than 0.02 i n . , 0.02 to 0.04 i n . , 0.04 to 0.06
i n . , e t c . , (less than 0.5 mm, 0.5 to 1.0 mm, 1.0 to 1.5 mm,
e t c . ) The in te r v a ls sh a ll be appropriate to the type o f rock,
to allo w a size d i s t r i b u t i o n curve to be drawn f o r the whole
rock. The grain sizes tabulated sh a ll be taken w ithout
regard f o r the composition o f the g ra in s, to give a whole
rock g ra in size. The area sampled depends on the size
and d i s t r i b u t i o n o f g ra in s ; in general, a square area w ith
each dimension being 10 times the size o f the larg est
grain s h a ll be used. A ta b u la tin g device s im ila r to th a t
used in p o in t counting is recommended.
4.4 Data recording requirements.
Data s h a ll be recorded as shown on Form L-A .4-1.
5.0 Reporting
The re s u lts o f a petrographic a n alysis f o r engineering purposes should
be concise and o b je c tiv e . The purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h
the minimum requirements f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. Further
d e ta ils may be added as a p p ro p ria te , and the order of items may be
changed i f necessary. A p p lic a tio n s o f the te s t re s u lts are beyond the
scope o f t h i s procedure, but may be an in te g ra l pa rt o f some te s tin g
programs. In th a t case, an a p p lic a tio n s section compatible w ith the
format described below should be included.
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section o f t h i s re p o rt.
The in tro d u c to ry section is intended to present the purpose
and scope o f the an alysis and the general c h a ra c te ris tie s o f the
A. 4-5
5.1.1 Scope o f a n a ly s is . •i
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples analyzed. In a large re p o rt,
covering the an a ly sis o f several rock types, the number o f
samples Is best presented In a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r
the number and types o f samples analyzed sh a ll be c le a r ly stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the program. The areas o f In te re s t
which are not covered by the analysis program, and the
l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n
s h a ll be discussed In general terms.
5.1.2 B r i e f macroscopic d e s c rip tio n of the samples. The general
rock type , s tr u c tu r e and f a b r i c , g rain s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s
o r void s, and weathering o f the samples sh a ll be described
m a crosco plcally, as a minimum. F urther d e ta il depends on the
a p p lic a tio n of the r e s u lt s , but In general Is not required.
In v a ria b le m a te r ia l, or f o r several rock types, many samples
may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation Is recommended
fo r c la r ity .
5.2 Results.
5.2.1 Summary ta b le s o f phases. A ta b le In c lu d in g , as a minimum,
the major phases In the sample and the range o f grain sizes o f
each phase s h a l1 be presented.
5 .2 .2 Summary ta b le o f whole rock. A summary ta b le Inclu ding
as a minimum, the In te rv a l sizes and r e la t iv e percentage o f
grains In each In te rv a l f o r the whole rock s h a ll be presented.
5.2.3 Graphic p re s e n ta tio n . A histogram o f the whole rock
grain sizes s h a ll be presented.
5.2 .4 Other. Other analyses, such as c o r r e la t io n of grain size
w ith mechanical p r o p e rtie s , or the genetic h is to ry o f the rock
as Ind icate d by the grain s iz e , may be Included as appropriate.
The u n c e rta in ty o f each In te rv a l s h a ll be calcu la te d and presented.
Grain size may be tre a te d by determ ining confidence l i m i t s f o r the
p ro p o rtio n In each I n t e r v a l. The u n c e rta in ty , p . Is calc u la te d
using:
P (l-P )
N (1)
where:
If. = confidence c o e f f i c i e n t f o r the desired confidence
l e v e l, equal to 1.96 a t 95%
P = p ro p o rtio n o f grains In each In te rv a l
N = t o t a l number o f grains counted.
A. 4-6
For example, the fo llo w in g grain sizes are counted:
In te rv a l Number o f Grains
0 to 0.04 in . (0-1 mm) 5
0.04 to 0.08 in . (1-2 mm) 9
0.08 to 0.12 in . (2-3 mm) 7
The t o t a l number o f grains counted, N, i s 21. The proportions

in the th re e in te r v a ls are 0.24, 0.43, and 0.33, re s p e c tiv e ly .
S u b s titu tin g these values in Equation 1, the u n c e rta in tie s fo r
the three in te r v a ls are + 0.18, 0.21, +_ 0.20, re s p e c tiv e ly .
As a r e la t iv e percentage, the data may be expressed:
In te rv a l R elative Percentage
0 to 0.04 in . (0-1 mm) 24 ^ 18%
0.04 to 0.08 in . (1-2 mm) 43 + 21%
0.08 to 0.12 in . (2-3 mm) 33 ^ 20%
The u n c e rta in tie s are the percentage w ith in which i t is 95%

con fiden t t h a t the measured frequency represents the tru e frequency
f o r the whole rock. C le a rly more grains need to be counted
than in t h i s simple example.
5.4 Appended data.
5.4.1 Photomicrographs. Typical photomicrographs shall be
included as required as examples o f the major rock types.
5.4.2 Grain size forms. Completed Forms L-A .4-1 shall be included
f o r each sample.
t e s t re s u lts are defendable and tra ce a b le . I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assuranceprocedures, but to
i d e n t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q uality Assurance
a c tio n i s required.
6.1 Personnel p r e q u a lif ic a t io n .
P rio r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel sh a ll be p re q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6.2 Test insp ection .
Q ua lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the te s t setup, pro
cedure, and equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . A fte r te s t in g ,
the completed Form L -A .4-1 sh a ll be reviewed and signed o f f
only i f c o rre c t.
A. 4-7
6.3.1 Equipment v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain
•I
complete c a l i b r a t i o n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3 .2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance sha ll v e r if y
on Form L -A .4-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n - o ffs . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain s ig n e d -o ff
A. 4-8
•I
Grain Size of Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis
Form L -A .4-1
P roject __________
Sample Location __
Sample Coordinates
Sample No. _______
Thin Section No. _________________________ Photomicrograph
Microscope S eria l No. ____________________ w ith scale
Rock Type ________________________________
F ie ld C la s s if ic a t io n
Petrographic C la s s if ic a t io n
(from Form L -A .3-1) _____
G ra n u la rity _______________
Phase Max. Size Min. Size Average Size Other Information
Complete Thin Section
Grain Size In te rv a ls _______ Number_________ Percentage
P e tro g ra p h e r___________ Date

Q uality Assurance____________________________ Date
Project E n g in e e r_______________________________ Date
Procedure L -A .5
Texture and Fabric o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis
1.0 Background
1.1. Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f the t e s t . The o b je c tiv e o f t h is analysis
Is to examine the c ry s ta l U n i t y and g r a n u la rity o f c o n stitu e n ts
of a rock sample, and the geometrical re la tio n s h ip s between them,
using a p o la riz in g microscope. The te x tu ra l features are neces
sary to evaluate the h is to ry o f a rock sample and Id e n t if y re
la tio n s h ip s which may Influ en ce the mechanical behavior o f the
materl a l .
1 .2 .1 .1 The r e s u lts o f t h i s analysis do not y i e l d an
an a lys is o f the fa b r ic In three dimensions, but rather
describe the geometry o f gra in re la tio n s h ip s . A u n i
versal stage and Schmidt net are necessary f o r a complete
s p a tia l a n alysis ( e . g . . Bureau o f Mines, 1974, Slemmons,
1962).
1 .1 .2 .2 Petrographic a n alysis Is not s u ita b le fo r extremely
fin e -g ra in e d ( e . g . , c la y ) or extremely coarse-grained
( e . g . , pegmatite, breccia) rocks. A stereoscopic bino
c u la r microscope may be necessary fo r these types o f ma
te ria ls .
1 .1 .2 .3 I f a rock contains only a minor percentage of
a t e x t u r a l l y s i g n if ic a n t accessory m ineral, a t h in section
may not contain grains o f t h i s c o n s tltu te n t.
Thin sections are examined using a p o la riz in g microscope. The
te x tu re and fa b r ic are I d e n t if ie d and each sample Is c la s s i
fie d using the accepted te x tu r a l terminology fo r the rock type
encountered.
1.3.1 Texture - the degree o f c ry s ta l U n i t y , grain size and
fa b r ic of a rock.
1.3.2 Fabric - the shapes o f, and re la tio n s h ip s between, the
c o n s titu e n ts o f a rock.
1.3 .3 Igneous rock - a rock s o l i d i f i e d from molten or p a r tly
molten materl a l .
1.3 .4 P y ro c la s tic m a te ria ls - fragmental products o f volcanoes
formed by explosion or e je c tio n .
!• A. 5-1
1.3.5 Metamorphic rock - any rock derived from p re -e x is tin g
rocks by m in e ra lo g ic a l, chemical, and s tr u c tu r a l changes. These
are e s s e n tia lly s o lid s ta te changes in response to changes in
temperature, pressure, and chemical environment. Changes caused
by weathering and cementation are not considered metamorphism.
1.3.6 Sedimentary rock - a rock r e s u ltin g from the con s o lid a tio n
o f loose sediment ( c l a s t ic ro c k ), c o n s is tin g o f mechanically
formed fragments o f o ld e r rocks tra nspo rte d from a source area
and deposited; o r a rock formed by chemical p r e c ip it a t io n from
s o lu tio n ; o r an organic rock c o n s is tin g o f remains or secretions
o f pla n ts and/or animals.
1.3.7 C a ta c la s tic - sedimentary, igneous, or metamorphic rocks
produced by shearing, mechanical crushing, and d i f f e r e n t i a l
movement o f component grains.
1.3.8 S p e c ific terms - f o r d e f i n i t i o n o f in d iv id u a l te x tu ra l
terms, see Appendix L-A.5-A, Glossary o f Textural Terms.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 Allman, M ., and Lawrence, D .F ., 1972, Geological Labora
to r y Techniques, Blanford Press, London.
1.4.2 ASTM, 1975, Test Designation C294-69, "Standard Descrip
t i v e Nomencluatre o f C onstituents o f Natural Mineral Aggregates,
"Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 14.
1.4.3 ASTM, 1975, Test Designation 0295-65, "Standard Recommended
P ractice f o r Petrographic Examination o f Aggregate f o r Concrete,"
1.4.4 Bates, R . L . , and Jackson, J . A . , e d s ., 1980, Glossary
of Geology: 2nd e d . , American Geological I n s t i t u t e , F a lls
Church, V ir g in ia .
Tests on Rock, , "Suggested Methods f o r Petrographic Des
c r i p t io n o f Rocks," I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. S ci. and Geomech.
A b s t r . , 15, No. 2.
1.4.6 Johannsen, A ., 1939, D e s c rip tiv e Petrography o f Igneous
Rocks, 1^, 2nd e d . , U n iv e rs ity o f Chicago Press, Chicago, II l i -
noi s.
1.4.7 Nockolds, S .R ., Knox, R.W., Chinner, G .A ., 1978,
Petrology f o r Students, Cambridge U n iv e rs ity Press, Cambridge,
England.
1.4.8 P e ttijo h n , F . J . , 1949, Sedimentary Rocks, 2nd e d . , Harper
& B roth ers, New York, New York.
1.4.9 Slemmons, D .B ., 1962, "Determination o f Volcanic and
P lu to n ic Plagioclase Using a Three- or Four-axis Universal
Stage", G.S.A. Special Paper, No. 69.
A. 5-2
! • 1.4.10 Turner, F . J . , and Verhoogen, J . , 1960, Igneous and
Metamorphic P e tro lo g y , 2nd e d . , McGraw-HIH, New York, New York.
1.4.11 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, P rocedure RTH 102-80,
“ Recommended P ra c tic e f o r Petrographic Examination o f Rock Cores",
1.4.12 U.S. Bureau o f Mines, 1974, Bureau o f Mines Test Procedures
f o r Rocks, Inform ation C ir c u la r 8628.
1.4.13 Wil liam s, H ., Turner, F . J . , and G ilb e r t, C.M., 1954,
Petrography, W.H. Freeman and Company, San Francisco, C a lifo r n ia .
A l l personnel involved in performing the t e s t , in clud ing the
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures established as part o f
the o v e ra ll t e s t in g program.
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the per
formance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of t h i s procedure shall
be v e r if ie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0,
the m anufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment sha ll be
the required level o f performance. Performance v e r if ic a t i o n
is g e nerally done by c a l i b r a t i n g the equipment and measurement
systems. C a lib r a tio n and documentation shall be accomplished
2.3 .1 P roject scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n of the s it e
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f formations,
w hile a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig tio n of a candidate
re p o s ito ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a sin g le formation.
The f i n a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend he avily on the technical
judgment and experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested
f o r eva lu a tio n o f the re s u lts .
2 .3 .2 .1 Each rock form ation s h a ll be characterized. Re
pres e n ta tive samples should be taken from each rock f o r
mation at the s i t e , c o n sis te n t w ith the scope of the pro
je c t.
A .5-3
2 .3 .2 .2 V a ria tio n s o f m aterial w ith in a s in g le formation
•I
should be analyzed, c o n s is te n t w ith the scope o f the pro
j e c t . An adequate number o f samples should be chosen to
represent each m ine ralo gical and/or s tru c tu ra l r e la t i o n
ship ( e . g . , in fin e -g ra in e d igneous rocks the presence
of o p a l, gla s s, and c la y ) .
2 .3 .2 .3 In a n is o tro p ic m a te ria ls , t h i n sections should be
cut from th re e m utually perpendicular d ire c tio n s w ith in
the same sample, orie n te d w ith respect to f a b r i c , bedding
or cleavage.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample sha ll be documented according to standard Q ua lity
2.5 Thin sectio n p re p a ra tio n .
H ig h -q u a lity t h in sections s h a ll be prepared according to pro
cedures described in Allman and Lawrence (1972).
2.6 Composition d e te rm in a tio n .
The m ineralogical composition o f each sample sh a ll have been
determined using Procedure L -A .3, "Composition o f Rock Samples by
Petrographic A nalysis"
3.0 Equipment
The p o la riz in g microscope includes the microscope body, objec
t i v e s , o c u la rs , a n alyzer, p o la r iz e r and ro ta ry specimen stage.
The microscope sh a ll be capable o f several le ve ls o f m a g n ifi
c a tio n between 5X and 1,000X. The microscope sha ll be assem
bled to manufacturer's s p e c if ic a t io n . The analyzer, p o la r iz e r ,
o b je c tiv e s , and stage s h a ll be centered according to standard
3.1.1 Oculars. Several oculars s h a ll be a v a ila b le , in c lu d in g a
cross h a ir ocular and micrometer scale ocular.
3.1 .2 O b je ctive s. At le a s t th re e o b je ctiv e s sha ll be a v a ila b le
w ith low (4X), medium (lOX to 20X) and high (40X to lOOX)
i n i t i a l m a g n ific a tio n s . A numerical aperture o f 0.85 i s neces
sary to use the standard determ ination tab les in most reference
manual s.
3.1 .3 Bertrand le n s . A Bertrand lens sha ll be a v a ila b le on the
microscope. When in s e rte d in to the o p tic path, t h i s lens is
used to observe in te rfe re n c e fig u re s .
A. 5-4
3.1.4 Condenser. Condensers supply a cone o f l i g h t to give
maximum illu m i n a t i o n . Two condensers sh a ll be a v a ila b le ; one
w ith a numerical aperture equal to the medium-power ob je c tiv e
and one w ith a numerical aperture equal to th a t o f the high-
power o b je c tiv e . (Some microscopes have a condenser which
s lid e s up o r down to change i t s numerical a p e rtu re .)
3.1.5 Accessory p la te s . F u l l - and quarter-wave compensators
and a quartz wedge are required f o r mineral id e n t i f i c a t i o n .
A mechanical stage sh a ll be provided to permit the microscope
s lid e to be moved smoothly in m utually perpendicular d ire c tio n s
on the r o ta tin g stage. The movement sh a ll be measured in both
d ire c tio n s to an accuracy o f at le a s t 0.004 in . (jf 0.1 mm). The
stage s h a ll be capable of advancing the section in accurate,
equal increments.
3.3 Monochrometer.
A monochrometer s h a ll be a v a ila b le . A monochromatic source,
such as a sodium arc l i g h t , is p r e fe ra b le ; however, a standard
tungsten l i g h t w ith f i l t e r s may be used.
A camera w ith the accessories necessary to produce photomicro
graphs f o r documentation sh a ll be a v a ila b le .
4.0 Procedure
Texture and f a b r ic an a ly sis is a d e s c rip tiv e process. Standard
terminology i s contained in the Glossary, Appendix L-A.5-A.
4.1 Degree of c r y s t a l l i z a t i o n .
The extent of c r y s t a l l i z a t i o n in the rock sha ll be described
using standard term inology.
4.2 G ra n u la rity .
The grain size sh a ll be described using the appropriate term in
ology f o r the rock type.
4.3 F a b ric .
4.3.1 D e s c rip tio n .
Fabric s h a ll be described by c ry s ta l shapes and texture s.
4 .3 .2 Genetic r e la tio n s h ip s .
Primary and secondary s tru c tu re s sh a ll be distinguished i f
possible.
A. 5-5
4.3 .3 Mechanical fe a tu re s .
S tructures such as fr a c tu r e s , void s, a l t e r a t i o n s , cementations,
e t c . , which can in flu e n c e the mechanical p ro p e rtie s o f the rock
s h a ll be emphasized in the fa b r ic an aly s is.
4.4 Data readi nq.
The fa b r ic and te x t u r a l data sh a ll be recorded as shown on Form
L -A .5-1. Photomicrographs s h a ll be taken f o r each sample,
c le a r ly showing the important fea tu re s.
5.0 Reporting
The r e s u lts o f a petrographic a n alysis f o r engineering purposes
should be presented in a concise, o b je c tiv e , and usable format. The
purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re p o rt. F urther d e ta ils may be added as appro
p r ia t e , and order o f items may be changed i f necessary. A p p lica tio n s
o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s procedure, but may
be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s t in g programs. In th a t case, an a p p l i
cations section compatible w ith the format described below should be
i ncluded.
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section o f the r e p o r t.
The in tr o d u c to ry section i s intended to present the purpose and
scope of the a n alysis and the general c h a r a c te r is tic s o f the
m aterial examined.
5.1.1 Scope of a n a ly s is .
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples analyzed. In a large re p o rt,
covering the analyses o f several rock types, the number
of samples i s best presented in a ta b u la r form.
the number and types o f samples analyzed sha ll be c le a r ly
stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the program. The areas o f in te r e s t
which are not covered by the an alysis program, and the
l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n
s h a ll be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r i e f macroscopic d e s c rip tio n of samples. The general rock
type, macroscopic s tru c tu re and f a b r i c , grain s iz e , discon
t i n u i t i e s o r void s, and weathering of the samples sh a ll be
described as a minimum. F u rthe r d e ta il depends on the a p p li
c a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general is not required. In
v a ria b le m a te r ia l, or f o r several rock types, many samples may
be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recommended f o r
c la rity .
A. 5-6
5 . 2 R esu lts.
5.2.1 Data. A general statement o f the degree o f c r y s t a l l i n i t y ,
g r a n u la r ity , and f a b r i c o f the samples analyzed s h a ll be i n c l u
ded. I f more than a few samples were analyzed, a ta b u la r pre
sen tatio n s h a ll be used.
5 .2 .2 Mechanical fe a tu re s . Those features which may a ffe c t
the mechanical p ro p e rtie s o f the rock sha ll be described in
d e ta il and t h e i r e f f e c t discussed.
5.2.3 Graphical p re s e n ta tio n . Representative photomicrographs
o r l i n e drawings sh a ll be included to i l l u s t r a t e important
fea tures.
5.3 I n t e r p r e t a t i o n .
The h is to r y o f the rock s h a ll be in te rp re te d from the re s u lts
of the te x tu r e and f a b r i c an a lysis.
5.4 Appended data.
A copy o f each a n alysis Form L -A .5-1 sh a ll be included f o r
each t h i n sectio n.

t e s t r e s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t
of t h i s sectio n to e s ta b lis h Q ua lity Assurance procedures, but to
id e n t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q ua lity Assurance
actio n i s required.
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p re q u a lifie d as de
scribed in Section 2.1.
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the t e s t setup, the
t e s t in g , the completed Form L -A .5-1 sha ll be reviewed and
signed o f f only i f c o rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q uality Assurance
s h a ll m aintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e ria l numbers. Q uality Assurance shall v e r if y
th a t s e r ia l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are re
corded on Form L -A .5-1.
6 .3 .3 Test s ig n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance shall maintain signed-
o f f copies o f Form L -A .5-1.
A. 5-7
Texture and Fabric o f Rock Samples by Petrographic Analysis
Form L -A .5-1
P ro je ct _______ ____________________
Sample L o c a t io n __________ __ ______
Sample Coordinates ______________
Sample No. ________________________ Photomicrograph
Thin Section No. _____________ tta le
Microscope S e ria l No. ______________
Rock Type __________

F ie ld C la s s if ic a t io n
Petrographic
C la s s if ic a t io n
Degree o f c r y s t a l l i n i t y 1
G r a n u l a r i t y ___________
D escrip tion o f f a b r ic :
u ^
Petrographer — --------------- D ate
Q ua lity Assurance _______ __________ Date

P roje ct E n g in e e r---------- ----------------- --- Date
A. 5-8
Appendix L-A.5-A
Glossary o f Textural Terms
Contents
1.0 Igneous Rocks

1.1 Terms f o r degree o f c r y s t a l l i n i t y
1.2 Terms f o r g r a n u la r ity
1.3 Terms f o r fa b r ic
1.3.1 Crystal shape
1.3.2 Textural terms
2.0 Metamorphic Rocks

2.1 Terms f o r c r y s t a l l o b l a s t i c fa b ric s
2.2 Terms f o r c a ta c la s tic te x tu re s and s tru cture s
3.0 Sedimentary Rocks

3.1 P a r tic u la te te x tu re s
3.1.1 G ra n u la rity
3.1.2 S ortin g
3.1.3 Form
3.1.4 Packing
3.2 N o n -p a rtic u la te rocks
3.2.1 A ccretionary te x tu re s
3.2.2 C r y s t a llin e te xtu re s
3.2.3 S o lu tio n te x tu re s
5«
A. 5-9
Glossary o f Textural Terms •a
1.0 Igneous Rocks
1.1 Degree o f c r y s t a l l i n i t y .
h o lo c r y s t a llin e - composed e n t i r e l y o f c r y s ta ls .
ho lo h ya l1ne - composed e n t i r e l y o f glass.
h y p o c ry s ta l1i ne (m e ro c ry s ta llin e ) - composed o f both
c r y s ta ls and glass.
c r y s t a l l i t e - composed o f small n o n -p o la riz in g in c ip ie n t I
c r y s ta ls o f various shapes which cannot be i d e n t i f i e d . ^
m i c r o l i t e - composed o f small p o la r iz in g c r y s ta ls o f
various shapes which can be i d e n t i f i e d . C r y s t a ll i t e s
and m ic r o lit e s represent successive stages o f in c ip ie n t
c ry s ta l l i z a t i o n .
1.2 G r a n u la r ity .
c r y p t o c r y s t a l l i ne - c r y s ta ls are not d is tin g u is h a b le w ith '
a microscope.
a p h a n itic - in d iv id u a l components are v i s i b l e only w ith
a microscope.
p h a n e r itic - in d iv id u a l components are v i s i b l e to the
unaided eye.
f i n e grained - diameter o f most c r y s ta ls is less than
0.04 i n . (T~mm).
medium grained - diameter o f most c r y s ta ls i s between
0.04 and 0.20 in . (1 mm and 5 mm).
coarse grained - diameter o f most c r y s ta ls is between
0.2O and 1.2 in . (5 mm and 3 cm).
very coarse grained - diameter o f most c ry s ta ls is greate r
than 1.2 in . (3 cm).
1.3 F a b ric .
1.3.1 C rystal shape.
euhedral (idio m orphic, automorphic) - c ry s ta l e n t i r e l y
bounded by i t s own re g u la r c ry s ta l faces.
subhedral (hypidiom orphic) - c ry s ta l incom pletely bounded
by i t s own c ry s ta l faces and p a r t ly bounded against other
c ry s ta l faces.
anhedral ( a llo tr io m o r p h ic , xenomorphic) - absence of
c ry s ta l faces on g ra in .
•6
A .5-10
f 1.3.2 Textural terms ( r e la tio n s h ip s between g r a in s ).
granular - c o n s is tin g o f grains o f approximately equal size.
panldlom orphlc-granular (panautomorphlc-granular, lamprophyric)
major phases euhedral.
xenomorphlc-granular (a llo trlo m o rp h lc -g r a n u la r, a p l I t i c ,
sugary, s a c c h a ro ld a l) - most phases anhedral.
hypldlom orphlc-granular (hypautomorphlc-granular, g r a n i t i c ) -
phases euhedral, subhedral and anhedral.
m icro g ra n ltlc -h y p ld lo m o rp h ic - granular te x tu re developed
on a microscopic scale.
p o r p h y r lt ic (p h y ric ) - larg e c ry s ta ls (phenocrysts) In a
f ln e - V ^ in e d or glassy m a trix.
megaphenocrysts - macroscopic phenocrysts; th a t I s , v i s i b l e
to the unaided eye.
microphenocrysts (m ic ro p o rp h y rltic ) - microscopic pheno
c ry s ts .
v l t r o p h y r ic - phenocrysts In a glass m atrix.
fe ls o p h y ric - phenocrysts In groundmass o f densely packed
quartz and fe ls p a r.
o rth o p h y ric - phenocrysts In groundmass w ith rectangular
feld spars.
glo m e ro p o rp h yritic (cumulophyric) - clustered phenocrysts.
p r o to c la s tic - c r y s ta ls formed e a r l i e r have been broken
o r deformed due to d i f f e r e n t i a l flow o f magma before
s o l i d i f i c a t i o n ; found near margins o f large In tru s io n s ,
a n o rth o s lte s , and u ltr a b a s ic rocks. Also, a te x tu re charac
t e r i s t i c o f a very small amount o f s tr a in .
graphic - re g u la r Interg row th o f quartz and feldspar
c ry s ta l s. The arrangement o f the quartz resembles cuneiform
w r it in g on a background o f fe ld s p a r.
I myrmekitic - s im ila r to graphic, w ith minute worm-like

or f i n g e r - l i k e bodies o f verm icular quartz enclosed In
sodic p la g io cla s e (u s u a lly o llg o c la s e ).
o p h ltic - lath-shaped pla g io cla se phenocrysts which appear
to be enclosed In coarse, subhedral pyroxene, but whose
average length does not exceed the diameter of the pyroxene
c r y s ta ls .
s u b o p h ltic - o p h lt ic te x tu re In which the pyroxene and
pla g io cla se are approximately the same size and the p la
gioclase Is only p a r t i a l l y surrounded.
A .5-11
h y a lo - o p h itic - o p h i t i c te x tu re w ith glass in the place o f
pyroxene.
p o i k i l i t i c - numerous, randomly o rie nte d grains o f various
minerals completely enclosed w ith in a la rg e , o p t i c a l l y
continuous c ry s ta l o f a d i f f e r e n t composition; may d is p la y
m ottled lu s t e r .
re a c tio n rim (corona) - a zone around one mineral composed
o f another m in e ra l; i t represents the re action between a
s o l i d i f i e d c ry s ta l and the surrounding melt.
k e ly p h y tic rims - rims o f con c e n tric s h e lls w ith ra dial
fib r o u s te x tu re .
in te r g r a n u la r - the angular in t e r s t ic e s between feldspars
in lavas and hypabyssal rocks are occupied by ferromag-
nesian m inerals.
in t e r s e r t a l - the in t e r s t i c e s between feldspars are f i l l e d
w ith gla ss , c r y p t o c r y s t a llin e m a te ria ls or non-granular
d e u te ric and secondary m inerals.
h y a lo p h itic - minute spaces between randomly orie nte d
m ic r o lite s o f fe ld s p a r are occupied by glass.
f e l t y ( f e l t e d ) - m a trix o f t i g h t l y compressed m ic r o lite s
interwoven in an i r r e g u l a r fashion.
p i l o t a x i t i c ( tr a c h y t ic ) - m ic r o lit e s o f fe ld s p a r are
o rie nte d i n a s u b -p a ra lle l manner as a re s u lt of flow
and the in t e r s t i c e s are occupied by m icro- and cry p to
c r y s t a l l i n e m a te ria l.
d i k t y t a x i t i c - the presence o f randomly o rie n te d , abundant,
c lo s e ly spaced, minute, angular c a v itie s between fe ld s p a r
la th s ; some c ry s ta ls protrude in to these c a v itie s .
v esic le s - c a v it ie s .
amygdules - vesic le s f i l l e d w ith secondary minerals.
drusy c a v it ie s ( m i a r o l i t i c ) - in p lu to n ic rocks, i r r e g u l a r
c a v itie s in to which large subhedral to euhedral c ry s ta ls
p r o je c t.
s p h e ru lite s - in s ilic e o u s lavas and shallow in tr u s iv e
rocks, ra d ia l aggregates o f a c ic u la r and fib ro u s minerals.
a x i o li t e s - s p h e ru lite s th a t are elongated or th a t coalesce
along a ce n tra l a x is .
v a r i o l i t i c - in b a salt and diabase, ra d ia l and s h e a f-lik e
mineral forms when viewed under the microscope ( v a r io le s ) ;
u s u a lly divergent pla g io c la se m ic r o lite s in a glassy m a trix
or intergrown w ith c ry s ta ls o f pyroxene, o l i v i n e , or iro n
oxide or s u lfid e .
A .5-12
b o s t o n it ic - in dike rocks, i r r e g u l a r in te rlo c k in g la th s
o f a l k a li fe ld s p a r arranged in crudely divergent groups.
o c e lla r - phenocrysts resembling an eye, p a r tly or wholly
enveloped by t r a n g e n t ia lly o r r a d i a l l y arranged c ry s ta ls
o f l a t e r growths.
sieve te x tu re - abundant in c lu s io n s w ith in la rg e , spongy
c r y s ta ls .
2.0 Metamorphic rocks
b la s to - p r e f ix t h a t s i g n if ie s a r e l i c t te x tu re in meta
morphic rocks, e.g. b la s to p o rp h y ritic .
b l a s t i c - s u f f i x th a t s i g n if ie s a te x tu re formed by meta-
morphism, e.g. le p id o b la s tic .
2.1 C rystal l o b la s t i c fa b ric s - fa b ric s r e s u ltin g from chemical
r e c o n s titu tio n in v o lv in g growth o f new c ry s ta ls in an e s s e n tia lly
s o lid medium.
xen o b la s tic - grains w ith i r r e g u l a r o u tlin e s .
i d i o b l a s t i c - grains bounded w ith d i s t i n c t c ry s ta l faces.
h y p id io b la s tic ( s u b id io b la s tic ) - grains bounded only in
p a rt by c h a r a c t e r is t ic c ry s ta l faces.
p o i k i l o b l a s t i c - la rg e r c ry s ta ls packed w ith small i n
clu s io n s .
p o rp h y ro b la stic - large c ry s ta ls o f one or more minerals
associated w ith sm aller grains o f oth er minerals.
d ia b la s t ic - i n t r i c a t e l y intergrown and in te rp e n e tra tin g
c o n s titu e n ts w ith r o d - lik e shapes.
h e te ro b la s tic - e sse ntial minerals are o f two or more
d i s t i n c t sizes.
homeoblastic - ess e n tia l minerals are o f approximately equal
s ize .
g ra n o b la s tic , h o r n fe ls ic - homeoblastic te x tu re type whose
mineral c o n s titu e n ts formed e s s e n tia lly equidimensional
c r y s ta ls w ith w e ll-s u tu re d boundaries.
nematoblastic - homeoblastic te x tu re formed o f slender
p ris m a tic c r y s ta ls .
le p id o b la s tic - homeoblastic te x tu re w ith c ry s ta ls in a
f o l i a t e d or schistose o r ie n ta tio n due to the development
o f minerals w ith fla k y o r scaly h a bit during r e c r y s t a l l i
z a tio n .
f i b r o b l a s t i c - homeoblastic te x tu re w ith long c ry s ta ls
due to the development o f minerals w ith a fib ro u s h a b it.
A. 5-13
2.2 C a ta c la s tic te x tu re s - te x tu re s in a dynamically a lte re d rock
produced by severe mechanical crushing and d i f f e r e n t i a l move
ment o f component g ra in s ; o fte n characterized by fragmentary,
deformed o r stra in e d mineral grains.
f lu x io n banded - flow-banded.
h e l i c i t i c - bands o f in c lu s io n s which in d ic a te o r ig in a l
bedding o r s c h is to s ity o f parent rock, c u tt in g through l a t e r -
formed c r y s ta ls o f metamorphic rocks. R e lic t in c lu s io n s #
occur in porphyroblasts as curved and contorted s tr in g s . p
m y lo n itic - flow s tru c tu re having f l i n t y , banded or streaked ^
appearance, produced by intense m ic ro b re c c ia tio n and V
shearing; o ften contains undestroyed augens and lenses o f *
parent rock in a granulated m a trix.
p h y l l o n i t i c ( p h y llit e - m y lo n it e ) - fin e -g ra in e d te x tu re
formed by extreme deformation o f o r i g i n a l l y coarse-grained
rocks.
m ortar s tru c tu re (murbruk s tr u c tu r e , p o rp h y ro c la s tic s tru c tu re ) -
m ic a -fre e aggregates o f sm all, f i n e l y crushed grains o f quartz
and fe ld s p a r , occupying the i n t e r s t ic e s between, or forming
the borders o f, much la r g e r , rounded r e l i c t s o f the same
m inerals.
f l a s e r s tru c tu re - lenses and layers o f o r ig in a l or r e la
t i v e l y unaltered granular minerals which are surrounded
by a m a trix of h ig h ly sheared and crushed m a te ria ls , g iv in g
the appearance o f a crude flow s tru c tu re .
augen s tru c tu re - a s tru c tu re in which minerals l i k e fe ld s p a r,
quartz o r garnet have been squeezed in t o e l l i p t i c a l or
lens-shaped forms resembling eyes. These are commonly
enveloped by e s s e n tia lly p a r a lle l laye rs o f c o n tra s tin g
c o n s titu e n ts such as mica or c h l o r i t e .
a u to c la s t ic - broken or brecciated surfaces formed as the
r e s u lt o f cru shing , s h a tte r in g , dynamic metamorphism,
orogenic fo rc e s , o r o th e r mechanical processes, found near
the margins o f la rg e in tr u s io n s , a n o rth o s ite s and u ltr a b a s ic
rocks.
3.0 Sedimentary rocks

3.1 P a r tic u la te te x tu r e s .
Textures which re s u lt from the accumulation o f d is c re te par
t i c l e s . They are characterized in the unaltered s ta te by p o int
contacts between p a r t ic le s and associated in te rg r a n u la r spaces.
D e t r it a l sediments and c ry s ta ls o r organic m a te ria ls accumulated
through g r a v ity s e t t l i n g g e nerally have p a r tic u la te s tru c tu re s .
A .5-14 s
Sm 3.1.1 G ra n u la rity (g ra in s iz e ) - g ra n u la rity i s defined on
the basis o f size ranges shown in Table L -A .5-1.
3.1 .2 Grain s o rtin g - the degree to which the grains approach
a uniform s iz e .
w e l1 sorted - grains a l l having approximately the same size.
moderately sorted - between poorly and well sorted.
poorly sorted - grains o f many sizes mixed together.
bimodal - grains o f two d i s t i n c t sizes w ithout many i n t e r
mediate sizes.
3.1 .3 Grain form - the expression of the external morphology
of the g ra in .
shape - measure o f the proportions between a g ra in 's three
ax ia l d ir e c tio n s .
s p h e r ic ity - measure o f a g r a in 's approach to the shape
o f a sphere.
roundness - the degree o f a n g u la rity o f a g r a in 's surface
p r o je c tio n s . When q u a n t it a t iv e ly evaluated, i t is the
average radius o f curvature o f the corners o f the grain
divided by the radius o f the maximum inscrib ed c i r c l e .
surface te x tu re - te x tu re s r e s u ltin g from surface diagenesis.
Recognition is e s s e n tia l, as re s u ltin g a n g u la rity would
otherwise be in te rp re te d as in d ic a tin g minimal tra n s p o rt and
abrasion.
3 .1 .4 Grain packing - the arrangement o f grains in a th re e -
dimensional framework; commonly used to express the d is t r ib u t io n a l
r e la tio n s h ip between grains and m atrix.
grain-supported - grains appear to c o n s titu te a th re e -
dimensional framework by v ir tu e o f in te rg ra n u la r contact.
grainstones - grain-supported sediments th a t are devoid
o f i n t e r s t i t i a l support.
packstones - loosely-packed grain-supported sediments in
which the p ro p o rtio n o f g ra in contacts is reduced by the
presence o f an i n t e r s t i t i a l m atrix.
m atrix-supported - grains are dispersed w ith in a m atrix to such
an extent th a t three-dimensional c o n tin u ity between grains
does not e x is t.
wackestones - m atrix-supported sediments w ith more than
10% gra in s .
mudstones - m atrix-supported sediments w ith fewer than
10% g ra in s. Not to be confused w ith the sedimentary rock
"mudstone".
A .5-15
3.2 N o n -p a rtic u la te te x tu r e s . •8
C r y s t a llin e te x tu re s which r e s u lt from the p a r t i a l or e n tir e
c r y s t a l l i z a t i o n o f a sediment, characterized by an in te r lo c k in g
c ry s ta l mosaic.
3.2.1 A ccretionary te x tu re s - displayed in s h e lls and other
bodies o f d i r e c t organic o r ig in and in accre tio n a ry bodies o f
less c e r ta in o r ig in .
o o l i t i c ( o o l i t h s ) - grains which show an in te rn a l s tru c tu re
o f c o n ce n tric s h e lls w ith diameters to 0.08 in . (2 mm).
p i s o l i t i c ( p i s o l i t h s ) - o o l it h s w ith diameters greater
than 0.08 in . (2 mm).
3.2 .2 C r y s t a llin e te x tu re s
m a crO cry sta llin e (s p a rry ) - c r y s ta ls gre a te r than
8.0 X 10" in . (20 m icrons).
-4
m ic ro c ry s ta l l i n e - c r y s ta ls less than 8.0 x 10 in .
(20 m icrons).
c r y p t o c r y s t a l l i ne - in d iv id u a l c ry s ta ls cannot be d is tin g u is h e d
under the microscope.
e q u ic r y s t a llin e - c r y s ta ls o f r e l a t i v e l y uniform size.
in e q u ic ry s ta l l i n e - c r y s t a ls o f d i f f e r e n t sizes.
p o rp h y ro b la s tic - a few c r y s ta ls are d i s t i n c t l y la rg e r
than those of the groundmass.
p o i k i 1o b la s tic - one c ry s ta l encloses sm aller c ry s ta ls or
grains o f another m a te ria l.
fib r o u s - b la d e lik e c ry s ta ls arranged in sub p a ra lle l fashion.
ra d ia l fib r o u s - ra d ia tin g aggregates o f fib ro u s c r y s ta ls .
s p h e r u l it ic - a coarsely c r y s t a l l i n e aggregate w ith a ra d ia l
in te rn a l s tru c tu re arranged around one or more centers.
cementation - chemical p r e c ip it a t io n o f minerals in to
p r e - e x is tin g pore spaces o f a c r y s t a l li n e aggregate.
e n fa c ia l ju n c tio n - two c r y s ta ls form about a t h i r d along
a planar surface.
fr in q e - incomplete cementation around a g ra in .
synta x ia l rims (overgrowths) - cement has been p r e c ip ita te d
in o p tic a l c o n tin u ity w ith the grains and i s o f the same
mineral composition.
cone-in-cone - d is p la c iv e c ry s ta l growth which separates
layers o f the host sediment and rearranges the layers
along c ry s ta l boundaries.
A .5-16
3.2.3 S o lu tio n te x tu re s ,
passive s o lu tio n - purely chemical action on a sedimentary
component.
pressure s o lu tio n - s o lu tio n r e s u ltin g from or related to
d ir e c t pressure.
s o lu tio n t r a n s fe r - s o lu tio n o f grains at points o f contact
accompanied by r e p r e c ip it a t io n in immediately adjacent areas.
sty 1o t i t i c te x tu re - in te r lo c k in g columns attached to the
opposing bodies o f the rock.
A .5-17
! •
Table L - A .5-1
Nomenclature f o r Grain Size in C la s tic Sedimentary Rock
U.S. Standard Diameter Sediment

Sieve Mesh Number in mm Phi (0) Grain Size
Boulder
256 -8 . .
Cobble
64 -6 . .
Very coarse pebble
32 -5 . .
Coarse pebble
16 -4 . .
Medium pebble
8 -3 . .
Fine pebble
5 4 -2 . .
Granule
10 2 -1 . .
Very coarse sand
18 1 0 . .
Coarse sand
35 1/2 1 . .
Medium sand
60 1/4 2 . .
Fine sand
120 1/8 3 . .
Very fin e sand
230 1/16 4 . .
Coarse s i l t
1/32 5 . .
Medium s i l t
1/64 6 . .
Fine s i l t
1/128 7 . .
Very fin e s i l t
1/256 8 . .
Clay
Phi (0) = -lo g £ diameter (mm)
A. 5-18
Procedure L -B .l
Uniaxial Compressive Strength of Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h i s t e s t . This te s t determines the compressive
strength of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at ambient temperature
under un iaxial loading.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . Only the peak compressive strength is
evaluated. No information on residual strength or deformation
p r io r to f a i l u r e is obtained. This te s t may be combined with
Test L - C .l, "Uniaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation of Rock
Core - Ambient Temperature," to obtain de tailed deformation data.
1.2 General de sc rip tio n of the t e s t .
A rock core sample is cut to length and the ends are machined f l a t .
The sample is loaded a x ia lly u n t il i t f a i l s . The strength is then
calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1 Terms and d e f in it io n s .
1.3.1.1 Load - the to t a l axial force acting on the sample.
1.3.1.2 Pressure, stress - force per u n it area.
1.3.1.3 F a ilure - the i n a b i l i t y of the sample to sustain
increased load without ra p id ly increasing deformation or
de stru c tive fra c tu rin g .
1.3 .1.4 Strength - the stress in the rock at which f a ilu r e
occurs.
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The compressive strength, a ^ , is calculated using:
( 1)
where:
P = load at f a i l u r e
A = cross-sectional area of sample
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Designation D2938, "Standard Test Method
fo r Unconfined Compressive Strength of In ta c t Rock Core Specimens,"
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, In c ., 1981, F ield and In Situ Rock
Mechanics Testing Manual, ONWI -310, O ffice o f Nuclear Waste
Is o la tio n , B a tte lle Memorial I n s t it u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.3 ISRM Commission on Standardization o f Laboratory and Field
Tests, 1979, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Uniaxial
Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y of Rock M a te ria ls ", In t.
J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 16, No. 2.
B.1-1
2.0 Prerequisites
2.1 Personnel p re q u a T ific a tio n .
A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , including the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sha ll be form ally p re q u a lifie d
under the Q uality Assurance procedures established as part o f the
ove rall te s tin g program.
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus with the performance
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f th is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment shall be the required level o f
performance. Performance v e r if ic a t i o n is generally done by
c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib ra tio n
and documentation shall be accomplished according to standard
Q uality Assurance procedures.
2.3 C r it e r ia f o r sample s e le c tio n .
2.3.1 Project scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
depend p a r tly on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the te s t re s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a racte rizatio n o f the s ite
might require several samples from a v a rie ty o f formations, while a
d e tailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate repository
rock may re quire many te s ts from a single formation. The fin a l
te s tin g program w i l l depend heavily on the technical judgment and
experience of project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples must be
s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r evaluation
of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly variable w i l l require
more te s ts than r e la t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to evaluate the
re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass, such as
j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can s ig n if ic a n t ly influence the
mass strength o f the rock. These should be sampled and tested to
provide an estimate o f t h e i r e f f e c t.
2.3.4 Anisotropy. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be evaluated
by te s tin g cores taken at d if f e r e n t o rie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Preservation o f moisture condition o f samples.
The moisture condition o f the rock can influence the measured
strength. The moisture content of the rock core shall be preserved
between the time of recovery and the time o f te s tin g as described
in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage of Rock Core Samples,"
see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample sha ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to.
standard Q uality Assurance procedures.
B .I-2
3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame consists of the mechanism fo r applying axial load
to the sample, the reaction frame containing the load mechanism,
and the control system f o r the load mechanism. The loading frame
shall be constructed to apply a continuously Increasing load to the
sample at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress rate.
3.2 Platens.
The diameter of the platens shall be equal t o , or greater than the
diameter of the sample. Rock materials subject to large deforma
tio n s p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt and some shales, shall be
tested using platens sized so th a t the la te ra l expansion of the
sample does not exceed the diameter of the platen. The platens
shall be at le a s t 0.625 In. th ic k (15.9 mm). The surfaces shall
be f l a t to w ith in Q.0002 In . (0.005 mm) and hardened to at least
Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One o f the two platens shall Incorporate a
spherical seat. This platen sha ll be placed above the sample
during te s tin g .
3.3 Axial load transducer.
An e le c tro n ic load c e ll Is recommended to measure axial load on the
sample. The c e ll sha ll have an accuracy of at least + 100 lb
(jh45.4 kg), inclu d in g errors Introduced by the e x c ita tio n and
readout system, and a re solutio n of at least 50 lb (22.7 kg).
A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic transducer may be
used I f a hydraulic loading system Is employed, provided th a t the
load measurement requirements above are s a tis fie d . Including the
e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n In the hydraulic ram, etc.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Sample preparation.
4.1.1 Core size. Rock cores o f NX size (2 In. nominal diameter;
mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, In no case shall the
core diameter be less than 10 times the size of the largest
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-dlameter r a t i o . . Cores shall be cut to a length-
to-dlam eter r a t io of 2.0 to 3.0. ’
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides of the core shall be r e la tiv e ly
smooth, fre e of abrupt I r r e g u l a r i t i e s a^d s tra ig h t to w ith in
0.01 In. over the length of the sample.
4.1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity . The ends of the sample shall be
perpendicular to the long axis to w ith in 0.01 In. over 2 In. ( 2 )
(0.25 mm over 51 mm).
4.1.5 P a ra lle lis m . The ends ofxthe sample shall be p a ra lle l to
each other to w ith in 0.002 1 n . ' ^ (0.05 mm).
hsRM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.2)

'ÂSTM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.1)
B.1-3
4.1.6 Fl^tn^§s. The ends of the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
O.Odl i n . ^ ^ ’ ^^ (0.025 mm).
4.1.7 Machining. No capping materials or end surface treatments
other than machining shall be applied to the ends of the sample.
The rock sha ll not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal fr a c tu r in g shall be prevented by cooling with an appropriate
f l u i d as required. Generally, water is used fo r hard rock but
other m aterials may require special f l u i d s , such as saturated brine
f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin fo r expansive shales.
4.1.8 Measurements. The height o f the sample shall be measured at
three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of measuring
to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter o f the specimen shall be
determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t angles
to each other at the top, mid-height, and base of the sample,
using a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
A ll measurements shall be recorded as shown on Form L-B.1-1.
4.2 T e sting.
4.2.1 Alignment. The apparatus shall be assembled so th a t the
platens and sample are aligned w ith the loading axis to w ith in
0.05 in . (1.27 mm).
4.2.2 Axial loading. The axial load sh a ll be applied smoothly and
continuously a t e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress ra te.
For hard rock, the loading rate should produce f a i l u r e w ith in 5 to
15 minutes; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is 25 psi (0.17 MPa)
per second, while constant s tra in rates are on the order of
1 to lOOye per second. For rocks which e x h ib it s ig n ific a n t
no n -e la stic behavior, such as s a lt and some shales, constant
stress loading rates are generally slower, f o r example in the
range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second; constant
s tra in rates w i l l depend on the material type. The same loading
rate sha ll be used f o r a l l samples in a p a r tic u la r suite
of te s ts .
4.2.3 Sample f a i l u r e . F a ilu re is recognized when the load on the
sample becomes constant or decreases. The maximum load sustained
by the sample before t h i s occurs is the f a i l u r e load.
4.2.4 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form L-B.1-1
sha ll be recorded as a mimmum f o r th is te s t.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e sta blish the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re port. Further d e ta ils may be added as ap pro pri
ate, and the order of items may be changed i f necessary. Applications
of the te s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of t h is procedure, but may be
an integral p a rt of some te s tin g programs. In th a t case, an applications
ÂSTM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.1)

ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.2)
B.1-4
5.1 Introductory section o f the re p o rt.
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s of the
material tested.
5.1.1 Scope of te s tin g program.
5.1.1.1 Number of samples tested. In a large report covering
the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types, the te s t matrix is
5.1 .1.2 Rationale fo r sample s e le ction. The reasons fo r the
number and type of sample tested shall be c le a rly stated.
5.1.1.3 Lim ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas of
in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program, and the
lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of application shall
5.1.2 B r ie f d e sc rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, stru cture
and f a b r i c , gram size, d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and weathering
of the samples shall be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the re s u lts , but in general is not
required. In varia ble material or fo r several rock types, many
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recommended
fo r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A detailed l i s t i n g of the equipment
a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t shall be included in the report. The
name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s of each major
piece shall be lis te d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shall
be lis te d in detailed steps.
from the requirements contained in th is procedure, each v a ria tio n
and the reasons fo r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t of the v a ria tio n
upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assumptions
inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e ir applications
shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the re su lts discussed.
5.3.2 S ite - s p e c ific influ ence s.
5.3.2.1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual labora
to ry te s t conditions conform to the assumptions contained in
the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
5.3.2.2 Correction fa c to rs . Any factors or methods applied
to the data to correct fo r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall be
B.1-5
5.4 Results. •I
5.4.1 Summary ta b le . A summary tab le in clu d in g , as a minimum,
rock types, average strengths, ranges and u n ce rta in tie s shall be
presented.
5.4.2 Ind ividua l r e s u lts . A ta b le in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample
numbers, rock types, and strengths shall be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g other types of analysis or presentation
may be included as appropriate.
5.4.3.1 Histograms of re s u lts .
5.4.3.2 C o rre la tio n of re s u lts with other rock properties
such as modulus o f deformation or s p e c ific g ra v ity .
5.4.3.3 Comparison of re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
5.5 E rror estimate.
The re s u lts sha ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s shall be calculated using a 95% confidence
i n te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated w ith a single te s t
shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts of a l l
transducers, power supplies, readout devices, etc.
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite of rock samples, the
mean value of the compressive strength, range, standard deviation
and 95% confidence l i m i t s fo r the mean shall be calculated as a
minimum. The un certa inty of the sample su ite shall be compared
w ith the measurement un certainty to determine whether measurement
e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 uroup c o r r e la t io n . When appropriate, the means of groups
shall be compared to determine whether the observed difference
between groups is s ig n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L-B.1-1 shall be included in an appendix.
6.0 Q uality Assurance

The follow ing items are the minimum requirements to ensure that the te s t
re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of th is
section to e s ta b lish Quality Assurance procedures, but to id e n tify those
points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance action is required.
6.1 Personnel p r e q u a lific a tio n .
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel shall be p re q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6.2 Test Inspection.
Quality Assurance personnel sha ll review the te s t setup, the pro
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . A fte r
te s tin g , the completed Form L-B.1-1 shall be reviewed and signed
o f f only i f co rre c t.
B.1-6
t o 6.3 Required documentation.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Quality Assurance shall
maintain complete c a lib r a tio n records and c e r t if ic a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e ria l numbers. Quality Assurance shall v e r ify
th a t s e ria l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the te s t are recorded
on Form L-B.1-1.
6.3.3 Test sign o f f s . Quality Assurance shall maintain signed-off
copies of Form L-B.1-1.
B.1-7
t o
t o
Ambient Temperature
Test Data Sheet - Form L-B.1-1
Project_________________________ Sample No._

Date____________________________ Rock Type
Tested By_______________________ Test Temperature

Description Serial No. C alibration
Sample Height Sample Diameter
Average ___________ Average Sketch o f Sample

A fte r Failure
Time Required f o r F a ilu re_____

Loadi ng Rate_____
F a ilu re Load_____
Strength_____
Rema rk s :

Q uality Assurance____________________________________ Date
Project Engineer_____________________________________ Date
t o
Procedure L-B.2
Elevated Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h is t e s t . This te s t determines the compressive
strength of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at elevated temperature
under uniaxial loading.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . Only the peak compressive strength is
evaluated. No information on residual strength or deformation
p r io r to f a i l u r e is obtained. This te s t may be combined with
Test L-C.2, "Uniaxial Compressive Modulus of Deformation of Rock
Core - Elevated Temperature", to obtain detailed deformation data.
1.2 General d e s crip tio n of the t e s t .
The sample is heated to a spe cified temperature and is loaded
a x ia lly u n til i t f a i l s . The strength is then calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1.1 Load - the to ta l axial force acting on the sample.
1.3.1.3 F a ilu re - the i n a b i l i t y of the sample to sustain
d e structive fra c tu rin g .
1.3.1.4 Strength - the stress in the rock at which f a ilu r e
occurs.
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The compressive strength, is calculated using:
c^l = (1)
where:
P = load at f a ilu r e
1.4 References.
fo r Unconfined Compressive Strength of In ta c t Rock Core Specimens,"
Annual Book ASTM of Standards, Part 19.
1.4.2 ISRM Commission on Standardization of Laboratory and Field
Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y of Rock M a teria ls", In t.
J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr., 16, No. 2.
B.2-1
2.0 Prerequisites
Technicians and Test Supervisor, shall be form ally p re q u a lifie d
under the Q uality Assurance procedures established as part o f the
overall te s tin g program.
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of t h is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s fo r the equipment shall be the required level of
c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement systems. C alib ra tio n
Quality Assurance procedures.
2.3 C r i t e r i a fo r sample s e le c tio n .
2.3.1 Project scope. The number and types of rock cores tested
depend p a r tly on the intended a p p lic a tio n of the te s t re s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical ch a racte rizatio n of the s it e
might require several samples from a v a rie ty of formations, while a
detailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate repository
rock may re quire many te s ts from a single formation. The fin a l
te s tin g program w i l l depend heavily on the technical judgment and
experience of project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t is t ic a l requirements. The number of samples must be
s u f f ic ie n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r evaluation
of the re s u lts . Rock types which are hig hly varia ble w i l l require
more te s ts than r e la t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to evaluate the
re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can s ig n if ic a n t ly influence the
mass strength of the rock. These should be sampled and tested to
provide an estimate of t h e i r e f f e c t.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample shall be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to

3.1 Loading frame.
to the sample, the reaction frame containing the load mechanism
and the control system fo r the load mechanism. The loading frame
•B
B.2-2
shall be constructed to apply a continuously Increasing load to the
sample at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress rate.
3.2 Platens.
The diameter o f the platens shall be equal to , or greater than, the
diameter of the sample. Rock m aterials which are subject to large
deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt and some shales, shall
be tested using platens sized so th a t the la te ra l expansion of the
sample does not exceed the diameter o f the platen. The platens
shall be at le a s t 0.625 in . th ic k (15.9 mm). The surfaces
shall be f l a t to w ith in O.0QO2 in . (0.005 mm) and hardened to
at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One of the two platens shall
incorporate a spherical seat. This platen shall be placed
above the sample during te s tin g .
3.3 Transducers.
3.3.1 Axial load. An e le c tro n ic load c e ll is recommended to
measure axial Toad on the sample. The c e ll shall have an accuracy
of at lea st ^ 100 lb (45.4 kg), includ ing errors introduced
by the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a resolution of at
least 50 lb (22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or elec
tr o n ic transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system is
employed, provided th a t the load measurement requirements above
are s a tis f ie d , includ ing the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the hydrau
l i c ram, etc.
3.3.2 Temperature. The instrument chosen to monitor temperature
depends p rim a rily on the te s t apparatus and the maximum te s t
temperature. Special Lim its of E rror thermocouples or platinum
resistance thermometers (RTD's) are recommended. The temperature
transducer shall be accurate to at le a st ^ 0.9°F (j^ 0.5°C) with
a re solutio n o f at lea st 0.18°F (0.1°C). The temperature shall
be measured at three lo c a tio n s , with one sensor near the top,
one at m id-height, and one near the bottom o f the sample.
3.4 Heating u n i t .
The heating u n it shall be capable of maintaining a uniform temper
ature throughout the sample to w ith in 7.2°F (4°C). The u n it shall
incorporate controls so th a t the sample may be heated at a rate no
greater than 3.6“ F (2°C) per minute. The mean temperature of the
sample shall vary by no more than 3.6°F (2°C) during the te s t.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Sample preparation
4.1.1 Core s iz e . Rock cores of NX size (2 in . monimal diameter;
51 mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, in no case shall
the core diameter be less than 1 0 times the size of the largest
mineral grain.
hsRM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.2)

‘ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref 1.4.1)
B.2-3
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t i o . . Cores shall be cut to a length-
to-diam eter r a t io of 2.0 to 3.0. *
•a
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core shall be r e la t iv e ly
smooth and fre e of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tra ig h t to w ith in
0.01 in . (0.25 mm) over the length of the sample.
4.1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity . The ends o f the sample shall be ,2)
perpendicular to the long axis to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 i n . ' '
(0.25 mm over 51 mm).
O^xthe sample shall be p
4.1.5 P a ra lle lis m . The ends p^\the paral
a ra lle l to
each other to w ith in 0 . 0 0 22 i n . ' ' (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Fl^tqess. The ends of the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
n.'O'OI'in.^’ '^ (0.025 mm).
The rock shall not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal fr a c tu r in g sha ll be prevented by cooling w ith an appropriate
f l u i d as required. Generally, water is used fo r hard rock, but
other flu id s may be necessary, such as saturated brine fo r s a lt or
g lyce rin fo r expansive shales.
4.1 .8 Measurements. The height of the sample shall be measured at
three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of measuring
determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t angles to
each other at the top, m id-height, and base of the sample, using
a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). A ll
measurements sha ll be recorded as shown on Form L-B.2-1.
4.2 Testing.
0.05 in . (1.3 mm).
4.2.2 Heating ra te . The sample shall be heated to the te s t
temperature at a rate not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute, to
prevent thermal fra c tu rin g .
4.2.3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The te s t sample shall be maintained at
the te s t temperature fo r at le a s t 2 hours p r io r to te s tin g .
4.2.4 Axial loading. The axial load shall be applied smoothly and
continuously at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress ra te.
For hard rock, the loading rate should produce f a i l u r e w ith in
ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.2)

ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
B.2-4
5 to 15 minutes; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is 25 psi (0.17 MPa)
per second w hile constant s tra in rates are on the order of 1 to
lOOue per second. For rocks which e x h ib it s ig n ific a n t non-elastic
behavior, such as s a lt and some shales, constant stress loading
rates are generally slower, f o r example in the range of 0.5 to
4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second; constant s tra in rates w i l l
depend on the material type. The same l.oading rate shall be used
fo r a l l samples in a p a r tic u la r s u ite o f te s ts .
4.2.5 Sample f a i l u r e . F a ilu re is recognized when the load on the
sample becomes constant or decreases. The maximum load sustained
by the sample before t h i s occurs is the f a ilu r e load.
4.2.6 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form L-B.2-1
shall be recorded as a minimum fo r th is te s t.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e sta blish the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re p o rt. Further d e ta ils may be added as appropri
ate, and the order of items may be changed i f necessary. Applications
of the te s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of t h is procedure, but may be
an integral part of some te s tin g programs. In th a t case, an applications
5.1 Introductory section o f the re p o rt.
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tic s of the
material tested.
the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types or at various te s t
temperatures, the te s t matrix is best presented in a tab ular
form.
5.1 .1.2 Rationale f o r sample sele ction. The reasons fo r the
number and types o f samples tested shall be c le a rly stated.
5.1.1.3 L im ita tio n s of the te s tin g program. The areas of
in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program, and the
lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of ap plicatio n shall
5.1.2 B rie f d e s crip tio n of the samples. The rock type, structure
and f a b r ic , gram siz e , d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and weathering
of the samples shall be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lica tio n of the re s u lts , but in general is not
required. In varia ble material or fo r several rock types, many
samples may be described, and a tab ular presentation is recommended
fo r c l a r i t y .
ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref 1.4.2)
B.2-5
5.2 Test method,
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A de ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the equipment
a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t shall be included in the re port. The
name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s o f each major piece
should be lis t e d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shall
be lis t e d in de tailed steps.
from the requirements contained in t h is procedure, each v a ria tio n
and the reasons fo r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t of the v a ria tio n
upon the t e s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assumptions
inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e i r applications
shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the re su lts discussed.
5.3 .2.1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual labora
to ry te s t conditions conform to the assumptions contained in
the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
to the data to correct f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall be
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Summary ta b le . A summary tab le including as a minimum rock
types, t e s t temperatures, average strengths, ranges and uncer
t a i n t i e s sha ll be presented.
5.4.2 Ind ividua l r e s u lts . A ta b le of re s u lts fo r in d iv id u a l te s ts
in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample numbers, rock types, te s t tempera
tu re s , and strengths shall be presented.
5.4.3 Other. Other types of analyses and presentations may be
included as appropriate.
5.4 .3.1 Histograms of re s u lts .
5 .4 .3 .2 Relation between strength and temperature.
5.4.3.3 C orrelatio n of re s u lts w ith other rock properties
such as modulus of deformation or s p e c ific g ra v ity .
5.4 .3.4 Comparison of re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
5.5 E rro r estimate.
The re s u lts shall be analyzed using standard s t a t is t ic a l methods.
i n te rv a l.
B.2-6
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e rro r associated with a single te s t
shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe cts of a ll
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each suite of rock samples, the
value of the mean compressive strength, range, standard deviation
and 95% confidence l i m i t s fo r the mean should be calculated as a
minimum. The uncertainty of the sample suite shall be compared
with the measurement uncertainty to determine whether measurement
e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e la tio n . When appropriate, the means of groups
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed te s t Form L-B.2-1 should be included in an appendix.
6.0 Quality Assurance

The fo llo w in g items are the minimum requirements to ensure th a t the te s t
re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of th is
section to e sta b lis h Q uality Assurance procedures, but to id e n tify those
points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance action is required.
P rio r to te s tin g , a l l personnel shall be preq u a lifie d as described
in section 2 . 1 .
6.2 Test Inspection.
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . A fte r te s tin g ,
the completed Form L-B.2-1 sha ll be reviewed and signed o f f only i f
correct.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t i o n . Quality Assurance shall
th a t se ria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the te s t are recorded
on Form L-B.2-1.
6.3.3 Test sign o f f s . Quality Assurance shall maintain signed-off
copies of Form L-B.2-1.
B.2-7
Project_ Sample No._

Date Rock Type
Tested By Test Temperature
Equi pment Date of Next

Descri ption Serial No. C alibration
Average Average Sketch o f Sample

A fte r Fa ilu re
Time Required f o r Failure_

Loading Rate_____
Strength_____
Remarks:
Test Supervisor__ Date

Quality Assurance Date
Project Engineer Date
Procedure L-B.3
T ria x ia l Compressive Strength of Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h is t e s t . This te s t determines the maxi
mum compressive strength of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at
ambient temperature under t r i a x i a l loading. The re sults ob
tained give the re la tio n s h ip of shear and compressive strength
to confining pressure and the angle of inte rna l f r i c t i o n of
the rock.
1.1.2.1 This procedure te s ts rock core in an undrained
sta te . No provision is made fo r pore pressure measurements.
The pore pressure is assumed to be zero in the c alcu la tion s.
1.1.2.2 Only the peak compressive strength is evaluated.
No inform ation on residual strength or deformation p r io r
to f a i l u r e is obtained. This te s t procedure may be com
bined w ith Procedure L-C.3, "T ria x ia l Compressive Modulus
of Deformation of Rock Core - Ambient Temperature", to
obtain detailed deformation data.
1.2 General d e scriptio n of the t e s t .
A rock core sample is cut to length and the ends are machined
f l a t . The sample is enclosed in a f le x ib le impermeable membrane
and is placed in a confining chamber. The sample is loaded
a x ia lly and the confining chamber is pressurized to provide
la te ra l load. When the desired la te ra l load is achieved, i t is
held constant. Axial loading continues to increase u n t il the
sample f a i l s . The strength is then calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
de stru c tive fra c tu rin g .
occurs.
B.3-1
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The compressive strength, Is calculated using:
' j (1 )
where:
A = cross-sectional area of sample.
1.3.2.2 The angle o f in te rn a l f r i c t i o n o f the rock,

is obtained from the Mohr envelope shown on Figure 1.1.
The terms used on t h i s fig u re are:
cTj = compressive strength
= la te ra l (c o n fin in g ) pressure
T = shear stress.
The Mohr's c ir c le s are constructed by the standard method.
The curve tangent to a l l c ir c le s is the Mohr envelope. On
Figure 1.1, the envelope is shown as a s tra ig h t l in e , co r
responding to the Coulomb f a i l u r e c r i t e r i o n . Other f a i l
ure c r i t e r i a , notably Mohr’ s and G r i f f i t h ' s , predict a para
b o lic f a i l u r e envelope. Because of v a r i a b i l i t y between
rock samples, however, the Mohr envelope often does not
e x h ib it a d i s t i n c t curvature unless r e la t i v e l y high con
fin in g pressures are applied. In t h is case, <f is calcu
lated from the slope of the envelope at the desired stress
le v e l.
1.3.2.3 The unconfined shear strength, S , is the i n t e r
cept of the f a i l u r e envelope w ith the shear stress axis
see Figure 1.1).
1.3 .2.4 The fun ction al re la tio n s h ip between o ^ and cr ^
may be defined in i t s most general form by:
aj = f ( 0 3 ) (2 )
The functional form ulation depends on the f a i l u r e c r it e r io n

assumed in the analysis. As w ith the Mohr f a ilu r e envelope,
however, s c a tte r in the data generally precludes a l l func
tio n s of higher order than lin e a r , unless te s ts have been
conducted at r e la t iv e ly high confining pressures. Thus,
Equation 2 may be re w ritte n :
^ 1 = C q H- K^ 3 (3)
B.3-2
! •
CO
<Tx
NORMAL STRESS, <r
FIGURE 1.1 TYPICAL MOHR CIRCLES AND FAILURE ENVELOPE
01
'3
FIGURE 1.2 TYPICAL RELATION BETWEEN CONFINING

PRESSURE AND STRENGTH.
B.3-3
where:
= unconfined compressive strength of the rock
K = constant.
A ty p ic a l p lo t of the r e la tio n between and c? ^ is

shown on Figure 1.2.
1.3.3 L im its of a p p l i c a b i l i t y . The extension of f a ilu r e c r i t e r i a
in to te n s ile loading s itu a tio n s is complex. Such situ a tio n s can
not be modeled by t h i s te s t and, in any case, are of lim ite d value
due to the i n a b i l i t y o f rock masses to sustain appreciable tension.
Therefore, the f a i l u r e envelopes and stress re la tio n s , discussed
in Sections 1.3 .2.2 and 1.3.2.4 re s p e c tiv e ly , are defined only fo r
confining pressures greater than or equal to zero.
1.4 References.
fo r T ria x ia l Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core Specimens
Without Pore Pressure Measurements," Annual Book o f ASTM Stan-
dards, Part 19.
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, I n c . ,1 9 8 1 , F ie ld and In Situ Rock
Mechanics Testing Manual, ONWI-310, O ffice o f Nuclear Waste
Is o la tio n , B a tte l!e Memorial I n s t it u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.3 ISRM Commission on Standardization of Laboratory and
F ie ld Tests, 1978, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the
Strength of Rock M aterials in T r ia x ia l Compression," In t . J.
of Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 15, No. Y .
2.0 Prerequisites
2.1 Personnel p re q u a lific a t^ o n .
under the Q uality Assurance procedures established as part of
the ove ra ll te s tin g program.
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus with the p e rfo r
mance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of t h is procedure shall be
v e r if ie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, the
manufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s fo r the equipment shall be the
required level of performance. Performance v e r if ic a t io n is
generally done by c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement
systems. C a lib ra tio n and documentation shall be accomplished
according to standard Q uality Assurance procedures.
2.3 C r it e r ia fo r sample s e le c tio n .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a racte rizatio n of the
B.3-4
s it e might require several samples from a va rie ty of formations,
while a d e tailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
re pository rock may require many te s ts from a single formation.
The fin a l te s tin g program w i l l depend heavily on the technical
judgment and experience o f project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t is t ic a l requirements. The number of samples tested
must be s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t is t ic a l basis fo r
evaluation of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly variable
w i l l require more te s ts than a r e la t iv e ly uniform rock, in order
to evaluate the re su lts w ith equal c e rta in ty . T ria x ia l te s ts
using at le a s t three d if f e r e n t confining pressures are recom
mended to determine the f a i l u r e envelope and the re la tio n be
tween a, and a^. At each confining pressure, no fewer than
three te s ts are recommended.
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass, such
as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can s ig n if ic a n t ly influence
the mass strength of the rock. These should be sampled and
tested to provide an estimate o f t h e i r e ffe c t.
2.3.4 Anisotropy. Anisotropy o f the rock mass should be eval
uated by te s tin g cores taken at d if f e r e n t o rie n ta tio n s.
2.4 Preservation o f moisture condition of samples.
strength. The moisture content of the rock core shall be pre
served between the time of recovery and the time of te s tin g as
described in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage of Rock
Core Samples," see Ref 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample shall be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according
to standard Q uality Assurance procedures.

3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame consists of the mechanism fo r applying axial
load to the sample, the reaction frame containing the load
mechanism and t r i a x i a l c e l l , and the control system f o r the
load mechanism. The loading frame shall be constructed to
apply a continuously increasing load to the sample at e ith e r a
constant s tr a in or constant stress rate.
3.2 T ria x ia l confining chamber.
The confining chamber consists of a hollow c y lin d e r and end
caps to contain the confining f l u i d , platens to support the
sample, and a f le x ib le impermeable membrane to cover the sample
during te s tin g .
B.3-5
3.2.1 Cylinder and end caps. The c e ll design shall be such
th a t changes in c o n fining pressure do not d i r e c t l y cause changes
in axial load and vice versa.
3.2.2 Platens. The diameter o f the platens shall be equal to
or greater than the diameter of the sample. Rock materials
subject to large deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt
and some shales, sha ll be tested using platens sized so that
the la te ra l expansion o f the sample does not exceed the platen
diameter. The platens shall be at least 0.625 in . (15.9 mm)
th ic k . The surfaces shall be f l a t to w ith in 0.0002 in . (0.005 mm)
and hardened to at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One of the two
platens sh a ll incorporate a spherical seat. This platen shall be
placed above the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.3 F le x ib le , impermeable membrane. This membrane encloses
the rock sample and prevents penetration by the confining
f l u i d . Generally, a sleeve o f natural or synth etic rubber or
p la s tic polymer is used. Copper or lead jackets are sometimes
used. The membrane sha ll be in e r t re la tiv e to the confining
f l u i d , and sha ll cover small pores in the sample without rup
tu r in g when confining pressure is applied. P la s tic or s ilic o n e
rubber coatings may be applied d ir e c t ly to the sample, pro-'
viding these m aterials do not penetrate and strengthen the sample.
The ends o f the sample shall not be coated, and care must be
taken to form an e ffe c tiv e seal where the platen and sample
meet. Membranes formed by coatings shall be subject to the same
performance requirements as e la s tic sleeve membranes. Ma
t e r i a l s re q u irin g a heat cure shall not be used.
3.3 Confining pressure system.
The con fining pressure system consists o f the pressurizing
f l u i d and the means o f applying pressure. The f l u i d is gen
e r a lly hydraulic o il or water, but in e r t gas may also be used.
The p ressuriza tion system shall be capable of maintaining the
confining pressure to w ith in ^ 1% throughout the te s t.
3.4 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axial load on the
sample and the confining pressure.
measure axial load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an
accuracy o f at le a s t 100 lb (45.5 kg), includ ing errors i n t r o
duced by the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a resolution of
at le a s t 50 lb (22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or
hsRM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

'ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
B.3-6
transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system is employed,
provided th a t the load measurement requirements above are s a tis fie d ,
including the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the hydraulic ram, etc.
3.4.2 Confining pressure. The confining pressure shall be
measured w ith a hydraulic pressure gage or e le c tro n ic tra ns
ducer, having an accuracy o f + 1% o f the confining pressure,
including e rro rs due to readout equipment, and a resolution of
at le a s t 0.5% o f the confining pressure.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core s iz e . Rock cores o f NX size (2 in . nominal diameter;
51 mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, in no case shall the
core diameter be less than 1 0 times the size of the largest
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t io . .Cores shall be cut to a length-
to-diam eter r a t io o f 2.0 to 3.0. ’
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core shall be r e la tiv e ly
smooth, fre e of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tra ig h t to w ith in
4.1.4 P erp e n d ic u la rity . The ends of the sample shall bsvperpen-
d ic u la r to the long axis to w ith in 0.01 in . over 2 i n . ' ' (0.25 mm
over 51 mm).
4.1.5 P a ra lle iis m . The ends ofpthe sample shall be p a ra lle l to
each other to w ith in 0.002 i n . ' ’ (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness. The ends o f the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 i n . ^ ’ *^ (0.025 mm).
Thermal fr a c tu r in g shall be prevented by cooling with an appro
p r ia te f l u i d as required. Generally water is used fo r hard
rock, but other materials may require special f l u i d s , such as
saturated brine fo r s a l t , or glyce rin fo r slaking mudstones.
4.1.8 Voids. Large voids in the sides o f the samples, such
as v e s icle s, may be f i l l e d with p a ra ffin , p la s tic or s im ila r
material to provide support fo r the f l e x i b le membrane. Such
f i l l i n g material sha ll not penetrate the rock and shall have
JlSRM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

'ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
i.3-7
an e la s tic modulus no greater than 10% o f the In ta c t rock modu
lus.
4.1.9 Measurements. The height o f the sample shall be mea
sured at three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable
of measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter of the speci
men shall be determined by averaging two diameters measured at
r ig h t angles to each other at the top, m id-height, and base of
the sample, using a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0 . 0 0 1 in .
(0.025 mm). A ll measurements shall be recorded as shown on
Form L-B.3-1.
4.2 Testing.
platen and sample are aligned w ith the loading axis to w ith in
0.05 in .
4.2.2 Loading sequence. During the i n i t i a l stage of the t e s t ,
the axial load and con fining pressure shall be increased con
c u rre n tly a t rates such th a t the axial stress in the sample
is maintained equal to the confining pressure.
4.2.3 Axial loading. The axial load sha ll be applied smoothly
and continuously at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress
ra te . For hard rock, the loading rate should produce f a ilu r e
w ith in 5 to 15 minutes; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is
25 psi (0.17 MPa ) per second, while constant s tra in rates are
on the order of 1 to 100 pe /p e r second. For rocks which
e x h ib it s ig n if ic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as s a lt and some
shales, constant stress loading rates are generally slower,
fo r example, in the range o f 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa)
per second; constant s tr a in rates w i l l depend on the material
prope rties.
4.2.4 Sample f a i l u r e . F a ilu re is recognized when the load on
the sample becomes constant or decreases. The maximum load sus
tained by the sample before t h is occurs is the f a i l u r e load.
4.2.5 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form
L-B.3-1 sh a ll be recorded as a minimum f o r th is te s t.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h is section is to e sta blish the minimum re q u ire
ments fo r a complete and usable report. Further d e ta ils may be
added as appropriate, and the order of items may be changed i f
necessary. A pplications of the te s t re su lts are beyond the scope
of t h is procedure, but may be an in te g ra l part of some te s tin g pro
grams. In th a t case, an a p plicatio ns section compatible with the
format described below should be included.
ÎSRM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.3)
B.3-8
5.1 Introductory section of the re p o rt.
The in tro d u cto ry section is intended to present the scope and
material tested.
5.1.1.1 Number of samples tested. In a large report
covering the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types or
con fining pressures, the te s t matrix is best presented
in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1.2 Rationale fo r sample selection. The reasons fo r
the number and type of samples tested shall be c le a rly
stated.
5.1 .1.3 L im ita tio n s of the te s tin g program. The areas
o f in te re s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program
and the lim ita tio n s o f the data w ith in the areas of a p p li
cation shall be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r ie f d e sc rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c
tu re and f a b r ic , grain s ize , d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and
weathering of the samples shall be described as a minimum.
Further d e ta il depends on the a p p lica tio n of the re s u lts , but
in general is not required. In variable material or fo r several
rock types, many samples may be described, and a tabular pre
sentation is recommended fo r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A detailed l i s t i n g of the equip
ment a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shall be included in the report.
The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s of each major
piece shall be lis te d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shal 1
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s. I f the actual equipment or procedure varies
from the requirements contained in t h is procedure, each v a ria
tio n and the reasons fo r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t of the
v a ria tio n upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
5.3.1 Data reduction equations. A ll equations used to reduce
the data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e ir
a p plications shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the results
di scussed.
5.3.2.1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual
laboratory te s t conditions conform to the assumptions
contained in the data reduction equations shall be d is
cussed.
B.3-9
5.3 .2.2 Correction fa c to rs . Any fa c to rs or methods applied
to the data to correct fo r a nonideal s itu a tio n shall be
•I
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Basic r e s u lts . Results shall be presented including sample
numbers, c o n fin in g pressures, and strengths as a minimum. A
ta b u la r presentation is recommended fo r c l a r i t y .
5.4.2 Mohr's c i r c l e s . A Mohr's c i r c l e diagram, as discussed in
Sections 1 .3 . 2 .2 and 1 .3 . 2 .3 of th is procedure, shall be pre
sented f o r each s u ite of samples as appropriate. A summary
table of the angle o f in te rn a l f r i c t i o n and the unconfined
shear strength should also be presented.
5.4.3 Strength vs. confinement. A graph o f the re la tio n s h ip
between and o ^ . as discussed in Section 1 .3 .2 .4 , shall be presented
fo r each s u ite o f rocks as appropriate. A summary tab le of un
confined compressive strengths and re la tio n a l constants as defined
in Equation 3 should also be presented.
5.4.4 Other. The follo w in g other types o f analyses and presenta
tio n s may be included as appropriate.
5.4 .4.1 Histograms o f re s u lts .
5 .4 .4 .2 C orrelatio n w ith other rock properties such as
s p e c ific g ra v ity or modulus o f deformation.
5.4 .4.3 Comparison of re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
The re s u lts sha ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s shall be calculated using a 95% confidence i n
te r v a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated w ith a single
te s t shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts
I
of a l l transducers, power supplies, readout devices, etc.
mean value of the compressive strength, standard deviation and 95%
confidence l i m i t s fo r the mean shall be calculated as a minimum.
The un certa inty o f the sample s u ite shall be compared with
the measurement uncertainty to determine whether measurement
e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the
re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e la t io n . When appropriate, the means o f groups
B.3-10
I
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Fonn L-8.3-1 shall be included in an appen
dix.

te s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
th is section to e sta blish Q uality Assurance procedures, but to
i d e n tify those points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance
action is required.
P rio r to te s tin g , a l l personnel shall be preq u a lifie d as de
6.2 Test in sp ection.
Q uality Assurance personnel shall review the te s t setup, the pro
te s tin g , the completed Form L-B.3-1 shall be reviewed
and signed o f f only i f correct.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Quality Assurance
shall maintain complete c a lib r a tio n records and c e r tific a te s .
th a t s e ria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the te s t are re
corded on Form L-B.3-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n - o ffs . Q uality Assurance shall maintain signed-
o f f copies of Form L-B.3-1.
B.3-11
T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength of Rock Core
Ambient Temperature
Project_________________________ Sample No._

Date____________________________ Rock Type
Tested By_______________________ Test Temperature_

D escription Serial No. C alibration
Average ___________ Average Sketch of Sample

A fte r Failure
Time Required f o r F a ilu re _____

Loadi ng Rate_____
Strength_____
Remarks:

Quality Assurance____________________________________ Date
Project Engineer_____________________________________ Date
Procedure L-B.4
T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength o f Rock Core -
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h is te s t . ■ This te s t determines the maximum
compressive strength of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at elevated
temperature under t r i a x i a l loading. The re s u lts obtained give
the re la tio n s h ip of shear and compressive strength to confining
pressure and the angle o f in te rn a l f r i c t i o n of the rock.
1.1.2.1 This procedure te s ts rock core in an undrained sta te .

No provision is made f o r pore pressure measurements. The pore
pressure is assumed to be zero in the c alcu la tion s.
1.1.2.2 Only the peak compressive strength is evaluated. No
inform ation on residual strength or deformation p r io r to
f a i l u r e is obtained. This t r i a x i a l te s t may be combined with
Test L-C.4, "T r ia x ia l Compressive Modulus o f Deformation of
Rock Core - Elevated Temperature", to obtain detailed de for
mation data.
1.2 General de scrip tio n of the t e s t .
The sample is enclosed in a f l e x i b l e impermeable membrane and
placed in a confining chamber. The sample is slowly heated to the
desired temperature. The sample is loaded a x ia lly and the confining
chamber is pressurized to provide la te ra l load. When the desired
la te ra l load is achieved, i t is held constant. Axial loading
continues to increase u n t i l the sample f a i l s . The strength is then
calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
d e structive fra c tu rin g .
1 .3 .1 .4 Strength - the stress in the rock at which f a ilu r e
occurs.
8.4-1
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The compressive strength, is calculated by;
= j ( 1)
where:
1.3.2.2 The angle o f inte rna l f r i c t i o n of the rock, 0, is

obtained from the Mohr envelope shown on Figure 1.1. The
terms used on t h i s fig u re are:
a = compressive strength
a 2 = la te r a l (c o n fin in g ) pressure
T = shear stress
The Mohr's c ir c le s are constructed by the standard method.
The curve tangent to a l l c ir c le s is the Mohr envelope. On
Figure 1.1, the envelope is shown as a s tra ig h t li n e , corres
ponding to the Coulomb f a i l u r e c r i t e r i o n . Other f a ilu r e
c r i t e r i a , notably Mohr's and G r i f f i t h ' s , predict a parabolic
f a i l u r e envelope. Because of v a r i a b i l i t y between rock samples,
however, the Mohr envelope often does not e x h ib it a d i s t i n c t
curvature unless r e la t i v e l y high confining pressures are
applied. In t h i s case, 0 is calculated from the slope of
the envelope at the desired stress le v e l.
1.3.2.3 The unconfined shear strength, S^, is the in te rce p t
of the f a i l u r e envelope w ith the shear stress axis (see
Figure 1.1).
1.3 .2.4 The fun ction al re la tio n s h ip between and may be
defined in i t s most general form by:
Oj = f ( 0 3 ) (2 )
The functional form ulation depends on the f a ilu r e c r it e r io n

assumed in the an alysis. As with the Mohr f a ilu r e envelope,
however, s c a tte r in the data generally precludes a l l functions
higher than lin e a r , unless te s ts have been conducted at
r e la t i v e l y high con fining pressures. Thus, Equation 2 may
be re w ritte n :
cr 1 = Cq + Ka 3 (3)
where:
Cq = unconfined compressive strength of the rock
K = constant
A ty p ic a l p lo t of the re la tio n between and <^3 is shown on

Figure 1.2.
B.4-2
CO
0-4 <r,‘
NORMAL STRESS, <r
FIGURE 1.1 TYPICAL MOHR CIRCLES AND FAILURE ENVELOPE
01
3
FIGURE 1.2 TYPICAL RELATION BETWEEN CONFINING

PRESSURE AND STRENGTH.
B.4-3
1.3.3 L im its of a p p l i c a b i l i t y . The extension of f a ilu r e c r i t e r i a
in to te n s ile loading s itu a tio n s is complex. Such s itu a tio n s cannot
be modeled by t h i s te s t and, in any case, are of lim ite d value due
to the i n a b i l i t y o f rock masses to sustain appreciable tension.
Therefore, the f a i l u r e envelopes and stress re la tio n s discussed in
Sections 1.3.2.2 and 1 .3 .2 .4 , re s p e c tiv e ly , are defined only fo r
con fining pressures greater than, or equal t o , zero.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Designation D2664, "Standard Test
Method f o r T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core
Specimens without Pore Pressure Measurements," Annual Book o f
ASTM Standards, Part 19.
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, In c . , 1981, F ie ld and In Situ Rock
Is o la tio n , B a tte lle Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.3 ISRM Commission on Standardization o f Laboratory and
F ie ld Tests on Rock, 1979, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining
the Uniaxial Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y o f Rock
M a te ria ls ", I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr.,
16, No. 2.
2.0 Prerequisites
under the Q uality Assurance procedures established as part
of the o v e ra ll te s tin g program.
2.2 Equipment performance verifica*~.ion.
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus with the performance
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment shall be the required level of
performance. Performance v e r if ic a t io n is usually accomplished by
c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib ra tio n
and documentation shall be accomplished according to Standard
2.3 C r it e r ia f o r sample sele ction.
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical cha racte rizatio n of the s it e
might require several samples from a v a rie ty of formations, while
a de ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
repository rock may require many te s ts from a single formation.
judgment and experience of project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t is t ic a l requirements. The number o f samples must be
s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r evaluation
of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly variable w i l l require
B.4-4
more te s ts than r e la t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to evaluate
the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty . T ria x ia l tests using at least
three d if f e r e n t confining pressures are recommended to determine
the f a i l u r e envelope and the r e la tio n between and At
each con fining pressure and temperature, no fewer than three
te s ts are recommended.
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass,
such as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s ,v o id s , e t c . , can influence the mass
strength o f the rock. These should be sampled and tested to
provide an estimate of t h e i r e ffe c t.
2.3.4 Anisotropy. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be
evaluated by te s tin g cores taken at d if f e r e n t o rie n ta tio n s.
2.4 Preservation of moisture condition of samples.
The moisture condition of the rock can influence the measured
strength. The moisture content of the rock core shall be
preserved between the time of recovery and the time of te s tin g
as described in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage of
Rock Core Samples," see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample sha ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to
standard Q ua lity Assurance procedures.

3.1 Loading frame.
and t r i a x i a l c e l l , and the control system fo r the load mechanism.
The loading frame shall be constructed to apply a continuously
increasing load to the sample at e ith e r a constant s tra in or
constant stress rate.
3.2 T r ia x ia l confining chamber.
The confining chamber consists of a hollow c y lin d e r and end caps to
contain the confining f l u i d , platens to support the sample, and a
f le x ib le impecmeable membrane to cover the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.1 C ylinder and end caps. The c e ll design shall be such that
changes in confining pressure do not d ir e c t ly cause changes in
axial load and vice versa.
3.2.2 Platens. The diameter of the platens shall be equal to
or greater than the diameter of the sample. Rock materials which
are subject to large deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt
and some shales, sha ll be tested using platens sized so that
the la te ra l expansion of the sample does not exceed the platen
diameter. The platens shall be at lea st 0.625 in . (15.9 mm)
t h ic k . The surfaces shall be f l a t to w ith in 0.0002 in . (0.005 mm)
ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

B.4-5
and hardened to at le a st Rockwell HRC 58 ’ . One of the two
platens sha ll incorporate a spherical seat. This platen shall
be placed above the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.3 F le x ib le , impermeable membrane. This membrane encloses the
rock sample and prevents penetration by the confining f l u i d .
Generally, a sleeve of natural or synth etic rubber or other
p la s tic polymer is used. Copper or lead jackets are sometimes
used. The membrane shall be in e r t r e la tiv e to the confining
f l u i d at the t e s t temperature, and shall cover small pores
in the sample w ithout rupturing when confining pressure is applied.
P la s tic or s ilic o n e rubber coatings may be applied d ir e c t ly to
the sample, providing these materials do not penetrate and
strengthen the sample. The ends of the sample shall not be
coated, and care must be taken to form an e ffe c tiv e seal where
the platen and sample meet. Membranes formed by coatings shall
be subject to the same performance requirements as e la s tic sleeve
membranes.
The con fining pressure system consists of the pressurizing
f l u i d and the means o f applying pressure. The f l u i d shall be
stable at the expected t e s t temperatures. High temperature
hydraulic o i l , s ilic o n e o i l , or in e r t gas may be used. The
pressuriza tion system sha ll be capable o f maintaining the
confining pressure to w ith in 1 % throughout the te s t.
3.4 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axial load on the
sample and the confining pressure.
measure axial load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an
accuracy o f a t le a s t ^ 100 lb (+ 45.4 kg), including errors
introduced by the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a resolu
t io n of at lea st 50 lb (22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure
gage or e le c tro n ic transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading
system i s employed, provided th a t the load measurement re q u ire
ments above are s a t is f ie d , including the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in
the hydraulic ram, etc.
3.4.2 Confining pressure. The con fining pressure shall be
measured w ith a hydraulic pressure gage or transducer having
an accuracy o f 1 % of the confining pressure, including e rro rs
due to readout equipment, and a re s o lu tio n of at least 0.5% o f
the confining pressure.
depends p r im a rily on the te s t apparatus and the maximum te s t
temperature. Special Lim its of E rror thermocouples or platinum
JlSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
B.4-6
resistance thermometers (RTD's) are recommended. The temperature
transducer shall be accurate t o - a t lea st + 0.9°F (+ 0.5°C) w ith a
re solutio n o f at lea st 0 . 18°F ( 0 . 1“ C). The temperature shall be
measured at three lo ca tio n s, w ith one sensor near the top, one at
mid-height, and one near the bottom of the sample.
3.5 Heating u n it.
The heating u n it shall be capable of maintaining a uniform
temperature throughout the sample to w ith in 7.2°F (4°C). The
u n it shall incorporate controls so th a t the sample may be heated
a t a rate no greater than 3.6°F (2°C) per minute. The mean tem
perature of the sample shall vary by no more than 3.6°F (2°C)
during the te s t .
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core size. Rock cores of NX size (2 in . nominal diameter;
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t io . CoreSpShall be cut to a
length-to-diam eter r a t io of 2.0 to 3.0. ’
4.1.4 Perpend i c u la r i t y . The ends of the sample shall.tê perpen
d ic u la r to the long axis to w ith in 0.01 in . over 2 i n . ' ' (0.25 mm
over 51 mm).
4.1.5 P ara lle lism . The ends of th« the sample shall be p a rallel
ra lle l
to each other to w ith in 0 . 0 0 2 i n . ' ' (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatqess. The ends of the sample shall be f l a t to w ithin
0.001 i n . ^ ’ *^ (0.025 mm).
Thermal fra c tu rin g shall be prevented by cooling w ith an appro
p ria te f l u i d as required. Generally, water is used fo r hard
rock, but other materials may require special flu id s such as
saturated brine fo r s a lt or g ly ce rin fo r slaking mudstones.
4.1.8 Voids. Large voids in the sides of the sample, such as
vesicles, may be f i l l e d w ith p a ra ffin , p la s tic or s im ila r material
to provide support fo r the f l e x i b le membrane. Such f i l l i n g
material sh a ll not penetrate the rock, and shall have an e la s tic
ilSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

'ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
B.4-7
modulus no greater than 1 0 % o f the in ta c t rock modulus.
4.1.9 Measurements. The height o f the sample shall be measured
a t three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of
measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter of the sample
shall be determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t
angles to each other at the top, mid-height, and base of the
sample, using a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0 . 0 0 1 in .
(0.025 mm). A ll measurements shall be recorded as shown on
Form L-B.4-1.
4.1.10 Membrane a p p lic a tio n . To avoid membrane d isru ptio n
caused by moisture escaping from the sample during the t e s t ,
the sample shall be dried at 221°+^4°F (105° ^ 2°C) fo r at least
24 hours p r io r to membrane a p p lic a tio n . To prevent thermal
fra c tu r in g , the heating and cooling rate fo r drying the sample
shall not exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute. I f thermo-setting or
heat-shrink m aterials are used f o r the membrane, the heating
and cooling rates shall also not exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute.
4.2 Testing.
0.05 in . (1.27 mm).
4.2.2 Heating rate. The sample w i l l be heated to the te s t
temperature at a rate not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute, to
4.2.3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The te s t sample shall be maintained
at the t e s t temperature fo r at le a s t 2 hours p r io r to te s tin g .
the axial load and confining pressure shall be increased con
c u rre n tly at rates such th a t the axial stress in the sample is
maintained equal to the confining pressure.
4.2.5 Axial loading. The axial load sha ll be applied smoothly
ra te. For hard rock, the loading rate should produce f a ilu r e
w ith in 5 to 15 minutes; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is 25 psi
(0.17 MPa) per second, while constant s tra in rates are on the
order of 1 to lOOpe per second. For rocks which e x h ib it s ig n i
fic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as rock s a lt and some shales,
constant stress loading rates are generally slower, fo r example,
in the range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second;
constant s tr a in rates w i l l depend on the material properties.
The same loading rate shall be used fo r a l l samples in a par
t i c u l a r s u ite of te s ts .
4.2.6 Sample f a ilu r e . F a ilu re is recognized when the load on
the sample becomes constant or decreases. The maximum load
sustained by the sample before t h is occurs is the f a ilu r e load.
T
ISRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.3)
B.4-8
4.2.7 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form
L-B.4-1 sha ll be recorded as a minimum fo r th is te s t.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e sta blish the minimum requirements
fo r a complete and usable report. Further d e ta ils may be added
as appropriate, and the order of items may be changed i f necessary.
Applications of the te s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of th is procedure,
but may be an in te g ra l part o f some te s tin g programs. In th a t case,
an ap plications section compatible w ith the format described below
should be included.
5.1 Introductory section of the report.
The intro d u c to ry section is intended to present the scope and
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra cte ristie s of the
material tested.
5.1.1.1 Number of samples tested. In a large report
covering the re su lts o f te sts in several rock types,
confining pressures, or temperatures, the te s t matrix is
5.1 .1.2 Rationale fo r sample selection. The reasons
fo r the number and types of samples tested shall be c le a rly
stated.
5 .1.1.3 Lim ita tion s of the te s tin g program. The areas
o f in te re s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program,
and the lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of
a p p lic a tio n shall be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B rie f de scrip tio n of the samples. The rock type, structure
and f a b r ic , grain size, d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and weathering
of the samples shall be described as a minimum. Further de ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n of the re s u lts , but in general is
not required. In variable m a te ria l, or fo r several rock types,
many samples may be described, and a tabular presentation is
recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A detailed l i s t i n g of the
equipment a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shall be included in the
re port. The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s of
each major piece shall be lis te d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a ctu a lly used fo r the te s t
shall be lis te d in detailed steps.
5.2.3 V ariations. I f the actual equipment or procedure has
varied from the requirements contained in th is procedure, each
B.4-9
v a ria tio n and the reasons fo r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t
of the v a ria tio n upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
5.3 Data reduction equations. A ll equations used to reduce
the data sha ll be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e ir
a p plications shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the re sults
di scussed.
5.3.2 S ite - s p e c ific influences.
laboratory t e s t conditions conform to the assumptions
contained in the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
5 .3.2.2 Correction fa c to rs . Any factors or methods applied
to the data to correct fo r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall
be f u l l y explained.
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary of re s u lts . A ta b le of re su lts including rock
s u ite s, temperatures, confining pressure, average strength values,
ranges and u n c e rta in tie s shall be presented.
5.4.2 Individual te s t re s u lts . A tab le of re s u lts in c lu d in g , as
as a minimum, in d iv id u a l sample numbers, te s t temperatures, confining
pressures, and strengths shall be presented.
5.4.3 Mohr's c ir c le s . A Mohr's c i r c l e diagram as discussed in
Sections 1.3.2.2 and 1.3.2.3 o f th is procedure shall be presented
fo r each s u ite of samples at each temperature as appropriate. A
summary tab le of the angle of in te rn a l f r i c t i o n and the unconfined
shear strength should also be presented.
5.4.4 Strength vs. confinement. A graph o f the rela tion ship
between a . and 0 3 , as discussed in Section 1 .3 .2 .4 , shall be
presented f o r each su ite of rocks as appropriate. A summary
tab le of unconfined compressive strengths and re la tio n a l con
stants as defined in Equation 3 sha ll also be presented.
5.4.5 Other. The fo llo w in g other types of analysis or presenta
tio n may be included as appropriate.
5.4.5.1 Strength as a function of temperature.
5.4 .5.3 C orrelatio n of strength w ith other rock properties
such as modulus of deformation or s p e c ific g ra v ity .
previous studies.
B.4-10
5.5 E rror estim ate.
B#
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated with a single
te s t shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe cts of a ll
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s uite of rock samples, the
mean value of compressive strength, range, standard deviation,
and 95% confidence li m i t s fo r the mean shall be calculated as
a minimum. The uncertainty of the sample s u ite shall be compared
with the measurement uncertainty to determine whether measurement
e rro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e la t io n . When appropriate, the means of groups
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L-B.4-1 shall be included in an appendix.

The follo w in g items are the minimum requirements to ensure th a t the
te s t re su lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
t h is section to e s ta b lish Q uality Assurance procedures, but to
id e n tify those points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance
action is required.
6 . 1 Personnel p r e q u a lific a tio n .
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel shall be preq u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6.2 Test inspection.
Quality Assurance personnel shall review the te s t setup, the pro
te s tin g , the completed Form L-B.4-1 shall be reviewed and
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . Quality Assurance
th a t s e ria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the te s t are recorded
on Form L-B.4-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n -o ffs . Quality Assurance shall maintain signed-
o f f copies of L-B.4-1.
1. 4- 11
T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength o f Rock Core
Test Data Sheet - Form L-8,4-1
Project___________________________ Sample_No.______
Date______________________________ Rock Type______
Tested By_________________________ Test Temperature
Equipment Date of
Description S erial No. C alibration
Average Average
Confining Pressure_________ Sketch o f Sample A fte r Failure

Time Required fo r
Failure__________________
Loading Rate_______________
Fa ilure Load_______________
Strength___________________
Remarks:
Test Supervisor________________________________ Date

Q uality Assurance_________________________ Date_
Project E n g i n e e r ______________ Date
Procedure L-B.5
Tensile Strength of Rock Core -
B ra z ilia n Tensile Method
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h is te s t . This te s t determines the s p l i t
tin g te n s ile strength of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen when subjected
to a compressive lin e load applied across a diameter.
1.1.2.1 The re s u lts of the s p l i t t i n g te n s ile strength te s t
may d i f f e r from re s u lts of the d ire c t te n s ile te s t because of
of diffe ren ces in the loading conditions.
1.1 .2.2 The ca lcu la tion s used in th is procedure were
derived fo r is o tr o p ic , homogeneous m aterials. The results
o f t h i s te s t should be considered approximate fo r materials
which are anisotro pic and/or nonhomogeneous.
1.2 General de scriptio n of the te s t .
A rock core sample is cut to length. A continuously increasing
compressive load is applied across a diameter of the sample
to cause te n s ile f a i l u r e across the diameter. S p littin g
te n s ile strength is determined from the peak load.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1 Terms and d e fin itio n s .
1.3.1.1 Load - the to ta l diametral force acting on the sample.
de stru ctiv e fra c tu rin g .
occurs.
1.3.2 Equations.
The s p l i t t i n g te n s ile strength, is calculated:
'^ t "
where:
P = Maximum load sustained by the sample
L = Length of the sample
D = Diameter of the sample
B.5-1
1.4 Reference.
1.4.1 Foundation Sciences In c . , 1981, F ield and In Situ Rock
Mechanics Testing Manual, 0NWI-3I0, O ffice o f Nuclear Waste
Field Tests, 1978, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining Tensile
Strength of Rock M a teria ls" In t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and
Geotech. A b s tr ., 15, No. 3.
1.4.3 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, 1980, Procedure RTH 113-80,
"Standard Method of Test fo r Determining the S p l i t t i n g Strength
of Rock (B ra z ilia n Method)", Rock Testing Handbook, Geotechnical
Laboratory, Waterways Experiment S ta tio n , Vicksburg, Miss.
2.0 P rerequisites
A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , includ ing the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sha ll be form ally prequalifed
under the Quality Assurance procedures established as part of
the ov e ra ll te s tin g program,
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
I f no requirements are state in Section 3.0, the manufacturer's
c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement systems. C alibration
2.3 C r it e r ia f o r sample s e le c tio n .
2.3.1 Project scope. The number and type of rock cores tested
depends p a rtly on the intended a p p lic a tio n of the te s t re s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical cha ra cte riza tio n of the
s ite might require several samples from a v a rie ty of formations,
while a detailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
judgment and experience of project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t is t ic a l requirements. A s u f f ic ie n t number of samples
should be tested to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r
w i l l require more te s ts than a r e la t iv e ly uniform rock to evaluate
the re s u lts with equal c e rta in ty .
B.5-2
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. F o lia tio n , bedding, j o i n t s and
fra c tu re s , and other features can s ig n if ic a n t ly a ffe c t
the te n s ile strength o f the rock. Tests of these features
should be included to estimate t h e i r e ffe c t.
evaluated by te s tin g cores taken at d iffe r e n t o rie n ta tio n s .
strength. The moisture content of the rock core shall be
preserved between the time of recovery and the time of te s tin g ,
as described in GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage of Rock Core
Samples," see Ref. 1.4.1.
2.5 Documentation.
to standard Quality Assurance procedures.
3.0 Equipment and apparatus.

3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame consists of the mechanism fo r applying load
and the control system fo r the load mechanism. The loading
frame shall be constructed to apply a continuously increasing
load to the sample at a constant rate of stress.
3.2 Bearing surfaces.
F la t or curved bearing surfaces may be used. In e ith e r case, a
spherical seat shall be incorporated in the load t r a i n so that
the bearing surface can be rotated and t i l t e d through small
angles in any d ire c tio n .
3.2.1 F la t bearing surfaces. F la t bearing surfaces shall have
a diameter at least as large as the specimen diameter. The
bearing surface shall not depart from a plane by more than 0.0005 in.
(0.013 mm) when new and shall be maintained to w ith in 0.001 in.
(0.025 mm). The bearing surfaces shall be hardened to at least
Rockwel1 HRC 58.
3.2.2 Curved bearing surfaces. Curved bearing surfaces may be
used to reduce the contact stresses. The radius of curvature of
these surfaces shall be designed so that the arc of contact
w ith the specimen w i l l in no case exceed 15°. The surfaces shall
be smooth to w ith in 0.0005 in . (0.013 mm) when new and main
tained to w ith in 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The curved bearing
surfaces shall be hardened to at lea st Rockwell HRC 58.
B.5-3
3.3 Bearing s t r ip s .
Cardboard bearing s t r ip s 0.03 to 0.05 in . (0.76 to 1.27 mm) th ic k
shall be placed between the bearing surfaces and the sample
during te s tin g to reduce stress concentrations.
3.4 Load transducer.
An e le c tro n ic load c e ll is recommended to measure diametral load
on the sample. The c e ll should have an accuracy of at least
_+ 100 lb (jf 45.4 kg), includ ing errors introduced by the e x c ita
tio n and readout system, and a resolution o f at least 50 lb
(22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic tra n s
ducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system is employed,
provided th a t the load measurement requirements above are
s a t is fie d , including the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the hydraulic
ram, etc.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Size. The te s t sample shall be a c ir c u la r disk w ith th ic k -
ness-to-diameter r a t io of 0.5. The diameter o f the specimen shall
be at le a s t 1 0 times greater than the la rg e st mineral grain con
s titu e n t. NX size (2 in . nominal diameter; 51 mm) or larg e r core
is recommended.
4.1.2 Smoothness. The sides of the core shall be smooth to
^ 0.005 in . (+ 0.13 mm). Smoothness shall be measured along fou r
lines p a ra lle T to the axis of the core, at 90° in te r v a ls , two o f
which w i l l be along the diameter to be loaded. The maximum
v a ria tio n shall be recorded as shown on Form L-B.5-1.
4.1.3 Ends. The ends o f the sample shall be cut perpendicular to
the axis o f the core sample to w ith in 0.25. The end roughness
shall not exceed 0.01 in . (0.25 mm). The rocks shall not be
degraded during the machining process. Thermal fra c tu rin g shall
be prevented by cooling w ith an appropriate f l u i d as required.
Generally water is used fo r hard rock, but other types of rock
may require d if f e r e n t f l u i d s , such as saturated brine fo r rock
s a lt or g ly c e rin fo r expansive shales.
4.1.4 Diameter. The diameter o f the te s t sample shall be
measured to the nearest 0.001 in . (0.025 mm) by the average of
three measurements, one of which shall be across the diameter
to be loaded. The measurements shall be recorded as shown on
Form L-B.5-1.
4.1.5 Length. The length of the sample shall be measured
to the nearest 0.01 in . (0.25 mm) by the average of three measure
ments, .one of which sha ll be along the diametral plane to be
loaded. The measurements shall be recorded as shown on Form
L-B.5-1.
B.5-4
4.2 Testing.
4.2.1 Alignment. The desired v e rtic a l o rie n ta tio n of the sample
shall be indicated by marking a diametral lin e on each end of the
sample. These lines shall be used in centering the sample in the
te s tin g machine to ensure proper o rie n ta tio n . The lin e of thrust
of the loading t r a i n and the marked sample diameter shall be
c a r e fu lly aligned.
4.2.2 Loading. The load shall be applied smoothly and
continuously at a constant stress rate so th a t f a ilu r e occurs in
1 to 10 minutes. For NX samples, a rate of approximately 100 to
200 psi (0.69 to 1.38 MPa) te n s ile stress in the sample per
minute is recommended.
4.2.3 F a ilu re . F a ilu re is recognized by the i n i t i a l te n s ile
crack induced in the sample. The load at which t h is occurs is
the f a i l u r e load. Care shall be taken to observe th is load,
as the sample may continue to sustain increasing load fo r a short
time.
4.2.4 Data recording requirements during te s t. The data shown
on Form L-B.5-1 shall be recorded as a minimum fo r th is te s t.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to esta blish the minimum requirements
fo r a complete and usable re port. Further d e ta ils may be added as
appropriate, and the order of items may be changed i f necessary.
A pplication of the te s t re s u lts is beyond the scope of t h is proce
dure, but may be an inte g ra l part of some te s tin g programs. I f so,
an applications section compatible w ith the format described below
should be included.
The introdu ctory section is intended to present the scope and
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the ch a ra cte ristie s of the
material tested.
5.1.1 Scope of the te s tin g program.
the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types or o rie n ta tio n s ,
the t e s t matrix is best presented in a tabular form.
5.1.1.2 Rationale fo r sample selection. The reasons fo r
the number and type of samples tested shall be c le a rly
stated.
in te re s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
the lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of application
shall be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B rie f d e s crip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c
ture and f a b r ic , grain siz e , d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and
m B.5-5
Further d e ta il depends on the Intended a p p lica tio n of the re s u lts ,
but in general i s not required. In variable material or not
several rock types, many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e tailed l i s t i n g of the
equipment a c tu a lly used fo r the t e s t shall be included in the
re port. The name, model number, and basic sp e c ific a tio n s of
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t
s h a l 1 be l i sted i n d e tailed steps.
5.2.3 V aria tions. I f the actual equipment or procedure has
varied from the requirements contained in t h is procedure, each
of the v a r ia tio n upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
the data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations and lim ita tio n s in t h e i r
a p plicatio ns shall be noted and the e ffe c t on the re su lts discussed.
t e s t s itu a tio n conforms to the assumptions contained in the
data reduction equations sha ll be discussed.
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary o f re s u lts . A ta b le of re su lts including the te s t
s u ite s , average te n s ile strength values, ranges and un certa inties
shall be presented.
5.4.2 Ind ividua l t e s t re s u lts . A tab le of individual re s u lts
in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample number, rock types or formations,
o rie n ta tio n s ( i f appropriate) and te n s ile strengths shall be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g types of data analyses may be included
i f appropri ate.
5.4.3.1 C orrelation of te n s ile strength with other rock
p ro p e rtie s , such as compressive strength or s p e c ific g ra v ity .
5.4.3.2 Comparison of te n s ile strength with other rock
type or the re su lts of e a r l i e r studies.
•j
B.5-6
i n te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e rro r. The e r ro r associated w ith a single
te s t shall be evaluated, including the combined e ffe c ts of a l l
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s uite of rock samples, the
mean value of the te n s ile strength, range, standard deviation,
and 95% confidence l i m i t s fo r the mean shall be calculated as
a minimum. The uncertainty of the sample suite shall be compared
with the measurement e rro r to determine whether measurement
e rro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the re su lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r re la tio n . When appropriate, the means of groups
5.6 Appended data.
Each complete te s t Form L-B.5-1 shall be included in an appendix.

The follow ing items are the minimum requirements to ensure that the
te s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
t h is Section to esta b lish Quality Assurance procedures, but to
id e n tify those points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance
action is required.
P rio r to te s tin g , a l l personnel shall be preq u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6 . 2 Test inspection.
Quality Assurance personnel shall review the te s t setup, the pro
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a tio n . A fte r
te s tin g , the completed Form L-B.5-1 shall be reviewed and signed
o f f only i f co rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . Quality Assurance
that s e ria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the te s t are recorded
on Form L-B.5-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n -o ffs . Quality Assurance shall maintain signed-
o f f copies of Form L-8.5-1.
B.5-7
Tensile Strength o f Rock Core -
B ra z ilia n Tensile Method
Project Sample No._

Date Orientation_
Tested By_ Rock Type
Equipment Date o f
Sample Diameter Sample Length
Average Average
Smoothness: O rientation: QO 90^ 180^ 270°

Maximum Deviation:
Loading Rate ___ Sketch o f sample a ft e r f a ilu r e .

Time f o r Failure_
Failure Load
Tensile Strength_
Remarks:
Test Supervisor__ Date_

Q uality Assurance_ Date_
Project Engineer Date
! • Procedure L-C.1
Uniaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation of
Rock Core - Ambient Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h i s t e s t . This te s t determines deforma-
tio n a l properties of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at ambient tem
perature under un iaxial compressive loading. Results obtained
include the modulus of deformation, Poisson's r a t io , and stress-
s tr a in curves.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . The c a lcu la tio n s used in t h is procedure
assume a homogeneous, is o tr o p ic rock sample. The e ffe cts of
anisotropy may be estimated by using s e le c tiv e ly oriented cores
fo r t e s t specimens.
1.2 General d e sc rip tio n of the t e s t .
f l a t . The sample is placed in a loading frame. Load is applied
to the sample and the stress and deformation are measured con
c u rre n tly . Several loading cycles are performed. Modulus of
deformation and Poisson's r a t io are calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1.1 Axial s tr a in - the deformation per u n it length of
the sample p a ra lle l to the long axis of the core.
1.3 .1.2 Diametral s tra in - the deformation per u n it length
across a diameter of the sample.
1.3 .1.3 Load - the to t a l axial force acting on the sample.
1.3.1.4 Stress - force per u n it area.
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The axial s t r a in , e , , is calculated using:
a
M
â ( 1)
where:
= o r ig in a l axial length
A 1 = change in axial length
1.3.2.2 The diametral s tr a in , e ^ , is calculated using:
^d = ^ (2)
0
C.1-1
where:
1 = o r ig in a l diameter
0 ^
A1 = change in diameter.
In the case of measuring the circum fere ntia l s tr a in ,

the circumference is C = it d, and the change in circum
ference is AC = IT d. Consequently, the circum ferential
s tra in is related to diametral s tr a in by:
AC _ Ad
- (T - d"
0 0
so th a t
^c = ^d
(4 )
where C and d are o rig in a l specimen circumference and

diameter, re spective ly.
1.3.2.3 The volumetric s t r a in , £^, is calculated using:
1.3.2.4 The axial stre ss, o , is calculated using:
P
o • T
J (6 )
where:
P = load on the sample
A = cross-sectional area of the sample.
1 .3 . 2 .5 The modulus of deformation, E, is calculated using:
E = I f (7 )
d
where:
da = change in stress
de^ = change in axial s tr a in .
The modulus is the slope of the stre ss -a x ia l s tra in curve.

The change in stress and s tr a in may be evaluated in several
ways. The tangent modulus is the instantaneous slope of
C.1-2
the s tre s s -s tra in curve, as shown on Figure 1.1. The re
Im
covery modulus is the tangent modulus during the unloading
p o rtio n of the pressurization cycle.
The secant modulus is the slope of the curve evaluated
between i n i t i a l conditions and a subsequent state of stress
and s t r a i n , as shown on Figure 1.2.
The average modulus is s im ila r to the secant modulus,
except stress and s tra in are evaluated over an a r b itra ry
p o rtio n of the s tre s s -s tra in curve as shown on Figure 1.3.
1.3 .2 . 6 Poisson's r a t i o , v , is the negative r a tio of
the diametral s t r a in , e to the axial s tr a in , e
Q a
V = - M (8)
ea
In p ra c tic e , because of the n o n lin e a ritie s displayed by

rock a t low stress le v e ls , Poisson's r a tio is calculated
at a given stress level from the slopes of the axial and
diametral s tre s s -s tra in curves:
V = - slope of axial s tre s s -s tra in curve / q»

slope of diametral s tre s s -s tra in curve ' '
1.4 References
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Designation D 3148, "Standard Test
Method f o r E la s tic Moduli of Rock Core Specimens in Uniaxial
Compression," Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 19.
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, In c . , 1981, F ield and In Situ Rock
1.4.3 ISRM Commission on Standardization o f Laboratory and F ield
Compressive Strength and D eform ability of Rock M a teria ls",
I n t . J. Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 16, No. 2.
1.4.4 U.S. Bureau of Mines, 1974, "E la s tic Behavior of Rocks
under Uniaxial Compression", Bureau of Mines Test Procedures
fo r Rocks, Information C irc u la r IC 8628.
2.0 P rerequisites
Technicians and Test Supervisor, shall be formally p requ alified
C.1-3
•I
cr
8cr
FIG. 1.1 STRESS AND STRAIN USED IN CALCUUTiON

OF TANGENT MODULUS.
cr
FIG. 1.2 STRESS AND STRAIN USED IN CALCULATION

OF SECANT MODULUS.
<7 ! A ct
Ae,

OF AVERAGE MODULUS.
•I
C.1-4
& • 2.2 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n .
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus with the p e rfo r
mance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of th is procedure shall
be v e r if ie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0,
the manufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s fo r the equipment shall be
the required level o f performance. Performance v e r if ic a tio n is
systems. C a lib ra tio n and documentation shall be accomplished
according to Standard Quality Assurance procedures.
depend p a r tly on the ultim a te a p p lica tio n of the te s t re s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical cha racte rizatio n of the s it e
might require several samples from a v a rie ty of formations,
while a de ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candi
date re pository rock may require many te s ts from a single f o r
mation. The fin a l te s tin g program w i l l depend heavily on the
technical judgment and experience of project personnel.
evaluation of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly v a r i
able w i l l require more te s ts than r e la t iv e ly uniform rocks to
evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e rta in ty .
as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, etc . can a ffe c t deformational pro
p e rtie s . These should be sampled and tested to provide an
estimate of t h e i r e f f e c t.
2.3.4 Anisotropy. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be evalu
ated by te s tin g cores taken at d iffe r e n t o rie n ta tio n s.
deformational p ro p e rtie s. The moisture content of the rock
core shall be preserved between the time of recovery and time
of te s tin g as described in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and
Storage of Rock Core Samples," see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample shall be f u l l y documented before te stin g according

3.1 Loading frame.
and the control system fo r the load mechanism. The loading
frame shall be constructed to apply load to the sample at e ith e r
a constant s tr a in o r constant stress rate. A s t i f f testin g
machine shall be used.
C.1-5
3.2 Platens.
The diameter of the platens shall be equal to or greater than
the diameter of the sample. Rock materials which are subject to
large deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt and some
shales, sh a ll be tested using platens sized so th a t the la te ra l
deformation does not exceed the platen diameter. The platens
shall be at le a s t 0.625 in . (15.9 mm) th ic k . The surfaces
shall be f l a t to w ith in 0.0002 in . (0.005 mm) and hardened to
at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. * One o f the two platens shall in c o r
porate a spherical seat. This platen shall be placed above the
sample during te s tin g .
3.3 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axial load and the
deformation of the sample.
measure axial Toad on the sample. The c e ll shall have an accur
acy o f at le a s t ^100 lb (45.4 kg ), including errors introduced
by the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a re solutio n of at
le a st 50 lb (22.7 kg). A l t e r n a t iv e ly , a pressure gage or e le c
tr o n ic transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system is
employed, provided th a t the load measurement requirements above
are s a t is f ie d , inc lu d in g the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the hydrau
l i c ram, etc.
3.3.2 Deformation. The deformation transducer shall have a
re s o lu tio n of at le a s t 10 X 10" s tra in and an accuracy of at
lea st +20 X 10" s t r a in , in clud ing errors introduced by e x c i
ta t io n and readout equipment. Transducer sele ction c r i t e r i a
depend p r im a rily on the type of rock and the s tru c tu re w ith in
the sample. Longer gage lengths are recommended f o r coarse
grained or nonhomogeneous samples. In no case shall the gage
length be less than 1 0 times the diameter of the larg est min
eral grain.
3.3.2.1 E le c tric a l resistance s tra in gages shall have a
resistance of no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts
o f s e lf heating. An axial and a circum fere ntia l gage
sha ll be mounted at mid-height of the sample on each end
of a diameter. The two axia l gages shall be connected in
a h a lf Wheatstone bridge con fig u ra tio n to correct fo r
bending. The h a lf Wheatstone bridge con fig u ra tio n shall
be completed by connecting two axial s tra in gages moun
ted on a s im ila r rock sample, to provide temperature com
pensation. This sample shall be placed as near the te s t
sample as p ra c tic a l during te s tin g . The two circumferen
t i a l gages shall be wired in a s im ila r co n fig u ra tio n .
hsRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.3)

'ÂSIM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.1-6
3 .3 .2.2 Dial gages shall be graduated to at lea st 0.0001
in . Two d ia l gages shall be mounted across a diameter of
the sample or p la ten, or three d ia l gages shall be mounted
a t 120° in te r v a ls . I f they are attached to the sample
d i r e c t l y , the points of attachment shall not be w ith in
D/2 o f the sample end, where D is the sample diameter.
3 .3 .2.3 Linear varia ble d i f f e r e n t i a l transducers (LVDTs)
shall be mounted across a diameter or at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls
on the sample or platens using a non-magnetic attachment.
I f they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the points
of attachment shall not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end.
3.3 .2.4 Other types o f deformation transducers may be em
ployed provided they s a tis fy the c r i t e r i a stated in the
above s p e c ific a tio n s .
3.4 Power supplies.
The type of power supply and voltage level w i l l be determined
by the type of deformation transducer used. In a ll cases,
however, the power supply shall be capable of providing
accurate and stable voltage to at lea st j+lOmV.
3.5 Signal conditioning and readout.
These devices may be e ith e r manual-or automatic. Voltmeters
shall be capable of reading to 10” mV. The cumulative e rro r
of the readout equipment and transducers shall meet the re quire
ments of Section 3.3 above.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core s iz e . Rock cores of NX-size (2 in . nominal diameter;
51 mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, in nocase shall the
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t i o . The core-shall be cut to a
length-to-diam eter r a t i o of 2.0 to 3.0. ’
0.01 in . (0.25 mm) over the length o f the sample.
4.1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity. The ends of the sample shall be par-
pendicular to the long axis to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 in .^ ^
(0.25 mm over 51 mm).
pISRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.3)

‘ÂSTM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.1-7
4.1.5 Paral1e11sm. The ends of the^sample shall be p a ra lle l
to each other to w ith in 0.002 i n . ' ' (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness., The ends o f the sample shall be f l a t to w ith -
in 0.001 in . ’ (0.025 mm).
4.1.7 Machining. No capping m aterials or end surface t r e a t
ments other than machining shall be applied to the ends o f the
sample. The -rock shall not be degraded during the machining
process. Thermal fa c to rin g sha ll be prevented by cooling w ith
an appropriate f l u i d as required. Generally water is used fo r
hard rock, but other m aterials may require special f l u i d s , such
as saturated brine fo r s a lt or g ly c e rin fo r slaking mudstones.
at three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of
measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter of the specimen
shall be determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t
angles to each other at the top, m id-height, and base of the
sample, using a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0 . 0 0 1 in .
(0.025 mm). A ll measure ments shall be recorded as shown on
Form L-C.1-1.
4.2 Testing.
platens and sample are aligned w ith the loading axis to w ith
in 0.05 in . (1.27 mm).
4.2.2 I n i t i a l readings. P rio r to taking i n i t i a l readings, the
e le c tro n ic transducers shall be allowed s u f f ic i e n t time to warm
up, and they shall be powered continuously during the te s t.
I n i t i a l readings shall be taken under zero load conditions,
except fo r the weight o f the platens and load t r a i n .
4.2.3 Loading ra te . The axial load shall be applied smoothly
ra te. For hard rock, the loading ra te should produce f a i l u r e
(0.17 MPa) per second, while constant s tra in rates are on the
order of 1 to lOOyE per second. For rocks which e x h ib it s ig n i
fic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as s a lt and some shales, con
stant stress loading rates are generally slower, fo r example in
the range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second; con
stant s tr a in rates w i l l depend on the material type. The same
loading rate shall be used f o r a l l samples in a p a r tic u la r s u ite
of te s ts .
pASlM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)

'ÎSRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.3)
C.1-8
4.2.4 P ressurization cycles. Three load cycles are recommended
f o r general te s tin g . Maximum stress fo r each cycle should be
approximately 15, 30, and 50% o f the estimated unconfined com
pressive strength of the sample, re spective ly. The sample may
be taken to f a i l u r e a f t e r the c y c lic loading.
4.2.5 Measurement in te r v a ls . Stress and s tra in shall be mea
sured at approximately equal stress increments during the
loading and unloading p o rtio n of each cycle. At lea st 10 mea
surements shall be taken over each portion of the load cycle
to generate s u f f ic i e n t data points fo r the s tre s s -s tra in curve.
More frequent readings may be required near and a ft e r fa ilu r e .
4.2.6 Test environment. The temperature of the te s t environ-
ment sh a l1 be constant to w ith in _+3.6°F (+2°C) during the te s t.
4.2.7 Data recording requirements. The exact format of data
recording depends on the data a c q u is itio n system. As a minimum,
however, the information shown on Form L-C.1-1 is required and
the general format of Form L-C.1-1 shall be followed as closely
as p ra c tica b le .
4.3 Corrections to data.
4.3.1 Voltage norm alization. I f e le c tro n ic transducers are
used, output voltages shall be normalized w ith respect to
input voltages at each pressure increment.
4.3.2 Bridge e ff e c ts . I f s tra in gages are used, corrections
shall be made fo r the e ffe c ts of Wheatstone bridge non-linear
response.
4.3.3 Platen e f f e c ts . I f the deformation transducers are
mounted on the loading platens ra th e r than on the sample i t
s e l f , corrections shall be made f o r the e la s tic response of
the platens.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h is section is to es ta b lish the minimum require
ments fo r a complete and usable report. Further d e ta ils may be added
A pplications of the t e s t re su lts are beyond the scope of th is pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l part o f some te s tin g programs. In
t h i s case, an ap plicatio ns sections compatible w ith the format
described below should be included.
5.1 Introductory section of the re p o rt.
The intro d u cto ry section is intended to present the scope and
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the nature of the material
tested.
I* C.1-9
•I
5.1.1.1 Number of samples tested. In a large report co
vering the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types, the
te s t m atrix is best presented in a ta b u la r form.
5.1 .1.2 Rationale f o r sample sele ctio n . The reasons fo r
the number and types o f samples tested shall be c le a rly
stated.
5.1 .1.3 L im ita tio n s of the te s tin g program. The areas
of in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program
and the lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of ap
p lic a t io n shall be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tru c -
tu re and f a b r i c , grain siz e , d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and
weathering o f the samples shall be described as a minimum.
Further d e ta il depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the re s u lts , but
in general i s not required. In varia ble material or fo r several
rock types, many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r pre
sentation is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A de tailed l i s t i n g of the
equipment a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t shall be included in the
report. The name, model number, and basic s p e cific a tio n s o f
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t
shall be lis t e d in de ta ile d steps.
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure has
varied from the requirements contained in th is proced'ire, each
of the v a r ia tio n upon the t e s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
the data sh a ll be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
ap plicatio ns shall be noted and the e ffe c t on the re s u lts d is
cussed.
5.3.2 S ite - s p e c ific influ e n ce s.
5.3.2.1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual l a
boratory te s t conditions conform to the assumptions con
tained in the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
5.3.2.2 Correction fa c to rs . Any factors or methods ap
plied to the data to correct fo r a non-ideal s itu a tio n
sha ll be f u l l y explained.
C.1-10
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary ta b le of re s u lts including te s t
s u ite designations, average modulus of deformation and Poisson's
r a tio values, ranges, and u n c e rta in tie s shall be presented.
5.4.2 Ind ividua l re s u lts . A ta b le o f re su lts fo r i n d i v i
dual te s ts inclu d in g , as a minimum, sample number, rock type,
modulus of deformation, and Poisson's r a tio shall be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The follo w in g other types of analyses and presen
ta tio n s may be included as appropriate.
5.4.3.1 Modulus and Poisson's r a tio as a function of
s tre s s , as well as no n-lin e a r behavior in general.
5.4 .3.2 Volumetric s tr a in vs. stress.
5 .4 .3 .4 P o s t-fa ilu re behavior.
5 .4 .3 .5 C orrelatio n of re s u lts with other rock properties,
such as s p e c ific g ra v ity or dynamic modulus of deformation.
5.4 .3.6 Comparison o f re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated with a single
te s t shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts of
a l l transducers, power supplies, readout devices, etc.
5.5.2 Sample V a r i a b i l i t y . For each suite of rock samples, the
mean value of the modulus o f deformation and Poisson's r a t io ,
range, standard deviation and 95% confidence l i m i t fo r the mean
shall be calculated as a minimum. The uncertainty o f the sample
set shall be compared w ith the measurement uncertainty to deter
mine whether measurement e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the
dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e la tio n . When appropriate, the means of groups
between groups is s ig n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le ve l.
5.6 Appended Data.
The follo w in g sh a ll be included as a minimum in an appendix.
5.6.1 Test data. A completed data Form L-C.1-1 shall be in c lu
ded fo r each te s t .
c.i-n
5.6.2 S tre s s -s tra in curves. A s tre s s -s tra in curve shall be •fi
Included f o r each te s t .
6.0 Q uality Assurance.

t e s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q uality Assurance procedures, but to iden
t i f y those points during the te s t at which Q uality Assurance action
i s required.
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel shall be p re q u a lifie d as de
6.2 Test insp e ctio n .
Q uality Assurance personnel sha ll review the te s t setup, the
procedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . A fte r
te s tin g , the completed Form L-C.1-1 shall be reviewed and
shall maintain complete c a lib r a tio n records and c e r t if ic a t e s .
th a t seria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the te s t are re
corded on Fonn L-C.1-1.
o f f copies of L-C.1-1.
C.H 2
Pg. 1
Uniaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation o f Rock Core -

Ambient Temperature
Test Data Sheet - Form L-C.1-1
Proj ect_ Sample No.______

Date Test Temperature_
Tested By_ Loading Rate____
Rock Type

Description Serial No. C alib ra tio n
Average Average
Loading Rate
Load Axial Diametral

Readi ng S train Reading S train Reading
Form L-C.1-1
Pg. 2

Readi ng S train Reading S tra in Reading
Test S u p e rv is o r__________________________________ Date

Q ua lity Assurance__________________;_______________ Date
P roject Engineer__________________________________ Date_
Procedure L-C.2
Uniaxial Compressive Modulus of Deformation of
Rock Core - Elevated Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h i s te s t. This te s t determines deformational
c h a ra c te ris tic s of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at elevated
temperature under uniaxial compressive loading. Results obtained
include the modulus of deformation, Poisson's r a t io , and stress-
s tra in curves.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . The c a lcu la tio n s used in th is procedure
assume a homogeneous, is o tr o p ic rock sample. The e ffe c ts of
anisotropy may be estimated by using s e le c tiv e ly oriented cores
fo r te s t specimens.
1.2 General d e scriptio n of the te s t.
f l a t . The sample is placed in a loading frame, and heated to the
specified temperature. Load is applied to the sample, and load
and deformation of the sample are measured concurrently. Several
loading cycles are performed. Modulus of deformation and Poisson's
r a tio are calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1.1 Axial s tr a in - the deformation per u n it length
o f the sample p a ra lle l to the long axis o f the core.
1.3.1.2 Diametral s tra in - the deformation per u n it length
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The axial s t r a i n ^ e^, is calculated using:
ea = "t ; (1 )
0
where:
1q =
1 o r ig in a l axial length
(
Al = change in axial length.
C.2-1
1.3.2.2 The diametral s t r a in , is calculated using:
where:
d^ = o r ig in a l diameter
0 ^
Ad = change in diameter.
In the case o f measuring the circu m fe re n tia l s tr a in , c ^ ,

the circumference is C = ir d , and the change in circumference
i s C =TTAd. Consequently, the c ircum fere ntia l s tra in is
re lated to diametral s tra in by:
AC Ad
^c " -E" " d"
0 0
so th a t
where C and d are o rig in a l specimen circumference and d ia

meter, re s p e c tiv e ly .
1.3.2.3 The volumetric s t r a in , e ^ , is calcualted by using:
% =% = (5)
1.3 .2.4 The axial stre ss , a , is calculated as:
a • J (6 )
where:
1.3.2.5 The modulus of deformation, E, is calculated using:
E =3 ^ (7)
where:
da = change i n stress
dCg = change in axial s tr a in .
C.2-2
The modulus is the slope of the s tre s s -s tra in curve.
The change in stress and s tra in may be evaluated in several
the s tre s s -s tra in curve, as shown on Figure 1.1. The
recovery modulus is the tangent modulus during the unloading
p o rtio n of the pressuriza tion cycle.
The secant modulus is the slope of the curve evaluated between
i n i t i a l conditions and a subsequent state of stress and
s tr a in as shown on Figure 1.2.
The average modulus is s im ila r to the secant modulus, except
stress and s tr a in are evaluated over an a r b itra ry portion of
the s tre s s -s tra in curve as shown on Figure 1.3.
1.3.2.6 Poisson's r a t i o , u , is the negative r a tio of the
diametral s t r a in , e^, to the axial s tr a in ,
U = ( 8)
ea
In p ra c tic e , because of the n o n -lin e a ritie s displayed by
rock a t low stress le v e ls , Poisson's r a tio is calculated
at a given stress level from the slopes o f the axial and
slope o f axial s tre s s -s tra in curve (9)

y = Slope of diametral s t r e s s - s t r a in curve
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978,, Test Designation D 3148, "Standard Test
Method f o r E la s tic Moduli of Rock Core Specimens in Uniaxial
Compression." Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 19.
1.4.2 ISRM, 1979, Commission on Standardization of Laboratory
and F ie ld Tests, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Uniaxial
Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y o f Rock M a te ria ls ,"
In t . J. Rock Mech. min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 16, No. 2.
1.4.3 U.S. Bureau of Mines, 1974, "E la s tic Behavior Under
Uniaxial Compression," Bureau of Mines Test Procedures fo r
Rocks, Information C irc u la r IC 8628.
2.0 Prerequisites
A ll personnel involved in performing the te s t , including the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sha ll be formally p requ alified
C.2-3
8cr
FIG. 1.1 STRESS AND STRAIN USED IN GALCUUTION

OF TANGENT MODULUS.
(T

OF SECANT MODULUS.
cr A<r

OF AVERAGE MODULUS.
C.2-4
I t 2.2 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n .
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of th is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment shall be the required level
of performance. Performance v e r if ic a t io n is generally done by
c a lib r a tin g the equipment and measurement systems. C a libration
2.3 C r i t e r i a f o r sample s e le ction.
depend p a r tly on the u ltim a te a p p lic a tio n o f the te s t re su lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical characterization of the s ite
a de tailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate reposi
to ry rock may require many te s ts from a single formation. The
f in a l te s tin g program w i l l depend heavily on the technical
judgment and experience of p ro je c t personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number of samples tested
must be s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t is t ic a l basis
f o r evaluation of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly
v ariable w i l l require more te s ts than r e la t iv e ly uniform rocks
to evaluate the re su lts w ith equal c e rta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass,
such as j o i n t s , in c lu sio n s , voids, etc. can s ig n if ic a n tly influence
the deformational properties of the rock. These should be
sampled and tested to provide an estimate of t h e ir e ffe c t.
evaluated by te s tin g cores taken at d if f e r e n t o rie n ta tio n s.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample sha ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to

3.1 Loading frame.
and the control system fo r the load mechanism. The loading frame
shall be constructed to apply a continuously increasing load
to the sample at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress
rate. A s t i f f te s tin g machine shall be used.
3.2 Platens.
The diameter o f the platens shall be equal to or greater than
the diameter of the sample. Rock materials which are subject
to large deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such as s a lt and some
shales, sh a ll be tested using platens sized so that the la te ra l
deformation does not exceed the platen diameter. The platens
C.2-5
shall be at le a s t 0.625 in . (15.9 mm) th ic k . The surfaces shall
be f l a t to withinÔ.GOOZ in . (0.005 mm) and hardened to at le a s t
Rockwell HRC 58 ’ . One of the two platens shall incorporate a
spherical seat. This platen shall be placed above the sample
during te s tin g .
3.3 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axia l load, the d e fo r
mation, and the temperature o f the sample.
3.3.1 Axial load. An e le c tro n ic load c e ll is recommended
to measure axial load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an
accuracy o f at le a s t 100 lb (45.4 kg), in clud ing errors i n t r o
duced by the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a re solutio n of
at le a s t 50 lb (22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or
e le c tro n ic transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system
is employed, provided th a t the load measurement requirements
above are s a t is f ie d , inc lu d in g the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the
hydraulic ram, etc.
3.3.2 Deformation. The deformation transducers sha ll have
a re s o lu tio n of at le a s t 1 0 x 1 0 ” s tra in and an accuracy of
a t le a s t + 2 0 x 1 0 “ s t r a in , in clud ing errors introduced by
e x c ita tio n and readout equipment. Transducer s ele ction c r i t e r i a
depend p r im a r ily on the type o f rock and the s tru c tu re w ith in
length be less than 1 0 times the diameter of the la rg e s t mineral
grain.
3.3 .2.1 E le c tric a l resistance s tra in gages shall have a
resistance of no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts of
s e lf heating. An axial and a c irc u m fe re n tia l gage shall be
mounted a t mid-height of tLe sample on each end o f a
diameter. The two axial gages shall be connected in a
h a lf Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n to correct fo r bending.
The two circu m fe re n tia l gages shall be wired in a s im ila r
c o n fig u ra tio n . Each h a lf Wheatstone bridge con figuration
sha ll be completed w ith two precision re s is to rs having
a temperature c o e ffic ie n t no greater than 1 x 10” ppm/°C.
3 .3 .2 .2 Dial gages shall be graduated to at le a s t 0.0001 in.
(0.0025 mm). They sha ll be mounted on the platens outside
of the heater u n it. Two d ia l gages sha ll be mounted across
a diameter, or three d ia l gages shall be mounted at 1 2 0 °
i n te rva ls .
3 .3 .2 .3 Linear varia ble d i f f e r e n t i a l transformers (LVDT s)
sha ll be mounted across a diameter or at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls on
the sample or platens using a non-magnetic attachment.
JlSRM, 1979, (See Ref. 1.4.2)

‘ÂSTM, 1978, (See Ref. 1.4.1)
C.2-6
I f they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the points
o f attachment sha ll not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end,
where D is the sample diameter.
3 .3 .2 .4 Other types of deformation transducers may be
employed provided they s a tis fy the c r i t e r i a stated in the
above s p e c ific a tio n s .
temperature. Special Lim its o f E rror thermocouples or platinum
resistance thermometers (RTDs) are recommended. The temper
ature transducer shall be accurate to at lea st + 0.9°F _(+ 0.5°C)
w ith a re so lu tio n of at least 0.18°F ( 0 . 1°C). Temperature shall
be measured a t three lo c a tio n s , w ith one sensor near the top,
one at m id-height, and one near the bottom o f the sample.
3.4 Power supplies.
The type o f power supply and voltage level w i l l be determined
by the type o f deformation transducer used. In a l l cases,
however, the power supply shall be capable of providing voltage
accurate and stable to at lea st ^ lOmV.
3.5 Signal con dition ing and readout.
These devices may be e ith e r manual_or automatic. Voltmeters
shall be capable of reading to 10" mV. The cumulative e rro r of
the readout equipment and transducers shall meet the requirements
of Section 3.3 above.
3.6 Heating u n it.
The heating u n it shall be capable of maintaining a uniform
u n it sha ll incorporate controls so th a t the sample may be heated
at a rate no greater than 3.6 °F (2°C) per minute. The mean
temperature of the sample shall vary by no more than 3.6°F (2®C)
during the te s t.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core size. Rock cores of NX size (2 in . nominal diameter;
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t io . The core shall be cut to a
length-to-diam eter r a t io of 2.0 to 3.0. ’
0 . 0 1 in . over the length of the sample.
iiSRM, i y / 9 , (See Ref. 1.4.2)

ÂSTM, 1978, (See Ref. 1.4.1)
C.2-7
4.1.4 P erp end icularity. The ends o f the sample shall be/Oer-
pendicular to the long axis to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 i n . ' '
(0.25 mm over 51 mm).
4.1.5 P a ra lle lis m . The ends of the sample shall be p a ra lle l
to each other to w ith in 0.002 i n . (0. 05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness. The ends of the sample sha ll be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 i n . ^ ‘ ^ (0.025 mm).
other than machining sh a ll be applied to the ends of the sample.
The rock sh a ll not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal fr a c tu r in g s h a ll be prevented by cooling w ith an
appropriate f l u i d as required. Generally water is used f o r hard
rock, but other m aterials may require special f l u i d s , such as
saturated brine fo r s a lt or g ly c e rin fo r slaking mudstones.
at three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable o f reading
determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t angles
to each other at the top, m id-height, and base of the sample,
using a c a lip e r capable o f measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
A ll measurements sha ll be recorded as shown on Form L-C.2-1.
4.2 Testing.
4.2.1 Alignment. The apparatus sha ll be assembled so th a t the
0.05 in .
4.2.2 Heating rate. The sample sh a ll be heated to the te s t
temperature at a rate not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute to
4.2.3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The te s t sample shall be considered
to have attained thermal e q u ilib riu m when the deformation tra n s
ducer output is stable f o r at le a s t three readings taken over a
period o f no less than 30 minutes. S t a b i l i t y is defined as a
constant reading showing only the e ffe c ts o f normal instrument
and heater u n it flu c tu a tio n s . P rio r to taking these readings,
the e le c tro n ic transducers shall be allowed s u f f ic ie n t time to
warm up, and they shall be powered continuously during the te s t .
4.2.4 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l readings shall be taken under
zero load con dition s, except fo r the weight of the platens and
load t r a i n .
4.2.5 Loading ra te. The axial load shall be applied smoothly
rate. For hard rock the loading ra te should produce f a i l u r e
(0.17 MPa) per second, while constant s tra in rates are generally
hsRM, 1979, (See Ref. 1.4.2)

ÂSTM, 1978, (See Ref. 1.4.1)
C.2-8
on the order of 1 to 100ye per second. For rocks which e x h ib it
s ig n if ic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as s a lt and some shales,
constant stress loading rates are generally slower, f o r example
in the range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second; con
loading ra te shall be used fo r a l l samples in a p a rtic u la r suite
of te s ts .
4.2.6 Pressurization cycles. Three axial load cycles are
recommended Tor general te s tin g . Maximum stress fo r each cycle
should be approximately 15, 30, and 50%, re spective ly, of the
estimated unconfined compressive strength of the sample. The
sample may be taken to f a i l u r e a f t e r the c y c lic loading.
4.2.7 Measurement in te r v a ls . Stress and s tra in shall be
measured at approximately equal stress increments during the
loading and unloading portions o f each cycle. At least 10
measurements shall be taken over each portion of the load cycle
to generate s u f f ic i e n t data points fo r the s tre s s -s tra in curve.
More frequent readings may be required near and a ft e r f a ilu r e .
4.2.8 Test environment. The temperature of the te s t environment
external to the heater u n it shall be constant to w ith in 3.6°F (2°C)
during the te s t .
however, the inform ation shown on Form L-C.2-1 is required and
the general format o f Form L-C.2-1 shall be followed as closely
as p ra c tic a b le .
4.3.1 Voltage norm alization. I f e le c tro n ic transducers are used,
output voltages shall be normalized with respect to input voltages
at each pressure increment.
4.3.2 Bridge e ffe c ts . I f s tra in gages are used, corrections
shall be made fo r the e ffe c ts of Wheatstone bridge nonlinear
response.
4.3.3 Platen e ffe c ts . I f the deformation transducers are mounted
on the loading platen ra ther than the sample i t s e l f , corrections
shall be made fo r the e la s tic response of the platens.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e sta blish minimum requirements
fo r a complete and usable re port. Further d e ta ils may be added as
appropriate, and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary.
Applications of the te s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of th is pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l part of some te s tin g programs. In
t h i s case, an ap plicatio ns section compatible with the format
described below should be included.
C.2-9
5.1 Introductory section o f the report.
The Introd uctory section is Intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the te s tin g program, and the nature o f the material
tested.
5.1 .1.1 Number o f samples tested. In a large report
covering the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types or at
several temperatures, the t e s t m atrix is best presented
5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample sele ction. The reasons fo r
stated.
5.1 .1.3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas
of in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program
and the lim it a t io n s of the data w ith in the areas of a p p li
cation sha ll be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c
tu re and f a b r i c , grain size, d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and
Further d e ta il depends on the a p p lic a tio n of the re s u lts , but
in general i s not required. In varia b le material or fo r several
rock types, many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presen
ta t io n is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e tailed l i s t i n g o f the
equipment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t shall be included in the
re port. The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s of
each major piece sha ll be lis t e d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t shall
be lis t e d in de ta ile d steps.
5.2.3 V aria tio n s. I f the actual equipment or procedure has
of the v a r ia tio n upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
the data s h a l1 be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
ap plica tio n s shall be noted and the e ffe c t on the re s u lts d is
cussed.
C.2-10
5«3.2 S ite - s p e c ific influences.
to ry t e s t conditions conform to the assumptions contained
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary ta b le of re s u lts including te s t suite
designations, temperatures, average modulus of deformation and
Poisson's r a t io values, ranges, and un c e rta in tie s shall be
presented.
5.4.2 Individual re s u lts . A ta b le of re s u lts fo r individual
te s ts in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample number, rock type, te s t
temperature, modulus of deformation, and Poisson's r a tio shall
be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The follo w in g types o f analyses and presentations
may be included as appropriate.
5.4.3.1 The v a r ia tio n of modulus o f deformation and Poisson's
r a tio w ith temperature.
5.4.3.2 Modulus and Poisson's r a t io as a function of stress
le v e l. Non-linear behavior may also be discussed.
5.4.3.3 Volumetric s tra in vs. stress at temperature.
5.4 .3.4 P o s t-fa ilu re behavior.
5.4 .3.5 Histogram o f re s u lts .
5.4 .3.5 C orrelation of re s u lts w ith other rock properties,
such as s p e c ific g r a v ity , dynamic modulus of deformation, or
ambient temperature modulus of deformation.
previous studies.
5.5 E rror estimate.
The re s u lts shall be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e rro r. The e rro r associated with a single
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite of rock samples,
the mean value of the modulus of deformation and Poisson's
r a t io range, standard deviation and 95% confidence l im it s fo r the
mean shall be calculated as a minimum. The uncertainty of the
C.2-11
sample set sha ll be compared w ith the measurement uncertainty to
determine whether measurement e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y i s the
dominant fa c t o r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r re la tio n . When appropriate, the means of groups
shall be compared to determine i f the observed diffe ren ce between
groups i s s ig n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
The fo llo w in g sh a ll be included as a minimum in an appendix.
5.6.1 Test data. A completed data Form L-C.2-1 fo r each te s t
shall be included.
5.6.2 S tre s s -s tra in curves. A s tre s s -s tra in curve fo r each te s t
shall be included.

t e s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t
o f th is section to e sta blish Q uality Assurance procedures, but to
i d e n t if y those points during the te s t at which Q uality Assurance action
i s required.
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel sh a ll be p re q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
Q uality Assurance personnel sha ll review the t e s t setup, the pro
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t i o n . A fte r te s tin g ,
the completed Form L-C 2-1 shall be reviewed and signed o f f only
i f c o rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t i o n . Quality Assurance
th a t s e ria l numbers of a l l equipment used in the t e s t are recorded
on Form L-C.2-1.
6.3.3 Test sign o ffs . Q uality Assurance shall maintain sig n e d -o ff
copies of Form L-C.2-1.
C.2-12
Pg.i
Uniaxial Compressive Modulus o f Deformation o f Rock Core -

'Elevated Temperature
Project_ Sample No.______

Date Test Temperature_
Tested By_ Loading Rate____
Rock Type_

Description Serial No. C alib ra tio n
Average Average
Axial Diametral
Load Reading S tra in Reading S train Reading
! •
Form L-C.2-1
Pg. 2
Axial Diametral
Load Reading S train Reading S tra in Reading
Test Supervisor________________________________
D u a lity Assurance
P roject E n g i n e r _____________________ D
Date____________________
Date =z=z:
a t e ____________________
n
t o Procedure L-C.3
T r ia x ia l Compressive Modulus o f Deformation of Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of th is t e s t . This te s t determines deformational
c h a ra c te ris tie s of a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at ambient tem
perature under t r i a x i a l compressive loading. Results obtained
include the modulus of deformation, Poisson's r a t i o , and stress
s tra in curves.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . The c a lc u la tio n s used in th is procedure assume
a homogeneous, is o tr o p ic rock sample. The e ffe c ts of anisotropy may
be estimated by using s e le c tiv e ly oriented cores fo r te s t specimens.
1.2 General d e scriptio n o f the t e s t .
The sample i s enclosed in a f l e x i b le impermeable membrane and
placed in a confining chamber. The sample is loaded a x ia lly and
the confining chamber is pressurized to provide la te ra l load.
When the desired la te r a l load is achieved, i t is held constant.
Axial load continues to increase, and load and deformation of the
sample are measured concurrently. Several loading cycles are
performed. Modulus of deformation and Poisson's r a tio are calculated.
1.3 Data Reduction.
1 . 3 . 1.1 Axial s tra in - the deformation per u n it length of
1.3.1.2 Diametral s tr a in - the deformation per u n it length
across a diameter o f the sample.
. .
1 3 1 . 3 Load - the to t a l axial force acting on the sample.
1. 3. 1 . 4 Stress - force per u n it area.
.
1 3.2 Equations.
1 . 3 . 2.1 The axia l s t r a in , e , , is calculated using:
a
a (1 )
0
where:
1 q = o r ig in a l axial length
Al = change in axial length.
C.3-1
1.3.2.2 The diametral s t r a in , e i s calculated using:
Ad
T ( 2)
0
where:
dg = o r ig in a l diameter
In the case of measuring the c ircum fere ntia l s t r a in , ,

the circumference is C = ird, and the change in circum
ference is AC = uAd. Consequently, the c ircum fere ntia l
s tr a in is related to diametral s tra in by
AC _ Ad / o\
“ C-
0
- -37
0
so th a t
£c =
where C^ and d^ are o r ig in a l specimen circumference and

diameter, re s p e ctive ly .
1.3 .2.3 The volumetric s t r a in , e is calculated using:
S = ^ a 2 ^d
1.3.2.4 The axial stre ss , o , is calculated using:
<7 = (6)
where:
A = cross-sectional area o f the sample.
1.3.2.5 The modulus o f deformation, E, is calculated using:
E = ^ (7)
d
where:
da = change in stress
de g = change in axial s tr a in .
C.3-2
The modulus is the slope o f the stre ss-axia l s tra in curve.
The change in stress and s tra in may be evaluated in several
the s tre s s -s tra in curve, as shown on Figure 1.1. The re
covery modulus is the tangent modulus during the unloading
p o rtion of the pressurization cycle.
and s t r a in , as shown on Figure 1.2.
The average modulus is s im ila r to the secant modulus,
except stress and s tra in are evaluated over an a r b itra ry
po rtion of the s tre s s -s tra in curve as shown on Figure 1.3.
1.3.2 . 6 Poisson's r a t i o , u , is the negative r a tio of the
diametral s t r a in , e^, to the axial s tr a in , e
y = - — (8)
ea

rock a t low stress le v e ls , Poisson's r a tio is calculated at
a given stress level from the slopes of the axial and
_ slope o f axial s tre s s -s tra in curve

slope of diametral s tre s s -s tra in curve (9)
1.4 References
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Desinnation 02664, "Standard Test Method
fo r T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core Specimens
without Pore Pressure Measurements." Annual Book of ASTM Standards,
Part 19.
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, In c . , 1981, F ield and In Situ Rock
Mechanics Testing Manual, ONWI-310, O ffice of Nuclear Waste
Is o la tio n , BattelTe Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.3 ISRM Commission on Standardization of Laboratory and Field
Tests, 1978, "Suggested Method fo r Determining the Strength of
Rock M aterials in T ria x ia l Compression." In t. J. of Rock Mech.
Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 15, No. 2.
1.4.4 ISRM, 1979, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Uniaxial
Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y of Rock M a teria ls",
In t. J. of Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 16, No. 2.
2.0 Prerequisites
2 . 1 Personnel p r e q u a lific a tio n .
Technicians and Test Supervisor, shall be form ally prequalified
C.3-3
•a
(T
8cr

OF TANGENT MODULUS.
cr

OF SECANT MODULUS.
a 1A ct
Ae,
•I
OF AVERAGE MODULUS.
C.3-4
the ove rall te s tin g program.
2.2 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n .
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment shall be the required level of
performance. Performance v e r if ic a t io n is generally done by c a l i
brating the equipment and measurement systems. C alibration and
documentation shall be accomplished according to standard Quality
2.3 C r it e r ia fo r sample s e le ctio n .
depend p a r tly on the intended a p p lic a tio n of the te s t re su lts.
might require several samples from a v a rie ty o f formations,
while a d e tailed thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
w i l l require more te s ts than r e la t iv e ly uniform rocks, in order
to evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e rta in ty .
as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e tc . can s ig n if ic a n t ly influence
sampled and tested to provide an estimate of t h e ir e ffe c t.
deformational prop e rtie s. The moisture content of the rock core
shall be preserved between the time of recovery and te s tin g as
described in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage of Rock
Core Samples," see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.

3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame consists of the mechanism fo r applying axial
load to the sample, the reaction frame containing the load mechan
ism and t r i a x i a l c e l l , and the control system fo r the load
! • mechanism. The loading frame shall be constructed to apply a
C.3-5
continuously increasing load to the sample at e ith e r a constant •I
s tra in or constant stress ra te . A s t i f f te s tin g machine shall
be used.
The confining chamber consists o f a hollow c y lin d e r and end caps
to contain the confining f l u i d , platens to support the sample,
and a f l e x i b le impermeable membrane to cover the sample during
te s tin g .
3.2.1 C ylinder and end caps. The c e ll design sha ll be such th a t
changes in confining pressure do not d i r e c t l y cause changes in
axial load and vice versa.
3.2.2 Platens. The diameter o f the platens sha ll be equal to
or greater than the diameter of the sample. Rock materials
which are subject to large deformations p r io r to f a i l u r e , such
as s a lt and some shales, sh a ll be tested using platens sized
so th a t the la te ra l expansion of the sample does not exceed
the platen diameter. The platens shall be at le a st 0.625 in .
(15.9 mm) th ic k . The surfaces sha ll be f l a t to w ith in 0.0002 in .
(0.005 mm) and hardened to at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One
of the two platen shall incorporate a spherical seat. This
platen sh a ll be placed above the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.3 F le x ib le , impermeable membrane. This membrane encloses the
rock sample and prevents the confining f l u i d from penetrating
i t . Generally, a sleeve o f natural or syn th e tic rubber or p la s tic
polymer i s used. Copper or lead jackets are sometimes used.
The membrane shall be in e r t r e la tiv e to the con fining f l u i d , and
shall cover small pores in the sample w ithout rupturing when con
fin in g pressure is applied. P la s tic or s ilic o n e rubber coatings
may be applied d i r e c t l y to the sample, providing these materials
do not penetrate and strengthen the sample. The ends o f the sample
shall not be coated, and care must be taken to form an e ffe c tiv e
seal where the platen and sample meet. Membranes formed by coatings
shall be subject to the same performance requirements as e la s tic
sleeve membranes. M aterials re q u irin g a heat cure shall not be used.
The confining pressure system consists o f the pressurizing
f l u i d and the means of applying pressure. The f l u i d is generally
hydraulic o il or water, but in e r t gas may also be used. The
pressurization system sha ll be capable o f maintaining the confining
pressure constant to w ith in _+l% throughout the te s t.
3.4 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axial load, the con
fin in g pressure, and the deformation of the sample.
hsRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.4) '

ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.3-6
! • 3.4.1 Axial load. An e le c tro n ic load c e ll Is recommended to
measure axial load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an accuracy
of at le a st hhIOO lb (jf45.4 kg), includ ing errors introduced by the
e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a resolution of at least 50 lb
(22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or e le c to rn ic tra n s
ducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system is employed, pro
vided th a t the load measurement requirements above are s a tis fie d ,
including the e ffe c ts o f f r i c t i o n in the hydraulic ram, etc.
3.4.2 Confining pressure. The con fining pressure shall be
measured w ith a hydraulic pressure gage or e le c tro n ic transducer
having an accuracy o f at lea st + 1 % o f the confining pressure,
including errors due to readout equipment, and a resolution of
a t le a s t 0.5% o f the confining pressure.
3.4.3 Deformation. The deformation transducers shall have a
re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t 1 0 x 1 0 " s tra in and an accuracy of at
le a s t - 2 0 x 1 0 " s t r a in , includ ing errors introduced by e x c ita tio n
and readout equipment. Transducer selection c r i t e r i a depend
p rim a rily on the type o f rock and the stru c tu re w ith in the sample.
Longer gage lengths are recommended f o r coarse-grained or non
homogeneous samples. In no case shall the gage length be less
than 1 0 times the diameter o f the largest mineral grain.
resistance of no less than 350 ohms to avoid the effe c ts
o f s e lf heating. An axial and a circum ferential gage
shall be mounted at mid-height of the sample on each end
o f a diameter. The two axial gages shall be connected in
a h a lf Wheatstone bridge con figuration to correct fo r
bending. The two circum fere ntia l gages shall be wired in
a s im ila r c o n fig u ra tio n . Each h a lf Wheatstone bridge con
fig u r a tio n shall be completed w ith two precision re sistors
having a temperature c o e ffic ie n t no greater than 1 x 1 0 " ppm/‘
3.4 .3.2 Dial gages shall be graduated to at least 0.0001 in .
Dial gages shall be mounted on the platens, using two dia l
gages mounted across a diameter or three dia l gages mounted
at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls .
3.4 .3.3 Linear varia ble d i f f e r e n t i a l transducers (LVDTs)
shall be mounted across a diameter or at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls on
the sample or platens using a non-magnetic attachment. I f
they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the points of attach
ment shall not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end, where D is
the sample diameter.
3 .4 .3.4 Radial deformation may be measured with a volumetric
apparatus (d ila to m e te r). This device shall have a resolution
of at le a s t 0.002 in . (32.8 mm ) and an accuracy of at least
0.5% o f the radial s tra in o f the sample.
3.4.3.5 Other types of deformation transducers, such as the
Schuler gage, may be employed provided they s a tis fy the
c r i t e r i a stated in the above s p e c ific a tio n s .
C.3-7
3.5 Power supplies.
The type of power supply and voltage level w i l l be determined
by the type of deformation transducer used. In a l l cases, however,
the power supply sha ll ê capableo f providing voltage accurate
and stable to at le a s t -lOmV.
3.6 Signal c on dition ing and readout.
These devices may be e ith e r manuaK®^ automatic. Voltmeters
shall be capable of reading to 10" mV. The cumulative e rro r
of the readout equipment and transducers shall meet the re q u ire
ments of Section 3.4 above.
4.0 Procedure
5l mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, in no case shall the
core diameter be less than 1 0 times the size of the larg est
mineral grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t i o . .Cores shall be cut to a length-
to -d i ameter r a t io o f 2.0 to 3.0. ’
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core shall be r e la t iv e ly smooth,
free of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s , and s tr a ig h t to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in .
(0.25 mm) over the length of the sample.
4.1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity. The ends o f the sample shallp^je perpendi
c ula r to the long axis to w ith in 0.01 in . over 2 in .^ ' (0.25 mm
over 51 mm).
4.1.5 P a ra lle iis m . The ends of^the sample shall be p a ra lle l to
each other to w ith in 0.002 i n . ' ' (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatnqss. The ends o f the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 in.-^’ *^ (0.025 mm).
4.1.7 Machining. No capping materials or endsurface treatments
The rock sha ll not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal fr a c tu r in g shall be prevented by cooling with an appropriate
f l u i d as required. Generally water is used fo r hard rock but
other m aterials may require special f l u i d s , such as saturated
brine f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin fo r slaking mudstones.
4.1.8 Voids. Large voids in the sides o f the sample, such as
v esicles, may be f i l l e d v/ith p a r a ff in , p la s tic or s im ila r material
to provide support f o r the f l e x i b le membrane. Such f i l l i n g
material sha ll not penetrate the rock and shall have an e la s tic
modulus no greater than 1 0 % of the in ta c t rock modulus.
at three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of
hsRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.4)

ÂSTM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.3-8
shall be determined by averaging two diameters measured at rig h t
angles to each other at the top, mid-height, and the base of the
sample, using a c a lip e r capable o f measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
A ll measurements shall be recorded as shown on Form L-C.3-1.
4.2 Testing.
platen and sample are aligned w ith the loading axis to w ith in
0.05 in . (1.25 mm).
the axial load and confining pressure shall be increased con
c u rre n tly a t rates such th a t the axial stress in the sample is
maintained equal to the confining pressure.
4.2.3 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l reading shall be taken when the
axial stress is equal to the specified confining pressure and
when transducer output is stable. P rio r to taking i n i t i a l
readings, the e le c tro n ic transducers shall be allowed s u ff ic ie n t
time to warm up, and they shall be powered continuously during
the te s t .
4.2.4 Loading ra te . The axial load shall be applied smoothly
and continuously a t e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress
ra te. For hard rock, ^he loading rate should produce f a ilu r e
w ith in 5 to 15 minutes ; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is
25 psi (0.17 MPa) per second, while constant s tra in rates are
generally on the order of 1 to lOOye per second. For rocks
which e x h ib it s ig n if ic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as s a lt and
some shales, constant stress loading rates are generally slower,
f o r example in the range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per
second; constant s tr a in rates w i l l depend on the material type.
The same loading rates shall be used fo r a l l samples in a par
t i c u l a r s u ite of te s ts .
4.2.5 P ressurization cycles. Three axial load cycles are recom
mended f o r general te s tin g . Maximum stress fo r each cycle
should be approximately 15, 30, and 50% o f the estimated uncon
fined compressive strength of the sample, respectively. The
sample may be taken to f a i l u r e a f t e r the c y c lic loading.
4.2.6 Measurement in te r v a ls . Stress and s tra in shall be measured
at appoximately equal stress increments during the loading and
unloading p o rtio n of each cycle. At lea st 10 measurements shall
be taken over each po rtion of the load cycle to generate s u f f ic ie n t
data points fo r the s tr e s s -s tra in curve. More frequent readings
may be required near and a ft e r f a ilu r e .
4.2.7 Test environment. The temperature o f the te s t environment
external to the t r i a x i a l c e ll sh a ll be constant to w ith in 2°C
during the te s t .
4.2.8 Data recording requirements. The exact format of data re
cording depends on the data a c q u is itio n system. As a minimum.
!• hsRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.4)
C.3-9
the general format o f Form L-C.3-1 shall be followed as c lose ly
output,voltages shall be normalized w ith respect to input voltages
at each pressure increment.
4.3.2 Bridge e f f e c t s . I f s tr a in gages are used, corrections shall
be made f o r the e ffe c ts o f Wheatstone bridge nonlinear response.
4.3.3 Platen e f f e c t s . I f the deformation transducers are mounted
on the loading platen ra th e r than on the sample i t s e l f , correc
tio n s shall be made fo r the e la s t ic response of the platens.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h is section is to e s ta b lish the minimum requirements
fo r a complete and usable re p o rt. Further d e ta ils may be added
Applications of the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of t h is pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l pa rt o f some te s tin g programs. In th a t
case, an ap plica tio n s section compatible w ith the format described
below should be included.
5.1 Introductory section o f the report.
material tested.
5.1 .1.1 Numbers of samples tested. In a large report covering
the re s u lts of te s ts in several rock types or at various con
f in in g pressures, the t e s t matrix is best presented in a
ta b u la r form.
5.1.1.2 Rationale f o r sample s e le ctio n . The reasons fo r
stated.
5.1 .1.3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas o f
in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
the lim ita tio n s o f the data w ith in the areas of ap p lica tio n
5.1.2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, stru c tu re
f a b r ic , grain s ize , d is c o n tin u itie s , voids, and weathering of
the samples shall be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n of the re s u lts , but in general is not
required. In varia b le material or f o r several rock types, many
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recom
mended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
ment a c tu a lly used fo r the te s t shall be included in the re p o rt.
C.3-10
The name, model number, and basic s p e c ifica tio n s of each major
piece shall be lis t e d .
5.2.2 Procedure, The procedure a ctu a lly used fo r the te s t shall
be lis t e d in de tailed steps.
v a ria tio n and the reasons fo r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t of
the v a r ia tio n upon the te s t re s u lts shall be discussed.
data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assump
tion s sha ll be noted, and the e ffe c t on the results discussed.
to ry te s t conditions conform to the assumptions contained
5.3.2.2 Correction fa c to rs. Any factors or methods applied
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary ta b le of re sults including te s t suite
designations, con fining pressures, average modulus of deformation
and Poisson's r a t io values, ranges, and uncerta inties shall be
presented.
5.4.2 Individual r e s u lts . A ta b le of re su lts fo r individual
te s ts in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample number, rock type, con
fin in g pressure, modulus of deformation, and Poisson's l a t i o
shal 1 be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g other types o f analyses may be in -
cluded as appropriate.
5.4.3.1 The v a r ia tio n of modulus of deformation and Poisson's
r a t io w ith confining pressure.
5.4 .3.2 Modulus and Poisson's r a tio as a function of stress
le v e l. Nonlinear behavior in general may also be discussed.
5.4.3.3 Volumetric s tra in vs. stress.
5.4.3.4 P o s t-fa ilu re behavior.
5 .4 .3 . 6 C orre la tio n of re s u lts with other rock properties,
such as s p e c ific g r a v ity , dynamic modulus of deformation,
or elevated temperature modulus of deformation.
5.4.3.7 Comparisons of re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
C.3-11
The re s u lts shall be analyzed using standard s t a t is t ic a l
methods. A ll u n c e rta in tie s shall be calculated using a 95%
confidence in te r v a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated w ith a single
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite of rock samples,
the mean value of the modulus of deformation and Poisson's
r a t i o , range, standard deviation and 95% confidence l im it s
fo r the mean shall be calculated as a minimum. The uncertainty
of the sample su ite shall be compared w ith the measurement
uncertainty to determine whether measurement e rro r or sample
v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
shall be compared to determine whether the observed diffe ren ce
5.6 Appended data.
The fo llo w in g shall be included as a minimum in an appendix.
shall be included.
5.6.2 S tre s s -s tra in curves.
te s t shall be included.
A s tre s s -s tra in curve fo r each I
t e s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s section to e sta b lis h Q uality Assurance procedures, but to iden
t i f y those points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance action
i s required.
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel sha ll be p re q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
6.2 Test insp ection.
Q uality Assurance personnel sha ll review the te s t setup, the pro
te s tin g the completed Form L-C.3-1 shall be reviewed and signed
o f f only i f c o rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Quality Assurance shall
C.3-12
t o 6.3.2 Equipment s e ria l numbers. Quality Assurance shall v e r ify
corded on Form L-C.3-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n - o ffs . Quality Assurance shall maintain signed-
o f f copies o f L-C.3-1.
C.3-13
T ria x ia l Compressive Modulus of Deformation of Rock Core
Ambient Temperature
Project Sample No. _______

Date Test Temperature _
Tested By Confining Pressure
Rock Type Loading Rate _____

Descri ption Serial No. C alibration
Average Average
Load Axi al Diametral

Readi ng S train Reading Strain Reading
Pg. 1
Form L-C.3-1
Pg. 2
•s
Readi ng S tra in Reading S tra in Reading
Test Supervisor _________________________________ Date

Quality Assurance ________________________________ Date
Project Engineer ________________________________ Date
Procedure L-C.4
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective o f t h i s te s t . This te s t determines deformational
c h a ra c te ris tic s o f a c y lin d r ic a l rock specimen at elevated tem
perature under t r i a x i a l compressive loading. Results obtained i n
clude the modulus of deformation, Poisson's r a tio and s tre s s -s tra in
curves.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . The c a lcu la tio n s used in th is procedure assume
a homogeneous, is o tr o p ic rock sample. The e ffe c ts of anisotropy
may be estimated by using s e le c tiv e ly oriented cores fo r te s t
specimens.
1.2 General d e s crip tio n o f the te s t .
f l a t . The sample is enclosed in a f le x ib le impermeable membrane
and placed in a confining chamber. The sample is heated to the
specified temperature. I t is loaded a x ia lly and the confining
chamber is pressurized to provide la te ra l load. When the desired
la te ra l load is achieved, i t is held constant. Axial load continues
to increase, and load and deformation of the sample are measured
concurrently. Several loading cycles are performed. Modulus of
deformation and Poisson's r a t io are-calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1.1 Axial s tr a in - the deformation per u n it length of
1.3.1.2 Diametral s tr a in - the deformation per u n it length
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3.2.1 The axial s t r a in , is calculated using:
£a (1)
0
where:
Ig " o r ig in a l axial length
Al = change in axial length
C.4-1
1.3.2.2 The diametral s t r a in , e ^ , is calculated using:
£d ~ d_ (2)
where:
0
= o r igîn a l diameter
In the case of measuring the circum fere ntia l s tr a in , ,
the circumference is C = Ttd, and the change in circum
ference is AC =irAd. Consequently, the circum fere ntia l
s tr a in is related to diametral s tra in by
_ AC _ Ad
^c
0 0
so th a t
^C " ^d '
where C and d are o r ig in a l specimen circumference and

diameter, re sp e c tiv e ly.
1.3.2.3 The volum etric s t r a in , e i s calculated using:
S " â 2 e^ (5)
1 .3 . 2 .4 The axia l s tr e s s ,a , is calculated as:
0= j ( 6)
where:
1.3 .2.5 The modulus of deformation, E, i s calculated using:
E = (7)
d£a
where:
d a = change in stress
dg-a = change in axial s tr a in .
The modulus is the slope o f the s tre ss -a xia l s tra in curve.

The change in stress and s tr a in may be evaluated in several
ways. The tangent modulus is the instantaneous slope o f the
C .4-2
s tre s s -s tra in curve, as shown on Figure 1.1. The recovery
modulus is the tangent modulus during the unloading portion
o f the pressuriza tion cycle.
and s t r a in , as shown on Figure 1.2.
The average modulus is s im ila r to the secant modulus, except
stress and s tr a in are evaluated over an a r b itra ry portion of
the s tre s s -s tra in curve as shown on Figure 1.3.
1.3 .2 . 6 Poisson's r a t i o , y » i s the negative r a tio o f the
diametral s t r a in , e to the axial s t r a in , e
li = - — (8 )
â

rock a t low stress le v e ls , Poisson's r a t io is calculated
at a given stress level from the slopes of the axial and
_ slope o f axial s tre s s -s tra in curve /gx
slope o f diametral s tre s s -s tra in curve ' '
1.4 References.
fo r T ria x ia l Compressive Strength o f Undrained Rock Core Specimens
without Pore Pressure Measurements." Annual Book of ASTM Stand
ards , Part 19.
1.4.2 ISRM, 1978, Commission on Standardization of Laboratory and
Field Tests, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Strength of
Rock M aterials in T r ia x ia l Compression", In t . J. of Rock Mech.
Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 15, No. 2.
1.4.3 ISRM, 1979, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Uniaxial
Compressive Strength and D eform ability of Rock M a te ria ls ," In t . J. of
Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr ., 16, No. 2.
2.0 P rerequisites
2.1 Personnel p r e q u a lific a tio n s .
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sha ll be form ally preq u a lifie d under
the Quality Assurance procedures established as part of the overall
te s tin g program.
2.2 Equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n .
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f th is procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
C.4-3
<T
FIG. 1.1 STRESS AND STRAIN USED IN CALCUUTION

OF TANGENT MODULUS.
<7
Ae,
A ct

OF SECANT MODULUS.

OF AVERAGE MODULUS.
:.4-4
! • performance. Performance v e r if ic a t i o n is generally done by c a l i
brating the equipment and measurement systems. C alibration and
documentation shall be accomplished according to standard Quality
might require several samples from a v a rie ty of formations,
while a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
judgment and experience o f project personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t is t ic a l requirements. The number o f samples tested must
be s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t is t ic a l basis fo r evalua
tio n of the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly variable w i l l
require more te s ts than r e la t iv e ly uniform rocks, in order to
evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e rta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomoqeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass, such
as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can s ig n if ic a n t ly influence
sampled and tested to provide an estimate of t h e i r e ffe c t.
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample shall be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to

3.1 Loading frame.
to the sample, the reaction frame containing the load mechanism and
t r i a x i a l c e l l , and the control system fo r the load mechanism. The
loading frame shall be constructed to apply a continuously increasing
load to the sample at e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress rate.
A s t i f f te s tin g machine shall be used.
The confining chamber consists of a hollow c y lin d e r and end caps to
contain the confining f l u i d , platens to support the sample, and a
f l e x i b le impermeable membrane to cover the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.1 C ylinder and end caps. The c e ll design shall be such
th a t changes in confining pressure do not d ir e c t ly cause changes
in axial load and vice versa.
3.2.2 Platens. The diameter of the platens shall be equal to
or greater than the diameter of the sample. Rock materials which
and some shales, shall be tested using platens sized so that the
C.4-5
la te ra l expansion o f the sample does not exceed the platen diameter.
The platens shall be at le a s t 0.625 in . (15.9 mm) th ic k . The
surfaces sha ll be f l a t to w ith in 0.Q002 in . (0.05 mm) and hard
ened to at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One o f the two platens
shall incorporate a spherical seat. This platen shall be placed
above the sample during te s tin g .
3.2.3 F le x ib le , impermeable membrane. This membrane encloses
the rock sample and prevents the confining f l u i d from penetrating
it. Generally, a sleeve o f natural or s ynth etic rubber or p la s tic
polymer i s used. Copper or lead jackets are sometimes used. The
membrane sha ll be in e r t r e la tiv e to the confining f l u i d , and shall
cover small pores in the sample without ru pturing when confining
pressure i s applied. P la s tic or s ilic o n e rubber coatings may be
applied d i r e c t l y to the sample, providing these materials do not
penetrate and strengthen the sample. The ends of the sample shall
not be coated, and care must be taken to form an e ffe c tiv e seal where
the platen and sample meet. Membranes formed by coatings shall be
subject to the same performance requirements as e la s tic sleeve
membranes.
The confining pressure system consists o f the pressurizing f l u i d and
the means of applying pressure. The f l u i d shall be stable at the
expected t e s t temperatures. High temperature hydraulic o i l , s i l i
cone o i l , or in e r t gas may be used. The pressurization system shall
be capable of maintaining the confining pressure constant to w ith
in throughout the te s t .
3.4 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axial load on the sample,
the confining pressure, the deformation, and the temperature.
measure axial load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an accuracy
of at le a s t _+100 lb (_+45.4 kg), in clud ing errors introduced by
the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a re so lu tio n of at lea st
50 lb (22.7 kg). A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic
transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading system i s employed,
provided th a t the load measurement requirements above are s a t is fie d ,
including the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in the hydraulic ram, etc.
3.4.2 Confining pressure. The confining pressure shall be
measured w ith a hydraulic pressure gage or e le c tro n ic transducer,
having an accuracy of at le a s t jfl% o f the confining pressure,
including errors due to readout equipment and a re solutio n o f at
le a st 0.5% of the con fining pressure.
hsRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.3)

‘ÂSTM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.4-6
3.4.3 Deformation. The defonngtion transducers shall have a
re s o lu tio n of atg least 10 X 10 s tra in and an accuracy of at
le a st _+ 20 X 10" s t r a in , inc lu d in g errors introduced by e x c i
ta t io n and readout equipment. Transducer selection c r i t e r i a
depend p r im a rily on the type of rock and the stru cture w ith in
length be less than 1 0 times the diameter of the largest mineral
grain.
resistance of no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts
of s e lf heating. An axial and a circum ferential gage
shall be mounted at mid-height o f the sample on each
end o f a diameter. The two axial gages shall be connected
in a h a lf Wheatstone bridge configuration to correct fo r
bending. The two c ircum fere ntia l gages shall be wired in
a s im ila r c o n fig u ra tio n . Each h a lf Wheatstone bridge
c o n fig u ra tio n sha ll be completed with two precision re s is
to rs haying a temperature c o e ffic ie n t no greater than
1 X 10"® ppm/“ C.
3.4.3.2 Dial gages shall be graduated to at lea st 0.0001
in . (0.003 mm). They sh a ll be mounted on the platens out
side the heater u n it. Two d ia l gages shall be mounted
across a diameter or three d ia l gages shall be mounted at
1 2 0 ° in te r v a ls .
3.4.3.3 Linear varia ble d if f e r e n t i a l transformers (LVDTs)
shall be mounted across a diameter or at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls
on the sample or platens using a non-magnetic attachment.
I f they are attached to the sample d ir e c t ly , the points of
attachment shall not be w ith in D/2 of the sample end, where
D is the sample diameter.
3.4 .3.4 Radial deformation may be measured w ith a volumetric
apparatus (dilatom etec). This device shall have a resolution
o f at le a s t 0.002 in . (32.8 mm ) and an accuracy of at least
0.5% of the radial s tra in of the sample.
3.4.3.5 Other types of deformation transducers, such as the
temperature. Special L im its of Error thermocouples or platinum
resistance thermometers (RTDs) are recommended. The temperature
transducers shall be accurate to at lea st +^0.9°F (jf0.5°C) w ith a
re so lu tio n of at le a s t 0.18°F (0.1°C). Temperature shall be
measured at three lo c a tio n s , w ith one sensor near the top, one
at m id-height, and one near the bottom of the sample.
C.4-7
3.5 Power supplies.
The type o f power supply and voltage level w i l l be determined by
the type o f deformation transducer used. In a l l cases, however,
the power supply shall be capable o f providing voltage accurate
and stable to at le a s t jflOmV.
3.6 Signal con dition ing and readout.
These devices may be e ith e r manual or automatic. Voltmeters shall
be capable of reading to 10" mV. The cumulative e r ro r of the
readout equipment and transducers shall meet the requirements o f
Section 3.4 above.
The heating u n it shall be capable o f maintaining a uniform temp
erature throughout the sample to w ith in 4°C. The u n it shall
incorporate controls so th a t the sample may be heated at a rate
no greater than 3 . 6 °F (2°C) per minute. The mean temperature o f
the sample shall vary by not morethan 3.6°F (2°C) during the te s t .
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core size. Rock cores o f NX size (2 in . nominal diameter)
or la rg e r are recommended. However, in no case shall the core
diameter be less than 1 0 times the size of the la rg e s t mineral
grain.
4.1.2 Length-to-diameter r a t io . shall be cut to a length-
to-diam eter r a t io of 2.0 to 3 . 0 . ' ’ '
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core shall be r e la t i v e l y smooth,
free of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tr a ig h t to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in .
(0.25 mm) over the length o f the sample.
4.1.4 P erp end icularity. The ends o f the sample/Shall be perpendicular
to the long axis to w ith in 0.01 in . over 2 i n . ' ' (0.25 mm over
51 mm).
4.1.5 P a ra lle lism . The ends o f/th e sample shall be p a ra lle l to
each other to w ith in 0.002 i n . ' ' (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness. The ends o f the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 i n . ' (0.025 mm).
4.1.7 Machining. No capping m aterials or end surface treatments other
than machining sha ll be applied to the ends o f the sample. The
rock shall not be degraded during the machining process. Thermal
fra c tu rin g sha ll be prevented by cooling w ith an appropriate
f l u i d as required. Generally, water is used f o r hard rock, but
other materials may re quire special f l u i d s , such as saturated
brine fo r s a lt or g ly c e rin f o r slaking mudstones.
hsRM, 1979, (see Ref. 1.4.3)

'ÂSTM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.4-8
4.1.8 Voids. Large voids in the sides of the sample, such
as vesicle s , may be f i l l e d w ith p a r a ffin , p la s tic or s im ila r
material to provide support f o r the f le x ib le membrane. Such
f i l l i n g material sha ll not penetrate the rock and shall have an
e la s tic modulus no greater than 1 0 % of the in ta c t rock modulus.
4.1.9 Measurements. The height o f the sample shall be measured at
three equally spaced in te rv a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable of reading
determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t angles to
each other at the top, m id-height, and base o f the sample, using
a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0.001 in . ( 0.025 mm). A ll
measurements shall be recorded as shown on Form L-C.4-1.
4.1.10 Membrane A p p lic a tio n . To avoid disru ptio n of the membrane
caused by the escape of moisture during the t e s t , the sample shall
be dried at 221 _+4°F (105° j^2°C) fo r at lea st 24 hours p r io r to
membrane a p p lic a tio n . To prevent thermal fr a c tu r in g , the heating
and cooling ra te fo r drying the sample shall not exceed 3.6°F (2°C)
per minute. I f therm o-setting or heat shrink materials are used
f o r the membrane, the heating and cooling rates shall also not
exceed 3 . 6 °F (2°C) per minute.
4.2 Testing.
4.2.1 Alignment. The apparatus shall be assembled so that
the platen and sample are aligned w ith the loading axis to
w ith in 0.05 in . (1.25 mm).
4.2.2 Heating ra te . The sample w i l l be heated to the te s t temp
erature at a ra te not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute to prevent
thermal fr a c tu r in g .
4.2.3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The te s t sample shall be considered
to have attained thermal e q u ilib riu m when the deformation
transducer output is stable fo r at le a st three readings taken over
a period of no less than 30 minutes. S t a b il i t y is defined as a
constant reading showing only the e ffe c ts of normal instrument
and heater u n it flu c tu a tio n s .
4.2.4 Loading sequence. During the i n i t i a l stage of the te s t ,
the axial load arid confining pressure shall be increased concur
re n tly at rates such th a t the axial stress in the sample is main
tained equal to the confining pressure.
4.2.5 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l readings shall be taken when
the axial stress is equal to the confining pressure, and the sys
tem has reached thermal e q u ilib riu m .
4.2.6 Loading r a te . The axial load shall be applied smoothly
and continuously a t e ith e r a constant s tra in or constant stress
ra te. For hard rock the loading rate should produce f a ilu r e
C.4-9
w ith in 5 to 15 minutes ; a ty p ic a l constant stress rate is 25
psi (0.17 MPa) per second, while constant s tr a in rates are on
the order o f 1 to lOOpc per second. For rocks which e x h ib it
s ig n if ic a n t nonelastic behavior, such as s a lt and some shales,
constant stress loading rates are generally slower, fo r example
in the range of 0.5 to 4 psi (0.003 to 0.03 MPa) per second; con
loading ra te shall be used f o r a l l samples in a p a r tic u la r s u ite
of te s ts .
4.2.7 P ressurization cycles. Three axial load cycles are re
commended f o r general te s tin g . Maximum stress fo r each cycle
should be approximately 15, 30, and 50 %, re sp e ctiv e ly, o f the
the estimated unconfined compressive strength o f the sample.
The sample may be taken to f a i l u r e a f t e r the c y c lic loading.
4.2.8 Measurement in te r v a ls . Stress and s tr a in shall be measured
at approximately equal stress increments during the loading and
unloading p o rtio n of each cycle. At le a s t 10 measurements shall
be taken over each p o rtion o f the load cycle to generate s u f f ic i e n t
data points f o r the s tre s s -s tra in curve. More frequent readings
may be required near and a f t e r f a i l u r e .
4.2.9 Test environment. The temperature o f the te s t environment
external to the heater u n it shall be constant to w ith in 3 . 6 °F (2°C)
during the te s t .
the general format of Form L-C.4-1 shall be followed as c lo se ly
output voltages shall be normalized w ith respect to input v o l
tages at each pressure increment.
4.3.2 Bridge e f f e c t s . I f s tra in gages are used, corrections shall
be made f o r the e ffe c ts o f Wheatstone bridge non-linear response.
4.3.3 Platen e f f e c t s . I f the deformation transducers are mounted
on the loading platen ra th e r than the sample i t s e l f , corrections
shall be made f o r the e la s tic response o f the platens.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lish the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. Further d e ta ils may be added as
A pplications o f the te s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of th is proce
dure, but may be an in te g ra l part o f some te s tin g programs. In th a t
case, an a p p lica tio n s section compatible w ith the format described
ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.4-10
material tested.
5.1.1.1 Number of samples tested. In a large report cover
ing the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, at several
temperatures, or at various confining pressures, the te s t
matrix i s best presented in a tab ular form.
5.1 .1.2 Rationale f o r sample sele ction. The reasons fo r the
number and type o f sample tested shall be c le a rly stated.
5.1 .1.3 L im ita tio n s of the te s tin g program. The areas of
in te r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
the lim ita tio n s o f the data w ith in the areas of a p plicatio n
5.1.2 B r ie f d e sc rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c
tu re and f a b r i c , grain size, d is c o n tin u itie s or voids, and
Further d e ta il depends on the a p p lica tio n of the re s u lts , but
in general i s not required. In variable m a te ria l, or fo r several
rock types, many samples may be described, and a tab ular presen
ta tio n is recomirrended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
ment a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t shall be included in the report.
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a ctu a lly used fo r the te s t shall
be lis te d in de tailed steps.
5.3.1 Data reduction quations. A ll equations used to reduce the
data shall be c le a rly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assump
tio n s inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e ir a p p li
cations shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the re sults discussed.
5.3.2 S ite - s p e c ific influ e n ce s.
5 .3.2.1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual labora
to ry t e s t conditions conform to the assumptions contained
C.4-11
to the data to c o rre ct f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall be
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary table including te s t su ite designations,
temperatures, confining pressures, average modulus o f deformation
and Poisson's r a t io values, ranges, and u n c e rta in tie s shall be
presented.
5.4.2 Ind ividual r e s u lts . A ta b le of re s u lts fo r ind ivid ual te s ts
including as a minimum sample number, rock type, t e s t temperature,
confining pressure, modulus of deformation, and Poisson's r a t io
shal 1 be presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g other types o f analyses and presenta
5.4.3.1 The v a r ia tio n of modulus o f deformation and Poisson's
r a t io w ith temperature and con fining pressure.
5.4 .3.2 Modulus and Poisson's r a t io as a function o f stress
level and confinement. Nonlinear behavior may also be d is
cussed.
5.4 .3.3 Volumetric s tra in vs. stress at temperature, or con-
f i nement.
5.4 .3.4 P o s tfa ilu re behavior.
5.4 .3.5 C o rre la tio n of re s u lts w ith other rock properties,
such as s p e c ific g r a v ity , dynamic modulus of deformation,
on ambient temperature modulus o f deformation.
5.4 .3 . 6 Comparison of re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
The re s u lts shall be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s sha ll be calculated using a 95% confidence i n t e r
val .
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r ro r associated w ith a single te s t
shall be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts of a l l
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each su ite of rock samples, the mean
value of the modulus of deformation and Poisson's r a t i o , the range,
standard de viation and 95% confidence l i m i t s f o r the mean shall be
calculated as a minimum. The un certainty o f the sample s u ite shall
be compared w ith the measurement uncertainty to determine whether
measurement e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in
the re s u lts .
C.4-12
between groups is s ig n if ic a n t at the 953i confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
The follo w in g shall be included as a minimum in an appendix.
shall be included.
5.6.2 S tre s s -s tra in curve. A s tre s s -s tra in curve fo r each te s t
shall be included.

The fo llo w in g items are the minimum requirements to ensure that the
t e s t re su lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s section to esta b lis h Q uality Assurance procdures, but to i d e n t i
fy those points during the te s t at which Quality Assurance action is
requi red.
P rio r to te s tin g , a l l personnel shall be p requ alified as described
in Section 2.1.
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . A fte r te s tin g ,
the completed Form L-C.4-1 sha ll be reviewed and signed o f f only
i f c o rre c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performa.'ice v e r i f i c a t i o n . Quality Assurance shall
of copies o f L-C.4-1.
C.4-13
Pg. 1

Project_ Sample No. _______

Date Test Temperature__
Tested By_ Confining Pressure_
Rock Type Loading Rate______

Average Average
Axial Diametral
Form L-C.4-1
Pg. 2
Axial Diametral
Test S u p e rv is o r______________________________ Date

Qual i t y Assurance_____________________________ Date
Project Engineer______________________________ Date_
Procedure L-C.5
Deformation Constants o f Rock Core -
U ltrasonic Method
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h i s t e s t . This te s t determines the u l t r a
sonic e la s tic constants of a rock specimen. Results include
compressional wave v e lo c it y , shear wave v e lo c ity , and the e la s tic
properties of deformation modulus, shear modulus, bulk modulus
and Poisson's r a t io .
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . The equations used in th is procedure were
derived f o r homogeneous, is o tr o p ic m aterials. Departure from
these conditions w i l l cause progressively greater e rro r in
calculated deformation prope rties. Hence, t h is te s t is re
commended f o r is o tr o p ic or s l i g h t l y anisotropic materials only.
However, accurate shear and compressive wave v e lo c itie s may
be obtained using t h i s procedure regardless o f the degree of
anisotropy.
1.2 General de scrip tio n o f the t e s t .
A rock sample is cut to length and the ends are machined f l a t .
The sample is positioned between a tra n sm ittin g transducer and
a receiving transducer. I f the t e s t is to be conducted in a
stress f i e l d , the spe cified load is applied to the sample.
U ltrasonic compressional and shear wave pulses are transmitted
through the sample. Travel times are measured. The u l t r a
sonic e la s tic constants are then calculated.
1.3 Data reduction.
1.3.1.1 A nisotropic - the condition of having d iffe r e n t pro
p e rtie s in d if f e r e n t d ire c tio n s .
1.3 .1.2 Compressional wave - wave motion where the d ire c
tio n s of v ib ra tio n and propagation are the same; P-wave.
1.3.1.3 Shear wave - wave motion where the d ire c tio n of
v ib ra tio n is transverse to the d ire c tio n of propagation;
S-wave.
1 .3 .1 .4 Stress - force per u n it area.
1.3.1.5 Travel time - the time required fo r a wave to
tra v e l a specified distance.
1.3 .1.6 Wave v e lo c ity - the speed at which a wave tra ve ls
through the rock.
C.5-1
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3 .2.1 The corrected tra v e l tim e, T^, i s calculated using:
Tc ■ (1)
where:
T„ = measured tra v e l time
m
= zero length time correctio n.
1.3.2.2 The P-wave v e lo c it y , Vp, is calculated using:
V =^ (2)
^ cp
where:
L„ = distance tra v e lle d by the P wave
P
T „ = corrected tra v e l time f o r P wave,
cp
1.3.2.3 The S-wave v e lo c it y , V^, is calculated using:
V =^ (3)
cs
where:
= distance tra v e lle d by the S-wave
T^^ = corrected tra v e l time f o r S-wave.
cs
1 .3 . 2 .4 The modulus of deformation, E, is calculated using:
PV ^ ( 3 v J -
E =-J P ^ (4)
( V - V )
where:
p= density o f the sample.
1.3.2.5 Poisson's r a t i o , u , calculated using:
(V 2 . 2V 2 )
y =— S ----- T
2(V 2 . V 2)
C.5-2
1.3 .2 . 6 The shear modulus, G, is calculated using:
G= (6 )
1 .3 . 2 .7 The bulk modulus, K, is calculated using:
K = P(3Vp2 . 4V^2j
o
1.4 References
1.4.1 ASTM, 1978, Test Designation D 2845, "Standard Method
fo r Laboratory Determination o f Pulse V elo c itie s and Ultrasonic
E la s tic Constants of Rock", Annual Book o f ASTM Standards,
Part 19.
1.4.2 Foundation Sciences, In c . , 1981, Fie ld and In Situ Rock
Eield Tests, 1978, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining Sound
V e lo c ity ", I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s tr .,
1^
1.4.4 U.S. Bureau of Mines, 1974, "E la s tic Response to U ltra

sonic Pulse", Bureau o f Mines Test Procedures fo r Rocks. In
formation C irc u la r IC 8628.
2.0 Prerequisites
Technicians and Test Supervisor, shall be form ally p requ alified
the ov e ra ll te s tin g program.
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus with the per
formance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 of th is procedure shall
be v e r if ie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, the
manufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s fo r the equipment shall be the
required level o f performance. Performance v e r if ic a tio n is
system. C a lib ra tio n and documentation shall be accomplished
according to standard Q uality Assurance procedures.
depend p a r tly on the intended a p p lica tio n of the te s t re s u lts .
C.5-3
a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate
re posito ry rock may require many te s ts from a single formation.
The f in a l te s t in g program w i l l depend heavily on the technical
must be s u f f ic i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis
fo r evaluation o f the re s u lts . Rock types which are highly
varia b le w i l l require more te s ts than r e la t i v e l y uniform rocks,
in order to evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e tc . can s i g n if ic a n t l y influence
the u ltra s o n ic v e lo c it ie s o f the rock. These should be sampled
and tested to provide an estimate o f t h e i r e ffe c t.
2.3.4 Anisotropy. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be evalu
ated by te s tin g cores taken at d if f e r e n t o rie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Preservation o f moisture condition o f samples.
v e lo c it ie s . I f the rock is to be tested under natural condi
tio n s , the moisture content o f the rock core shall be preserved
between the time of recovery and time o f te s tin g as described
in Procedure GT-A.4, "Handling and Storage o f Rock Core Sample,"
see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Density determ ination.
The density o f the rock sample shall have been determined as
described in Procedure L -A .1, "Bulk Density of Rock Samples".
2.6 Documentation.
Each sample sha ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according

The schematic layout of the equipment is shown on Fig. 3.1.
3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame is used to apply a un iaxial stress to the
sample only i f te s tin g is to be done under stressed conditions.
to the sample through the transducers, the reaction frame con
ta in in g the load mechanism, and the control system fo r the load
mechanism. The frame shall be capable o f maintaining a constant
load to w ith in 1 % f o r the duration o f the te s t .
3.2 Axial load transducer.
The axial load shall be measured i f the sample is tested under
stress. An e le c tro n ic load c e ll is recommended. The c e ll should
have an accuracy of at le a s t o f the stress le v e l, including
errors introduced by the e x c ita tio n and readiout system, and a
re s o lu tio n of 0.5% o f the stress le v e l. A lte r n a tiv e ly , a pressure
C.5-4
t o
PULSE TIME MARK

GENERATOR GENERATOR
RECEIVER
ROCK SPECIMEN
PREAMPLIFIER
TRANSMITTER
ELECTRONIC
COUNTER
OSCILLOSCOPE
FIG. 3.1 SCHEHATIG OF EQUIPMENT TEST

SET-UP(AFTER IS R M .1978)
C.5-5
gage or e le c tro n ic transducer may be used i f a hydraulic loading
system i s employed, provided th a t the load measurement re q u ire
ments above are s a t is f ie d , in clud ing the e ffe c ts of f r i c t i o n in
the hydraulic ram, e tc .
3.3 Pulse generator.
An e le c tro n ic pulse generator sha ll s a tis fy the follo w in g re -
quirements:
pulse form: s in e -, square, step-wave pulse;
pulse w idth: 1-lOs;
frequency range: 100 kHz-ZMUz;
r e p e titio n frequency: 1 0 - 1 0 re p e titio n s per second;
pulse voltage: to be compatible to transducer used,
as high as transducers allow.
The pulse generator must have a trig g e r-p u ls e output to t r ig g e r
an oscilloscope ( tr ig g e r - s ig n a l) .
3.4 U ltra so n ic transducers.
The transducers shall consist o f a tra n s m itte r which converts
e le c tr ic a l pulses in to mechanical pulses and a receiver which
converts mechanical pulses in to e le c tr ic a l pulses. Environ
mental conditions such as ambient temperature, moisture, humi
d i t y , and impact should be considered in sele cting the tra n s
ducer element. P ie z o e le c tric ceramics (e.g. barium t ita n a te
or le a d -z irc o n a te -tita n a te ) in the form o f pla te s, dis cs , rods,
rings or spheres to generate,pulses in the frequency range
lOOkHz-ZMHz are recommended. I t is usually necessary to use
d if f e r e n t p ie z o e le c tric transducers f o r compressional or shear-
wave transmission and re ce ivin g , e.g. c y lin d r ic a l discs (ra -
dius>>thickness) acting in the thickness and radial mode f o r
tra n s m ittin g and receiving compressional waves; shear plates
operating in the shear mode f o r tra n s m ittin g and receiving
shear waves. In order to elim in ate sc a tte r and poor wave
a r r i v a l , the tra n s m itte r should generate wavelengths at le a s t
three times the average grain size of the sample. For te s ts
conducted under an axial load, the transducers w i l l serve as
platens to transm it the load to the sample.
3.5 Pream plifer.
A voltage pream plifer is required i f the voltage output o f the
receiving transducer is r e la t i v e l y low, or i f the display and
tim ing u n its are r e la t i v e l y in s e n s itiv e . To preserve fa s t ris e
times, the frequency response of the p re a m p lifie r shall drop no
more than 2 dB over a frequency range from 5 kHz to four times
the resonance frequency of the receiver.
ÎSRM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.3)

"ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)
C.5-6 ^
h 3.6 Time mark generator.
The time mark generator is used to control the pulse generator
and send tim ing marks to the display u n it.
3.7 Display u n i t .
The wave form from the receiving transducer shall be displayed
on a cathode ray oscilloscope. A dual beam instrument is re
commended. The oscilloscope shall have a f l a t frequency re
sponse from 0 to at le a s t 5 MHz and a maximum sweep rate of
2 X 10" second per in . (7.9 x 10" second per mm).
3.8 E lectro nic counter.
An e le c tro n ic counter w ith provisions fo r time in te rv a l measure
ments is recommended.
3.9 Time delay u n i t .
A time delay u n it shall be used to delay the display tr ig g e r
pulse r e la tiv e to the tra n s m itte r pulse. The delay u n it shall
be adjustable w ith a range of at le a st 0 to 2 0 u second.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Dimensions. The shape of the samples tested may be p r is -
matic, c y l i n d r i c a l , or spherical. The r a t io of the distance
between the transducers to the minimum la te ra l dimension shall
not exceed 5.0. The distance between the,transducers shall be
at le a st 1 0 times the average grain size. ’
4.1.2 Surface preparation. The surfaces to be tested w i l l be
f l a t to w ith in 0 . 0 0 1 in . (0.025 mm). The two opposite surfaces
to be tested shall be p a ra lle l to w ith in 0.005 in . over 1 in .
(0.125 mm over 25.4 mm). For samples with curved surfaces, the
width of the f l a t area shall be the minimum required to achieve
adequate transducer coupling.
4.1.3 Measurements. The distance between transducers w i l l be
measured at three equally spaced locations to the nearest 0 . 0 0 1
in . (0.025 mm). The average distance between p a ra lle l te s t
surfaces sha ll be the wave tra v e l distance. For the p r o f i l i n g
method described in Section 4 .2 .4 , the distance shall be measured
from the center of the tra n s m ittin g transducer to the center of
the receiving transducer. The distances shall be recorded as
shown on Form L-C.5-1.
,ASTM, 1978(see Ref. 1.4.1)

ÎSRM, 1978(see Ref. 1.4.3)
C.5-7
4.2 Procedure.
4.2.1 Zero time determ ination. Zero time is determined by
placing the face of the tra n s m ittin g transducer against the face
of the receiving transducer. The tra ve l time f o r the waves
produced during t h i s operation is zero time. The zero times
fo r the P and S-wave transducers shall be recorded as shown on
Form L-C.5-1.
4.2.2 Sample/transducer coupling. In order to ensure proper
wave transmission across the sample-transducer in te rfa c e , a th in
laye r of coupling medium such as water, high-vacuum grease,
phenyl s a lic y la t e , or other resin shall be applied to the sur
faces of the sample to be tested. A small load may be applied
to the transducer to seat i t against the sample.
4.2.3 Wave measurements. P and S waves shall be generated
in d iv id u a lly . At le a s t three determinations o f tra vel time
f o r each type o f wave shall be made. The average shall be used
in the c a lc u la tio n s .
4.2 .4 Receiver lo c a tio n . Generally the receiver is placed in
a fixed p o s itio n on the opposite side of the sample from the
tra n s m itte r. For some sample shapes, however, the receiver may
be positioned at several points along the side o f the sample
while the tra n s m itte r remains fixed ( p r o f i l i n g ) . This method
produces tra v e l time vs. distance curves, from which the wave
v e lo c itie s may be calculated.
4.2.5 Data recording requirements. Test data shall be recorded
as shown on Form L-C.5-1. An oscilloscope camera is desirable
fo r recording wave forms.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to es ta b lish the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re port. Further d e ta ils may be added as
A pplica tions o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope of t h is pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l part o f some te s tin g programs. In
th a t case, an a p p lic a tio n s section compatible w ith the format des
cribed below should be included.
5.1 Introd uctory section of the re p o rt.
purpose of the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tic s o f the
material tested.
C.5-8
5.1.1.1 Numbers o f samples tested. In a large report
covering the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types or at
various axial loads, the te s t matrix is best presented
5 .1 .1.2 Rationale fo r sample sele ction. The reasons fo r
stated.
in te re s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program
and the lim ita tio n s of the data w ith in the areas of ap
p lic a t io n shall be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r ie f d e s crip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c
tu r e , f a b r ic , grain s iz e , d is c o n tin u itie s , voids, and weather
ing o f the samples shall be described as a minimum. Further
d e ta il depends on the a p p lic a tio n of the re s u lts , but in general
is not required. In varia b le material or fo r several rock types,
many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is
recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A detailed l i s t i n g of the equip-
ment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t shall be included in the report.
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a ctu a lly used fo r the te s t shall
v a ria tio n and the reasons f o r i t shall be noted. The e ffe c t
the data shall be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations or lim ita tio n s in t h e i r
ap plicatio ns shall be noted, and the e ffe c t on the re sults d is
cussed.
5 .3 .2 . 1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual l a
boratory te s t conditions conform to the assumptions con
tained in the data reduction equations shall be discussed.
to the data to correct f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall
C.5-9
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary o f Results. Summary tables fo r each rock pro-
perty ( e . g . , modulus o f deformation, Poisson's r a t io ) shall be
prepared. The inform ation sha ll include as a minimum rock s u ite
designation, number of te s t s , average value, range, and un
c e r ta in tie s .
5.4.2 Individual re s u lts . A summary tab le o f ind ivid u a l te s t
re s u lts shall be prepared in clu d in g sample number, wave velo
c i t i e s , and calculated material properties as a minimum.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g other types of analyses or presenta
5.4.3.1 Photographs o f wave forms.
5 .4 .3 .3 C orrelatio n w ith other rock properties such as
s p e c ific g ra v ity or s t a t ic modulus o f deformation.
5 .4 .3.4 Comparison o f re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous studies.
5 .4 .3 .5 Relationship o f measured properties w ith moisture
content or stress.
The re s u lts shall be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l me
thods. A ll u n c e rta in tie s shall be calculated using a 95% con
fidence in t e r v a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r r o r associated w ith a single
te s t sha ll be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite of rock samples, the
mean values o f the deformational p ro p e rtie s , ranges, standard
deviations and 95% confidence l i m i t s fo r the means shall be
calculated as a minimum. The uncertainty of the sample s u ite
shall be compared w ith the measurement uncertainty to de ter
mine whether measurement e r ro r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the
dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
shall be cismpared to determine whether the observed difference
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L-C.5-1 sha ll be included in an appendix.
C.5-10
!• 6.0 Quality Assurance
The follow ing items are the minimum requirements to ensure that
the te s t re s u lts are defendable and traceable. I t is not the in te n t
of th is section to esta b lish Q uality Assurance procedures, but to
id e n t if y those points during the t e s t at which Quality Assurance
action is required.
P rio r to te s t in g , a l l personnel shall be prequ a lifie d as de
6.2 Test insp ection.
Q uality Assurance personnel sha ll review the te s t setup, the
procedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t io n . A fte r
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-C.5-1 shall be reviewed and
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Quality Assurance
th a t s e ria l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the te s t are re
o f f copies of L-C.5-1.
C.5-11
Deformation Constants o f Rock Core
U ltraso nic Method
Proj ect_ Sample No.

Date Rock Type_
Tested By_______ Density___
Test Temperature_ Stress

Description S erial No. C a libration
Distance P-wave zero time:
S-wave zero time:

Average:
V e lo c ity
P-wave: S-wave:
Average: Average:
Remarks:

Q ua lity Assurance_ Date_
P roject Engineer_ Date
Procedure L -D .1
Uniaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core -
Ambient Temperature
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . The o b je c tiv e o f t h i s t e s t is to
evaluate the time-dependent s t r a i n (creep) o f a rock core
sample subjected to a constant u n ia x ia l stre ss.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . This procedure does not discuss analysis o f
creep data.
A rock core sample i s cut to length and the ends are machined
f l a t . The sample i s placed in a loading frame. An axia l load
i s applied to the sample. The load is held constant f o r the
d u ratio n o f the t e s t . Sample deformation is monitored p e riod
ic a l ly .
1.3 Data re d u c tio n .
1 .3 .1 .1 S tra in - deformation per u n it length o f sample.
1 .3 .1 .2 Load - t o t a l ax ia l fo rc e acting on a sample.
1 .3 .1 .3 Stress - a x ia l fo rc e per u n it area o f the sample.
1 .3 .1 .4 Instantaneous deformation - deformation occurring
immediately upon loading sample due to e la s t ic response,
as shown on Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .5 Creep - deformation w ith time under constant load.
1 .3 .1 .6 Transient creep - i n i t i a l phase o f creep during
which deformation occurs a t a dim in ishing ra te , as shown
on Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .7 Steady-state creep - second phase o f creep during
which deformation occurs a t a constant ra te , as shown on
Figure 1.1.
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3 .2 .1 The ax ia l s t r a i n , is calcu la ted using:
Eg - 1 “ (1 )
0
! •
D.1-1
TRANSIENT STEADY STATE
CREEP CREEP,^
▲
9065
UJ
INSTANTANEOUS
DEFORMATION
F ia 1.1 IDEALIZED CREEP CURVE
D.1-2
where:
AL = change in measured ax ia l length
Lq = o r ig in a l measured a x ia l length.
1 .3 .2 .2 The axial s tre s s , is ca lcu la ted using:
= J (2 )
where:
A = c ro s s -s e c tio n a l area o f the sample.
B 1 .3 .2 .3 The an alysis o f rock deformation w ith time is complex
and nonstandard. The user is re fe rre d to the references in
Section 1.4.
1.4 References.
f o r Unconfined Compressive Strength o f In ta c t Rock Core Speci
mens," Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 19.
1.4.2 C a rte r, N .L ., 1976, "Steady State Flow o f Rocks," Rev.
Geophys. Space Phys., 14.
1.4.3 C a rte r, N.L. and K irb y , S .H ., 1978, "Transient Creep
and S e m ib rittle Behavior o f C r y s ta llin e Rocks," Pure and Appl.
Geophys., 116.
1.4.4 Foundation Sciences, I n c . , 1981, F ie ld and In S itu Rock
Is o la t io n , B a t t e lle Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.5 ISRM Commission on S tandardization o f Lai oratory and
F ie ld Tests, 1979, "Suggested Methods fo r Determining the Uni
a xia l Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y o f Rock M a te ria ls ,"
I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. S ci. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 16, No. 2.
1.4 . 6 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, Test Standard RTH
205-80, "Standard Method o f Test f o r Creep o f Rock in Compression,"
Rock Testing Handbook, Geotechnical Laboratory, Waterways Experi
ment S ta tio n , Vicksburg, Miss.
2.0 P re re q u isite s
Technicians and Test Supervisor, s h a ll be fo rm a lly p re q u a lifie d
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures established as part of
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus w ith performance
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be v e r i
P fie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, the manu
fa c t u r e r 's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment shall be the re-
D.1-3
quired leve l o f performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is
g e nerally done by c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement
systems. C a lib r a tio n and documentation s h a ll be accomplished
2 .3.1 P roject scope. The number and type o f rock cores tested
depends p a r t l y on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the t e s t r e s u lts .
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations,
while a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candi
date re p o s ito ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le f o r
mation. The f i n a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the
tech nical judgment and experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. A s u f f i c i e n t number o f samples
should be tested to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r
e va luatio n o f the r e s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rock to evaluate
the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s and nonhomogeneities
in the rock mass, such as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , void s , e t c . , can
s i g n i f i c a n t l y a f f e c t the deformational behavior o f the rock.
These should be sampled and te ste d to provide an estimate o f
th e ir e ffe c t.
2.3 .4 A n iso tro p y. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be evalu
ated by t e s t in g cores taken a t d i f f e r e n t o r ie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Preservation o f moisture c o n d itio n o f samples.
The m oisture c o n d itio n o f the rock can in flu e n ce the measured
deformation. The rock core should be preserved between the time
of recovery and t e s t in g as described in Procedure GT-A.4,
"Handling and Storage o f Rock Core Samples," see Ref. 1.4.4.
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be f u l l y documented before te s t in g according
to standard Q u a lity Assurance procedures.

3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame c on sists o f the mechanism f o r applying load
to the sample, the re a c tio n frame con tainin g the load mechanism,
and the c o n tro l system f o r the load mechanism. The loading
frame s h a ll be constructed to maintain a constant load on the
sample throughout the t e s t to _+ 5 psi (0.03 MPa). The loading
frame may be constructed so th a t several samples can be tested
in p a r a l l e l . However, samples s h a ll not be stacked on top o f
each o th e r f o r creep te s t in g .
D .1-4
2. 2 Platens.
The diameter of the platens s h a ll be equal to or greater than
the sample diameter. Rock m a te ria ls which are subject to large
deformations, such as s a lt and some shales, sha ll be tested
using platens sized so th a t the la te r a l expansion o f the sample
does not exceed the platen diameter. The platens sha ll be at
le a s t 0.625 In . t h ic k (15.9 mm). The surfaces s h a ll be f l a t to
w ith in 0.Q002 In . (0.005 mm) and hardened to at le a s t Rockwell
HRC 58. ’ One o f the two platens sha ll Incorporate a spherical
seat. This platen sha ll be placed above the sample during
te s t in g .
3.3 Transducers.
3.3.1 Axial load. An e le c tr o n ic load c e ll Is recommended to
measure ax ia l load on the sample. The c e ll sh a ll be capable
o f determ ining sample stre s s to an accuracy o f at le a s t _ + 2 0
psi (+0.14 MPa), In c lu d in g e rro rs Introduced by the e x c ita tio n
and readout system, and a re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t 10 psi (0.069 MPa).
A l t e r n a t i v e l y , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic transducer may be
used I f a h y d ra u lic loading system Is employed, provided th a t
the load measurement requirements above are s a t i s f i e d . Inclu ding
the e ffe c ts o f f r i c t i o n In the h y d ra u lic ram, etc.
3.3.2 Deformation. The deformation transducers sh a ll have
a re s o lu tio n of a tg le a s t 25 X 10" s tr a in and an accuracy of
a t le a s t j^50 X 10” s t r a i n . In c lu d in g e rro rs Introduced by
e x c ita tio n and readout equipment. The transducer system shall
be fre e from noncharacterlzable long-term I n s t a b i l i t y ( d r i f t )
gre a te r than 25 X 10“ s t r a in . Transducer se le c tio n c r i t e r i a
depend p r im a r ily on the type o f rock and the s tru c tu re w ith in
grained or nonhomogeneous samples. In no case s h a ll the gage
length be less than 1 0 times the diameter o f the la rg e st
mineral g ra in .
3 .3 .2 .1 E le c tr ic a l re sistance s tr a in gages sha ll have a
resistance o f no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts
o f s e l f heating. Two s t r a in gages sha ll be mounted para
l l e l to the long axis of the core at mid-height o f the
sample at opposite ends o f a diameter. These sha ll be
connected In a h a lf Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n to
ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4 .1)

‘ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4. 5)
0.1-5
c o rre c t f o r bending. The h a lf Wheatstone bridge c o n fi-
gu ra tio n s h a ll be completed by connecting two s tr a in
gages mounted on a s im ila r rock sample, to provide tem
perature compensation. This sample s h a ll be placed as
near the t e s t sample as p ra c tic a b le during te s t in g .
3 .3 .2 .2 Dial gages s h a ll be graduated to at le a s t 0.0001
in . (0.0025 mm) and be accurate to at le a s t jfO.OOOl in .
(0.0025 mm). Two d ia l gages sha ll be mounted across a
diameter o f the sample or p la te n , o r th re e a t 1 2 0 ° in te r v a ls .
I f they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the points o f
attachment s h a ll not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end, where
D i s the sample diameter.
3 .3 .2 .3 Linear v a ria b le d i f f e r e n t i a l transform ers (LVDTs)
sh a ll be mounted across a diameter o f the sample or p la tens,
or a t 120° i n t e r v a l s , using a non-magnetic attachment. I f
they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the po ints of
attachment s h a ll not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end.
3 .3 .2 .4 Other types o f transducers may be employed p r o v i
ded they s a t i s f y the c r i t e r i a established in the sections
above.
3.4 Power sup plies.
by the type of deformation transducer used. In a l l cases,
however, th e power supply s h a ll be capable o f providing v o l
tage accurate and sta b le to at le a s t +10 mV.
3.5 Signal c o n d itio n in g and readout devices.
Signal c o n d itio n in g and readout devices may be e i t h e r manuaK
or automatic. Voltmeters s h a ll be capable of reading to 10~
mV. The cumulative e r r o r o f the readout equipment and tra n s
ducers s h a ll meet the requirements of Section 3.3 above.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Sample prepa ratio n.
51 mm) o r la r g e r are recommended. However, in no case sha ll the
core diameter be less than 1 0 times the size o f the la rg e s t
mineral g ra in .
4 .1 .2 Le ngth-to -di ameter r a t i o . /-Cores sh a ll be cut to a length-
to -d ia m e te r r a t i o of 2.0 to 3 . 0 . ^ '
ilSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4. 5)

ASTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4 .1)
D.1-6
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core sha ll be r e la t i v e l y
smooth, fre e o f abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tr a ig h t to w ith in
4 .1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity . The ends o f the sample shall be per
pendicular to the long axis to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 in .
(0.25 mm over 51 mm).
4.1 .5 Paral l e l i sm. The ends, o f the sample sha ll be p a ra lle l
to each o th e r to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness. The ends o f the sample sha ll be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 in .-^’ *^ (0.025 mm).
4.1 .7 Machining. No capping m a te ria ls or end surface t r e a t
ments o th e r than machining s h a ll be applied to the ends o f the
sample. The rock core s h a ll not be degraded during the machining
process. Thermal f r a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by cooling w ith
an ap pro pria te f l u i d . G enerally, water is used f o r hard rock,
but oth er m a te ria ls may re q u ire special f l u i d s , such as saturated
brin e f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin f o r expansive shales.
4 .1 .8 Measurements. The height o f the sample sha ll be measured
a t three equal ly spaced in te r v a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable o f
sh a ll be determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t
angles to each o th e r at the to p , m id-heig ht, and base of the
f sample, using a c a lip e r capable o f measuring to 0 . 0 0 1 in .
(0.025 mm). A ll measurements s h a ll be recorded as shown on
Form L -D .1-1.
4 . 1 .9 Coating. The sample sh a ll be coated to prevent changes
in moisture content during the t e s t . The coating sha ll be
f l e x i b l e , impermeable and s h a ll not penetrate the rock. A
s ilic o n e rubber such as alcohol-based RTV is recommended.
Coatings re q u irin g a heat cure sh a ll not be used. I f s tra in
gages are used as deformation transducers, the gages shall be
applied d i r e c t l y to the rock p r io r to coating. The coating
sh a ll not degrade the s t r a i n gages. Mountings o f other types
o f transducers, i f attached to the rock core i t s e l f , sha ll
penetrate the coating and be in d ir e c t contact w ith the rock.
The ends o f the sample s h a ll not be coated.
4.1 T e stin g .
4.2.1 Alignment. The apparatus s h a ll be assembled so th a t the
0.05 in . (1.25 mm).
4.2 .2 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l deformation readings shall be
taken w ith the sample in the loading frame w ith only the weight
of the load t r a i n above the sample. I f e le c tro n ic transducers
Ja SIM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4 .1)

ÎSRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4 .5)
D.1-7
are used, these s h a ll be allowed to warm up u n t i l readings are
stab le w it h in the li m i t a t i o n s o f the transducer system.
4.2.3 Power requirements. I f e le c tr o n ic transducers are used,
they s h a ll be powered continuously over the du ra tio n o f the t e s t .
4.2 .4 I n i t i a l lo a d in g . Because creep can occur simultaneously
w ith e l a s t i c deform ation, the sample s h a ll be loaded as ra p id ly
as p ra c tic a b le to evaluate the e l a s t i c e f f e c t s . F u ll load
should be achieved w ith in 30 seconds or less i f possible. Im
pact loading s h a ll be avoided.
4 .2 .5 Reading i n t e r v a l s . Deformation readings s h a ll be taken
immediately upon a p p lic a tio n o f the load. The reading schedule
th e r e a fte r depends on the applied stre ss and the type of rock.
For e v a lu a tin g tr a n s ie n t creep, deformation readings should be
taken every few minutes to few hours u n t i l the deformation ra te
becomes con stan t. Readings should be taken at le a s t twice d a ily
during the s te a d y -s ta te phase o f creep.
4.2 .6 Test environment. The temperature o f the t e s t environ
ment s h a ll be constant to 3.6°F (jf2°C). The humidity sha ll be constant
to +5% over the d u ra tio n of the t e s t .
4.2 .7 Data recording requirements. The exact format f o r data
recording w i l l depend on the type o f readout system employed.
However, the in fo rm a tio n shown on Form L -D .1-1, designed f o r
manual data recording, s h a ll be the minimum required. The format
s h a ll fo llo w Form L -D .1-1 as c lo s e ly as possible. I
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum re q u ire
ments f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. F urther d e t a ils may be
added as a p p ro p ria te , and the order o f items may be changed i f neces
sary. The a n a ly sis o f creep behavior i s beyond the scope o f t h i s
procedure, but i f an an a ly sis is included, i t should be complete
and c o n sis te n t w ith the o th e r sections o f t h i s procedure.
The in tr o d u c to ry section is intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the t e s t in g program, and the c h a r a c te r is tic s o f the
5.1.1 Scope o f t e s t in g program.
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te s te d . In a la rg e r report
a t various stress le v e ls , the te s t m a trix is best pre
sented in a ta b u la r form.
D.1-8
the number and type o f samples tested sha ll be c le a rly
stated.
I
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s t in g program. The areas of
in t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
the l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tr u c
tu re and f a b r i c , grain s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s or voids, and
weathering o f the samples sh a ll be described as aminimum. Fur
th e r d e ta il depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the re s u lts , but in
general i s not required. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several
rock types, d e s c rip tio n o f many samples may be required, and
a ta b u la r presentation is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the equip
ment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll be included in the re p o rt.
The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s o f each major
piece s h a ll be l i s t e d .
5.2 .2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t shall
5.2 .3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure varies
from the requirements contained in t h i s procedure, each v a r ia
t io n and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ff e c t o f the
v a r ia tio n upon the t e s t re s u lts sh a ll be discussed.
the data sh a ll be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations and l im it a t io n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll be noted and the e ff e c t on the re s u lts d i s
cussed.
5 .3.2 S it e - s p e c if ic in flu e n c e s .
la b o ra to ry t e s t con d itio n s conform to the assumptions
contained in the data reduction equations sha ll be d i s
cussed.
5 .3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to rs . Any fa c to rs or methods
applied to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n
sh a ll be f u l l y explained.
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Graphic p re s e n ta tio n . A deform ation-time curve s im ila r
to Figure 1.1 sh a ll be presented f o r each creep te s t .
D.1-9
5.4.2 Data. A complete l i s t i n g o f deformation and time data
s h a ll be included in the re p o rt. This may be attached as an
appendix.
5.5 Measurement e r r o r .
The e r r o r associated w ith a s in g le t e s t s h a ll be evaluated at
the 95% confidence le v e l. This includes the combined e ffe c ts
of a l l tra nsdu cers, power sup p lie s, readout devices, etc.

t e s t re s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t o f
t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to iden
t i f y those po in ts du ring the t e s t where Q u a lity Assurance a ctio n is
requi red.
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p r e q u a lifie d as de
6.2 Test in sp e c tio n .
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-0.1-1 sh a ll be reviewed and
signed o f f only i f c o r re c t.
6.3 .1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance
sh a ll maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance s h a ll v e r if y
th a t s e r ia l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are
recorded on Form L -D .1-1.
6 .3 .3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance s h a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f Form L -D .1-1.
D.1-10
Pa. 1
U niaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core

Ambient Temperature
Test Data Sheet - Form L-D.1-1
P ro je ct___ Test Temperature_

Sample No._ Load
Rock Type_
Equipment Date o f
Descri p tio n S e ria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Average Average
Deformation
Date Time iX . Pressure No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Form L-D .1-1 Pg. 2
Deformation
Date Time iZ . Pressure No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Remarks:

I
Q u a lity Assurance_ Date_
P ro je ct Engineer_ Date
Procedure L-D .2
Uniaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core -
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 Objective of t h i s t e s t . The o b je c tiv e o f t h i s t e s t is
to evaluate the time-dependent s t r a in (creep) o f a rock core sample
subjected to a constant u n ia x ia l stress at an elevated temperature.
1.1.2 l i m i t a t i o n s . This procedure does not discuss analysis
of creep data.
fla t. The sample is placed in the loading frame and heated to
the s p e c ifie d temperature. An a x ia l load is applied to the
sample. This load i s held constant f o r the duration o f the
t e s t . Sample deformation is monitored p e r io d ic a lly .
1.3 Data reduction.
1 .3 .1 .1 S tra in - deformation per u n it length o f sample.
1 .3 .1 .2 Load - t o t a l axia l force a ctin g on a sample.
1 .3 .1 .3 Stress - a x ia l force per u n it area o f the sample.
immediately upon loading a sample due to e la s t ic response, as
shown on Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .5 Creep - deformation over time under constant load.
1 . 3 . 1 . 6 Transient creep - i n i t i a l phase o f creep during
which deformation occurs a t a dim inishing ra te , shown on
Figure 1.1.
1.3 .1.7 Steady-state creep - second phase of creep during
which deformation occurs at a constant ra te.
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2 . 1 The axia l s t r a i n , e^, i s calcu la ted using:
(1)
^ a " Tl o
where;
A£ = change in measured axia l length
= o r ig in a l measured ax ia l length
D.2-1
CREEP CREEP^-.
▲
INSTANTANEOUS
DEFORMATION
FIG. 1.1 IDEALIZED CREEP CURVE
D.2-2
1 .3 .2 .2 The axia l s tre s s , i s calcu la ted using:
Oi = j (2 )
where:
A = cro s s -se ctio n a l area o f the sample
1 . 3 . 2 .3 The a n alysis o f rock deformation w ith time is com

plex and non-standard. The user is re ferred to the r e f e r
ences in Section 1.4.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTf'1 , 1978, Test Designation D2938, "Standard Test Method
For Unconfined Compressive Strength o f In ta c t Rock Core Specimens,"
1.4.3 C a rte r, N.L. and K irb y , S .H ., 1978, "Transient Creep and
Semi b r i t t l e Behavior o f C r y s ta llin e Rocks," Pure and Appl.
Geophys., 116.
1.4.4 ISRM Commission on Standardization o f Laboratory and F ie ld
Tests, 1979, "Suggested Methods f o r Determining the Uniaxial
Compressive Strength and Deformabi1i t y o f Rock M a te ria ls ,"
In t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 16, No. 2.
1.4.5 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, Test Standard RTH
205-80, "Standard Method o f Test f o r Creep o f Rock in Compression,
ment S ta tio n , Vicksburg, Miss.
A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , in c lud ing the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, s h a ll be form a lly p re q u a lifie d
o v e ra ll te s tin g program.
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure shall be v e r if ie d .
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the required level of
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is generally done by
c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib ra tio n
and documentation sh a ll be accomplished according to standard
D.2-3
2.3 C rite ria f o r sample s e l e c t i o n .
2.3 .1 P roje ct scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
re p o s ito ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a sin g le form ation.
The f i n a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the tech nical
e va luatio n o f the r e s u lts . Rock types which are hig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s t s than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks to evaluate
the re s u lts w ith equal c e r t a in t y .
2.3 .3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s and nonhomogeneities
in the rock mass, such as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can
s i g n i f i c a n t l y a f f e c t the deformational behavior o f the rock.
These should be sampled and tested to provide an estimate o f t h e i r
e ffe c t.
2 .3 .4 A nisotropy. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be
evaluated by te s t in g cores taken at d i f f e r e n t o r ie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according
3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame con sis ts o f the mechanisms f o r applying load
to the sample, the re a c tio n frame con tainin g the load mechanism,
and the c o n tro l system f o r the load mechanism. The loading
frame s h a ll be constructed to maintain a constant load on the
sample throughout the t e s t to 5 psi (0.03 MPa). The loading
frame may be constructed so th a t several samples can be tested
in p a r a l l e l . However, samples s h a ll not be stacked on each
o th e r f o r creep te s t in g .
3.2 Platens.
The diameter o f the platens s h a ll be equal to or greater than the
sample diameter. Rock m a teria ls which are subject to large
deform ations, such as rock s a lt and some shales, sha ll be tested
using platens sized so th a t the la t e r a l expansion of the sample
does not exceed the platen diameter. The platens shall be
at le a s t 0.625 in . (15.9 mm) t h ic k . The surfaces sha ll be f l a t
to w ith in 0.0002 in , (0.005 mm) and hardened to at le a s t Rockwell
D.2-4
1 7
HRC 58 One o f the two platens shall incorporate a spherical
seat. This platen sha ll be placed above the sample during te s tin g .
3.3 Transducers.
3.3.1 Axial load. An e le c tr o n ic load c e ll is recommended to
measure axia l load on the sample. The c e ll shall be capable of
determining sample stress to an accuracy of at le a s t ^ 2 0 psi
(0.14 MPa), in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by the e x c ita tio n and
readout system, and a re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t 10 psi (0.07 MPa).
A l t e r n a t i v e l y , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic transducer may be
used i f a h y d ra u lic loading system i s employed, provided th a t
the load measurement requirements above are s a t i s f i e d , in clu d in g
the e ffe c ts o f f r i c t i o n in the h yd ra u lic ram, etc.
3.3.2 Deformation. The deformation transducers sha ll have a
re s o lu tio n o f a t^ le a s t 25 x 10" s tr a in and an accuracy o f at
le a s t 50 X 10" s t r a i n , in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by
e x c ita tio n and readout equipment. The transducer system shall
be fre e from noncharacterizable long-term i n s t a b i l i t y ( d r i f t )
g re a te r than 25 x 10" s t r a in . Transducer se le ctio n c r i t e r i a
depend p r im a r ily on the type o f rock and the s tru c tu re w ith in the
sample. Longer gage lengths are recommended f o r coarse-grained
or nonhomogeneous samples. In no case shall the gage length
be less than 1 0 times the diameter o f the la rg e st mineral grain.
3 .3 .2 .1 E le c tr ic a l resistance s tr a in gages shall have a
resistance o f no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts
o f s e l f heating. Two s tr a in gages shall be mounted p a ra lle l
to the long axis o f the core at mid-height of the sample
at opposite ends o f a diameter. These sha ll be connected
in a h a lf Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n to correct fo r
bending. The h a lf Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n shall
be completed w ith two p re c is io n re s is to rs having a temperatur‘>
c o e f f i c i e n t no greater than 0 . 6 x 1 0 " ppm per °F ( 1 x 1 0 "
ppm per °C).
3 .3 .2 .2 Dial gages sha ll be graduated to at le a s t 0.0001 in .
(0.0025 mm) and be accurate to _+ 0.0001 in . (0.0025 mm).
Two d ia l gages shall be mounted across a diameter of the
platen or three at 1 2 0 ° in te r v a ls .
3 .3 .2 .3 Linear v a ria b le d i f f e r e n t i a l transformers (LVDTs)
sh a ll be mounted across a diameter of the sample or platens,
or at 120° i n t e r v a l s , using a non-magnetic attachment. If
they are attached to the sample d i r e c t l y , the points of
attachment sh a ll not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end, where
D i s the sample diameter.
pASTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)

“ÎBRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4.4)
D.2-5
3 .3 .2 .4 Other types o f transducers may be employed provided
they s a t i s f y the c r i t e r i a established in the sections above.
3.3.3 Temperature. The type o f instrument chosen to monitor
temperature depends p r im a r ily on the te s t apparatus and the
maximum t e s t temperature. Special L im its o f E rro r thermocouples
or platinum re sista n c e thermometers (RTD's) are recommended.
The temperature transducer sh a ll be accurate to at le a s t jf0.9°F
(^0.5°C) w ith a re s o lu tio n o f 0.18°F (0.1°C). Temperature shall
be measured a t three lo c a tio n s , w ith one sensor near the top, one
a t m id -h e ig h t, and one near the bottom o f the sample.
3.4 Power sup plies.
by the type o f deformation transducer used. In a l l cases,
however, the power supply s h a ll be capable o f providing voltage
accurate and s ta b le to at le a s t lOmV.
Signal c o n d itio n in g and readout devices may be e it h e r manual or
automatic. Voltmeters s h a ll be capable o f reading to 10" mV.
The cumulative e r r o r o f the readout equipment and transducers
sha ll meet the requirements o f Section 3.3 above.
The heating u n i t s h a ll be capable o f m aintaining a uniform
mean temperature of the sample sh a ll vary by not more than 3.6°F
(2°C) during the t e s t . The heating u n it sh a ll inco rpo rate con
t r o l s so th a t the sample may be heated at a ra te no greate r than
3.6°F (2°C) per minute.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Core s iz e . Rock cores of NX-size (2 in . nominal diameter;
51 mm) or la rg e r are recommended. However, in no case sh a ll the
core diameter be less than 1 0 times the size o f the la rg e s t mineral
gra in .
4.1.2 Length-to-diam eter r a t i o . . Cores sh a ll be cut to a le n g th -
to-diam eter r a t i o o f 2.0 to 3.0. *
4.1.3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core sh a ll be r e la t i v e l y
smooth, fre e of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tr a ig h t to w ith in
hsRM, 1979 (see Ref. 1.4 .4 )

'ÂSTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4 .1 )
D.2-6
4.1 .4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity . The ends o f the sample shall be per
p e ndicular to the longvaxis to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 in .
(0.25 mm over 51 mm)' K
4.1 .5 P a ra lle lis m . The ends o f the sample $h4 l 1 be p a ra lle l
to each o th e r to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.005 mm)^
4 .1 .6 Flatness. Theêqds o f the sample sha ll be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 in . (0.025 mm)^^’ ^''.
4 .1 .7 Machining. No capping m a teria ls or end surface treatments
o th e r than machining s h a ll be applied to the ends o f the sample.
The rock core sh a ll not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal fr a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by cooling w ith an appro
p r ia te f l u i d . G enerally, water is used f o r hard rock, but
o th e r m a te ria ls may re q u ire special f l u i d s , such as saturated
brin e f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin f o r expansive shales.
4 .1 .8 Measurement. The height o f the sample sha ll be measured
at three eq ually spaced in te r v a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable o f
measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter o f the specimen
s h a ll be determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t
angles to each oth er at the to p , m id-height, and base of the
sample, using a c a lip e r capable of measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
A ll measurements s h a ll be recorded as shown on Form L-D.2-1.
4.2 Testing.
4.2 .1 Alignment. The apparatus sh a ll be assembled so th a t the
0.05 in . (1.27 mm).
4 .2 .2 Heating ra te . The sample sh a ll be heated to the t e s t temper
atu re at a ra te not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute to prevent
thermal fr a c t u r in g .
4 .2 .3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The t e s t sample sh a ll be considered
to have a tta in e d thermal e q u ilib riu m when the deformation tra n s
ducer output is stable f o r at le a s t three readings taken at
equal in te r v a ls over a period o f no less than 30 minutes.
S t a b i l i t y i s defined as a constant reading showing only the e ffe c ts
of normal instrument and heater u n it flu c tu a tio n s .
4.2 .4 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l deformation readings shall be
taken w ith the sample in the loading frame and only the weight
of the load t r a i n above the sample. I f e le c tro n ic transducers
are used, these sh a ll be allowed to warm up u n t il readings are
s tab le w ith in the l i m i t a t i o n s o f the transducer system.
4.2 .5 Power requirements. I f e le c tro n ic transducers are used,
they s h a ll be powered continuously over the duration of the t e s t .
Ja STI^, 19 78 ( s e e R e f . 1.4.1)
ÎSRM, 1979 ( s e e R e f . 1.4.4)
D.2-7
4.2 .6 I n i t i a l loading. Because creep can occur simultaneously
w ith e l a s t i c deform ation, the sample sh a ll be loaded as ra p id ly
as p r a c tic a b le to evaluate the e l a s t i c e ff e c ts . F u ll load
should be achieved in 30 seconds o r less i f p o ssible. Impact
loading s h a ll be avoided.
4.2 .7 Reading in t e r v a ls . Deformation readings s h a ll be taken
t h e r e a fte r depends on the applied stre s s and the type o f rock.
For e va luatin g tr a n s ie n t creep, deformation readings should
be taken every few minutes to few hours u n t i l the deformation
ra te becomes constant. Readings should be taken a t le a s t tw ice
d a ily during the s te a d y -s ta te phase o f creep.
4 .2 .8 Test environment. The temperature o f the t e s t en viron
ment sh a ll be constant to 3.6°F 2°C).
However, the in fo rm a tio n shown on Form L-D.2-1, designed f o r
manual data re cord in g, s h a ll be the minimum re q u ire d , and the
format s h a ll fo llo w Form L-D.2-1 as c lo s e ly as possible.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. F u rthe r d e ta ils may be added
as a p p ro p ria te , and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary.
The an alysis o f creep behavior i s beyond the scope o f the procedure,
but i f an a n alysis is includ ed , i t should be complete and con s iste n t
w ith the oth er sections o f t h i s procedure.
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section o f the re p o rt.
purpose o f the te s t in g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s o.' the
m aterial te ste d .
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te ste d . In a large report
covering the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, or
at several stre s s le v e ls , or temperatures, the t e s t m atrix
i s best presented in a ta b u la r form.
the number and types o f samples tested s h a ll be c le a r ly
stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas o f
i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n of the samples. The rock type, s tru c tu re
and f a b r i c , gra in s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s or voids, and weathering
D .2-8
of the samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the re s u lts , but in general is not
required. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several rock types,
d e s c rip tio n of many samples may be necessary and a ta b u la r
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the
equipment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sha ll be included in the
re p o rt. The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s
o f each major piece s h a ll be l i s t e d .
5.2.2 Procedures. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the te s t
s h a l 1 be l i s t e d in d e ta ile d steps.
varied from the requirements contained in t h i s procedure, each
v a r ia tio n and the reasons f o r i t sha ll be discussed. The e ff e c t
of the v a r ia tio n upon the t e s t re s u lts sha ll be discussed.
the data s h a ll be d e a r l y presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations and lim it a t io n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s sh a ll be noted and the e ffe c t on the re s u lts
discussed.
5.3.2 S i t e - s p e c if ic influ ence s.
la b o ra to ry t e s t con d itio n s conform to the assumptions
contained in the data reduction equations sha ll be discussed.
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n sha ll be
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Graphic p re se n ta tio n . A deformation-time curve s im ila r
to Figure 1.1 sh a ll be presented f o r each creep te s t .
5.4.2 Data. A complete l i s t i n g o f deformation, temperature,
and time data sh a ll be included in the re port. This may be
attached as an appendix.
The e r r o r associated w ith a s in g le t e s t shall be evaluated at
of a l l transducers, power s up plies, readout devices, e tc .
6.0 Q ua lity Assurance
te s t re s u lts are defendable and tra ceab le. I t is not the in te n t of
D.2-9
t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to
I d e n t if y those p o in ts during the t e s t where Q u a lity Assurance a c tio n
Is required.
6.1 Personnel prequal1f i c a t i o n .
In Section 2.1.
6.2 Test In sp e c tio n .
procedure, and the equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . A f t e r
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-D.2-1 sh a ll be reviewed and signed
o f f only 1 f c o r re c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q ua lity Assurance
s h a ll m aintain complete c a l i b r a t i o n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3 .2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance sha ll v e r if y
th a t s e r ia l numbers o f a l l equipment used In the t e s t are recorded
on Form L-D.2-1.
6.3 .3 Test s ig n - o ffs . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain s ig n e d -o ff
copies o f L-D.2-1.
D.2-10
Pg. 1
U niaxial Compressive Creep o f Rock Core

P roje ct___ Test Temperature_

Sample No. Load
Rock Type
Equi pment Date o f

D escrip tion S e ria l No. C a lib ra tio n
I n i t i a l Sample Dimensions:
Sample Height ___________ Sample Diameter
Average Average
Deformati on
Date Time By Pressure Mo. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Form L- D.2-1
Pg. 2
Deformati on
Date Time By Pressure No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Remarks:
Test Supervisor___________________________ Date_

Q u a lity Assurance_________________________ Date_
P roje ct Engineer__________________________ Date
Procedure L -D .3
T r ia x ia l Compressive Creep of Rock Core -

1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . The o b je c tiv e of t h is t e s t Is
to evaluate the time-dependent s t r a in (creep) o f a rock core
sample subjected to a constant t r i a x i a l stress.
A rock core sample Is cut to le n g th , and the ends are machined
fla t. The sample Is placed In a t r i a x i a l load c e l l . A co n fin in g
pressure and an axia l load are applied to the sample, and the
sample Is heated to the desired t e s t temperature. The load and
temperature are held constant f o r the duration o f the te s t .
Sample deformation Is monitored p e r io d ic a lly . An Idealized
deformation versus time curve Is shown In Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .1 S tra ln - deformation per u n it length of sample.
1 .3 .1 .2 Load - t o t a l axia l force acting on a sample.
1 .3 .1 .3 Stress - a x ia l force per u n it area of the sample.
1 .3 .1 .4 Confining pressure - pressure applied r a d ia lly to
the core.
Immediately upon loading sample due to e la s t ic response,
as shown on Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .6 Creep - deformation w ith time under constant load.
1.3 .1.7 Transient creep - I n i t i a l phase of creep during
which deformation occurs at a dim inishing ra te , as shown on
Figure 1.1.
1 .3 .1 .8 S teady-state creep - second phase o f creep during
which deformation occurs at a constant ra te , as shown on
Figure 1.1.
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3 .2.1 The axia l s t r a i n , e , . Is calcu la ted using:
a
AL , ,
â = T- (1 )
D.3-1
CREEP CREEP^
▲
INSTANTANEOUS
DEFORMATION
FIG. 1.1 IDEALIZED CREEP CURVE
D.3-2
where:
AL = change in measured axia l length
Lq = o r ig in a l measured axial length
1 .3 .2 .2 The axia l s tre s s , a ^ is calcu la ted using:
Oi = j (2 )
where:
A = cro ss -s e c tio n a l area of the sample
1 .3 .2 .3 The an a lys is of rock deformation w ith time is complex

and nonstandard. The user is re fe rre d to the references in
Section 1.4.
1.4 References.
fo r T r ia x ia l Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core Specimens
w ithout Pore Pressure Measurements." Annual Book o f ASTM Stan-
a rd s , Part 19.
1.4.3 C a rte r, N.L. and K irb y , S .H ., 1978, "Transient Creep and
S e m ib rittle Behavior o f C r y s ta llin e Rocks," Pure and Appl.
Geophys., 116.
I s o la tio n , B a t t e lle Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
Tests, 1978, "Suggested Method f o r Determining the Strength of
Rock M a te ria ls in T r ia x ia l Compression." I n t . J. of Rock Mech.
Min. Sci. and Geomech. A b s t r . , 15, No. 2.
1.4.6 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, Test Standard RTH
205-80, "Standard Method of Test fo r Creep of Rock in Compres
s io n ," Rock Testing Handbook, Geotechnical Laboratory, Waterways
Experiment S ta tio n , Vicksburg, MI.
2.0 P rere q u is ite s

A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , in clud ing the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sh a ll be fo rm a lly p re q u a lifie d
under the Q ua lity Assurance procedures established as part of
The compliance of a l l equipment and apparatus w ith performance
D.3-3
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be v e r i
fie d . I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, the manu
fa c t u r e r 's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment sh a ll be the re
quired level of performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is
ge nerally done by c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement
systems. C a lib r a tio n and documentation sh a ll be accomplished
2.3.1 P roject scope. The number and type o f rock cores tested
depends p a r t ly on the intended a p p lic a tio n of the t e s t r e s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n of the s i t e
a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate re p o s i
to ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le form ation. The
f in a l te s t in g program w i l l depend h e a vily on the technical judg
ment and experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
e v a luatio n o f the re s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rock to evaluate
the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n t in u itie s and nonhomogeneities
in the rock mass, such as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , voids, e t c . , can
s i g n i f i c a n t l y a f f e c t the deformational behavior of the rock.
These should be sampled and tested to provide an estimate o f
th e ir e ffe c t.
2.3.4 A n iso tro p y. Anisotropy in the rock mass should be evalu
ated by te s t in g cores taken at d i f f e r e n t o r ie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Preservation of moisture c o n d itio n of samples.
The moisture c o n d itio n o f the rock can in flu e n c e the measured
deformation. The rock core should be preserved between the time
of recovery and t e s t in g as described in Procedure GT-A.4, "Hand
lin g and Storage of Rock Core Samples", see Ref. 1.4.4.
2.5 Documentation.

3.1 Loading frame.
The loading frame con sists of the mechanism f o r applying the
axial load to the sample, the re a c tio n frame containing the load
mechanism, and the c o n tro l system f o r the load mechanism. The
loading frame sh a ll be constructed to maintain a constant axia l
load on the sample throughout the t e s t to psi (0.03 MPa). The
loading frame may be constructed so th a t several samples can be
tested in p a r a l l e l . However, samples sha ll not be stacked on top
of each oth er f o r creep te s tin g .
D.3-4
3,2 Tr1ax1aT c o n fin in g chamber.
The c o n fin in g chamber c o n s ists o f a hollow c y lin d e r and end caps
to contain the c o n fin in g f l u i d , platens to support the sample,
and a f l e x i b l e impermeable membrane to cover the sample during
t e s t i ng.
3.2.1 C ylin d e r and end caps. The c e ll design shall be such th a t
changes in c o n fin in g pressure do not d i r e c t l y cause changes in
axia l load and vice versa.
3.2.2 P latens. The diameter o f the platens shall be equal t o , or
gre a te r than, the diameter o f the sample. Rock m aterials which
and some shales, s h a ll be tested using platens sized so th a t the
la t e r a l expansion o f the sample does not exceed the platen d ia - ,
meter. The platens s h a ll be at le a s t 0.625 in . (15.9 mm) th ic k .
The surfaces s h a ll be f l a t to w ith in Q.Q002 in . (0.05 mm) and
hardened to at le a s t Rockwell HRC 58. ’ One o f the two platens
sh a ll inco rpo rate a spherical seat. This platen sha ll be placed
above the sample during t e s t in g .
3.2 .3 F le x ib le , impermeable membrane. This membrane encloses
the rock sample and prevents p e netratio n by the co n fin in g f l u i d .
G enerally, a sleeve o f natural or sy n th e tic rubber or p la s tic
polymer is used; however, copper or lead jackets are sometimes
used. The membrane s h a ll be i n e r t r e la tiv e to the con fining
f l u i d , and s h a ll cover small pores in the sample w ithout rup
tu r in g when c o n fin in g pressure is applied. P la s tic or s ilic o n e
rubber coatings may be applied d i r e c t l y to the sample, providing
these m a te ria ls do not penetrate and strengthen the sample. The
ends o f the sample sh a ll not be coated, and care must be taken
to form an e f f e c t iv e seal where the platen and sample meet.
Membranes formed by coatings s h a ll be subject to the same per
formance requirements as e l a s t i c sleeve membranes.
3.3 C onfining pressure system.
The c o n fin in g pressure system con sists o f the pressurizing f l u i d
and the means o f applying pressure. The p re s su riz a tio n system
sh a ll be capable of m aintaining the co n fin in g pressure constant
to w it h in +1% throughout the t e s t .
3.4 Transducers.
Transducers are required to determine the axia l load on the sample,
the c o n fin in g pressure, the deform ation, and the temperature.
3.4.1 Axial load. An e le c tr o n ic load c e ll is recommended to
measure axia l load on the sample. The c e ll shall have an accuracy
of at le a s t j^lOO lb (jf45.4 kg ), in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by
the e x c ita tio n and readout system, and a re s o lu tio n of at le a s t
50 lb (22.7 kg). A lt e r n a t i v e l y , a pressure gage or e le c tro n ic
I ISRM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4 .5 )

ASTM, 1978, (see Ref. 1.4 .1)
D.3-5
transducer may be used i f a h y d ra u lic loading system i s employed,
provided th a t the load measurement requirements above are s a t i s
f i e d , in c lu d in g the e f f e c ts o f f r i c t i o n in the h yd ra u lic ram, etc.
3.4.2 C onfining pressure. The c o n fin in g pressure shall be
measured w ith a h y d ra u lic pressure gage or e le c tr o n ic tra n s
ducer having an accuracy o f at le a s t _+!% o f the co n fin in g pres
sure, in c lu d in g e rro rs due to readout equipment, and a re s o lu tio n
of at le a s t 0.5% o f the c o n fin in g pressure.
3.4.3 Deformation. The deformation transducers sha ll have a
re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t 25 x 10 s tr a in and an accuracy o f at
le a s t j^50 x 1 0 s t r a i n , in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by e x c ita
t i o n and readout equipment. The transducer system sh a ll be fre e
from noncharacterizable long-term i n s t a b i l i t y ( d r i f t ) greater than
25 X 1Q~ s t r a i n . Transducer s e le c tio n c r i t e r i a depend p r im a r ily
on the type o f rock and the s tru c tu re w ith in the sample. Longer
gage lengths are recommended f o r coarse-grained or nonhomogeneous
samples. In no case s h a ll the gage length be less than 10 times
the diameter o f the la rg e s t mineral g ra in .
3 .4 .3 .1 E le c t r ic a l re sistance s tr a in gages sha ll have a
re sistance o f no less than 350 ohms to avoid the e ffe c ts
o f s e l f heating. An ax ia l and a c irc u m fe re n tia l gage sh a ll
be mounted a t m id-height o f the sample on each end of a
diameter. The two axia l gages sh a ll be connected in a h a lf
Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n to c o rre c t fo r bending. The
two c irc u m fe re n tia l gages s h a ll be wired in a s im ila r con
f i g u r a t i o n . Each h a l f Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n sha ll
be completed w ith two p re c isio n re s is to r s having a tempera
tu re c o e f f i c i e n t no greate r than 1 x 10" ppm/°C.
3 .4 .3 .2 Dial gages sh a ll be graduated to at le a s t 0.0001
in . (0.0025 mm) and be accurate to at le a s t +^0.0001 in .
(0.0025 mm). Two d ia l gages sh a ll be mounted across a d ia
meter of the sample or p la te n , or three at 1 2 0 ° in te r v a ls .
attachment sh a ll not be w ith in 0 / 2 o f the sample end, where
3 .4 .3 .3 Linear v a ria b le d i f f e r e n t i a l t r a n s f o r m e r s (LVDTs)
sh a ll be mounted across a diameter or at 1 2 0 ° in te rv a ls
on the sample or platens using a nonmagnetic attachment.
attachment sh a ll not be w ith in D/2 o f the sample end, where
3 .4 .3 .4 Radial deformation may be measured with a volum etric
apparatus ( d i 1atometec). This device sh a ll have a re s o lu tio n
o f at le a s t 0.002 in . (32.8 mm ) and an accuracy of at le a st
0.5% o f the ra d ia l s t r a in o f the sample.
3 .4 .3 .5 Other types o f deformation transducers, such as the
D.3-6
3.4 .4 Temperature. The type of instrument chosen to monitor
temperature depends p r im a r ily on the t e s t apparatus and the
maximum t e s t temperature. Special l i m i t s o f e r r o r thermocouples
o r platinum re sistance thermometers (RTDs) are recommended.
The temperature transducer sh a ll be accurate to at le a s t +^0.9°F
(+_0.5°C) w ith a re s o lu tio n of 0 . 18°F (0.1°C). Temperature shall
be measured a t three lo c a tio n s , w ith one sensor near the top,
one at m id -h e ig h t, and one near the bottom o f the sample.
3.5 Power supply.
by the type of deformation transducer used. In a l l cases, how
ever, the power supply sh a ll be capable of providing voltage
accurate and sta b le to at le a s t _+10 mV.
Signal c o n d itio n in g and readout devices may be e ith e r manual or
automatic. Voltmeters sh a ll be capable o f reading to 10~ mV.
The cumulative e r r o r o f the readout equipment and transducers
s h a ll meet the requirements o f Section 3.4 above.
The heating u n i t shall be capable o f maintaining a uniform
mean temperature o f the sample s h a ll vary by not more than 3.6°F
(2°C) during the t e s t . The heating u n it sha ll incorporate
c o n tro ls so th a t the sample may be heated at a ra te no greater
than 3.6°F (2°C) per minute.
4.0 Procedure
4.1 .1 Core s iz e . Rock cores o f NX size (2 in . nominal diameter;
core diameter ê less than 1 0 times the size of the larg est
mineral g ra in .
4 .1 .2 Length-to-diam eter r a t i o . . Cores shall be cut to a length-
to-diam eter r a t i o of 2 . 0 to 3.0^ ’
4 .1 .3 Smoothness. The sides o f the core shall be r e la t i v e l y
smooth, fre e of abrupt i r r e g u l a r i t i e s and s tr a ig h t to w ith in
4.1.4 P e rp e n d ic u la rity . The ends o f the sample shall be per
pendicular t ^ the long axis to w ith in 0.01 in . over 2 in . (0.25 mm
over 51 mm).
4.1 .4 P a ra lle lis m . The ends o f the sample sha ll be p a r a lle l to
each oth e r to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.05 mm).
4.1.6 Flatness. The,eqds o f the sample shall be f l a t to w ith in
0.001 in . (0.025 mm).-^’ ^
P ASTM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.1)

ISRM, 1978 (see Ref. 1.4.4)
D.3-7
4.1 .7 Machining. No capping m a teria ls or end surface t r e a t
ments o th e r than machining s h a ll be applied to the ends o f the
sample. The rock core s h a ll not be degraded during the machining
process. Thermal f r a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by cooling w ith
an ap pro p ria te f l u i d , G enerally, water is used f o r hard rock,
but o th e r m a te ria ls may re q u ire special f l u i d s , such as satu
rated b rin e f o r s a lt o r g ly c e rin f o r expansive shales.
4.1 .8 Measurements. The height o f the sample s h a ll be measured
at three e q u a lly spaced in t e r v a ls w ith a c a lip e r capable o f
measuring to 0 . 0 0 1 in . (0.025 mm). The diameter o f the specimen
sh a ll be determined by averaging two diameters measured at r ig h t
angles to each o th e r a t the to p , m id -h e ig h t, and base o f the
sample, using a c a lip e r capable o f measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
A ll measurements s h a ll be recorded as shown on Form L-D.3-1.
4.1 .9 Voids. Large voids in the sides o f the sample, such as
v e s ic le s , may be f i l l e d w ith p a r a f f in , p la s t i c or s im ila r
m aterial to provide support f o r the f l e x i b l e membrane. Such
f i l l i n g m aterial s h a ll not penetrate the rock and s h a ll have an
e la s t i c modulus no g re a te r than 1 0 % o f the in t a c t rock modulus.
4.1.10 Coating. The sample sh a ll be coated to prevent changes
in m oisture content during the t e s t and to prevent p e n e t r a t i o n
o f the c o n fin in g pressure f l u i d . The coating s h a ll be f l e x i b l e ,
impermeable and s h a ll not penetrate the rock. A s ilic o n e rubber
such as alcoho 1-based RTV i s recommended. Coatings re q u irin g a
heat cure s h a ll not be used. I f s tr a in gages are used as d e fo r
mation transducers, the gages s h a ll be applied d i r e c t l y to the
rock p r io r to coa ting. The coating sh a ll not degrade the s tr a in
gages. Mountings o f o th e r types o f transducers, i f attached to
rock core i t s e l f , s h a ll penetrate the coating and be in d ir e c t
contact w ith the rock. The ends o f the sample sh a ll not be
coated.
4.2 T e s tin g .
4.2.1 Alignment. The apparatus sh a ll be assembled so th a t the
0.05 in . (1.25 mm).
4 .2 .2 Heating r a t e . The sample s h a ll be heated to the t e s t
temperature at a ra te not to exceed 3.6°F (2°C) per minute to
prevent thermal f r a c t u r in g .
4 .2 .3 Thermal e q u ilib r iu m . The t e s t sample sh a ll be considered
to have a tta in e d thermal e q u ilib riu m when the deformation tr a n s
ducer output is stable f o r at le a s t three readings taken at equal
in te r v a ls over a period o f no less than 30 minutes. S t a b i l i t y
i s defined as a constant reading showing only the e ffe c ts o f
normal instrument and heater u n it flu c tu a tio n s .
D.3-8
4 .2 .4 I n i t i a l readings. I n i t i a l deformation readings shall be
taken w ith the sample in the loading frame w ith only the weight
o f the load t r a i n above the sample. I f e le c tro n ic transducers
are used, these sha ll be allowed to warm up u n t i l readings are
stab le w ith in the l i m i t a t i o n s o f the transducer system.
4.2 .5 Power requirements. I f e le c tr o n ic transducers are used,
they s h a ll be powered continuously oyer the duration o f the t e s t .
4.2 .6 I n i t i a l loa d in g . Because creep can occur simultaneously
w ith e l a s t i c deform ation, the sample sha ll be loaded to the
desired c o n fin in g pressure and a x ia l load as ra p id ly as p r a c t i
cable to evaluate the e l a s t i c e ff e c ts . F u ll load should be achieved
w ith in 30 seconds or less i f possible. Impact loading shall be
avoided.
4.2 .7 Reading i n t e r v a l s . Deformation readings shall be taken
th e r e a fte r depends on the applied ra dial and axia l stress and the
type o f rock. For e v a lu a tin g tr a n s ie n t creep, deformation readings
should be taken every few minutes to few hours u n t i l the deforma
t io n ra te becomes constant. Readings should be taken at lea st
tw ice d a ily during the stea dy-state phase o f creep.
4 .2 .8 Test environment. The temperature o f the te s t environ-
ment shal 1 be constant to +_3.6°F (2°C).
However, the in fo rm a tio n shown on Form L-D.3-1, designed fo r
manual data recording, s h a ll be the minimum required. The
format s h a ll fo llo w Form L-D.3-1 as c lo s e ly as possible.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section i s to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. Further d e ta ils may be added as
The an alysis o f creep behavior is beyond the scope o f t h is procedure,
but i f an a n alysis is included, i t should be complete and consistent
w ith the oth er sections o f t h i s procedure.
purpose of the te s t in g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s o f the
5.1.1 Scope o f te s tin g program.
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples tested. In a la rg e r report
a t various stress le v e ls , the t e s t m atrix is best pre
sented in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons fo r
the number and type of samples tested sha ll be c le a rly
stated.
D.3-9
i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the t e s t in g program and
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock ty p e , s tru c tu re
and f a b r i c , gra in s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s o r voids, and weathering
of the samples sh a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lt s , but in general is not
required. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several rock types,
d e s c rip tio n o f many samples may be re quire d, and a ta b u la r pre
s entation i s recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the equip-
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t
shal 1 be 1 is te d in d e ta ile d steps.
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure varies
from the requirements contained in t h i s procedure, each v a r ia
t io n and the reasons f o r i t sh a ll be noted. The e ff e c t o f the
v a r ia tio n upon the t e s t re s u lts s h a ll be discussed.
5.3 Th eoretical background.
the data s h a ll be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any
assumptions inherent in the equations and l i m i t a t i o n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll be noted and the e f f e c t on the r e s u lts d i s
cussed. ,
5 .3 .2 .1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual la b
o ra to ry t e s t c o n d itio n s conform to the assumptions contained
in the data reduction equations sh a ll be discussed.
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a nonideal s it u a t io n sha ll be
5.4 R esu lts.
5.4.1 Graphic p re s e n ta tio n . A deform ation-tim e curve s im ila r
to Figure 1.1 sh a ll be presented f o r each creep t e s t .
5.4.2 Data. A complete l i s t i n g o f deformation and time data
sha ll be included in the re p o rt. This may be attached as an
appendix.
The e r r o r associated w ith a s in g le t e s t sh a ll be evaluated at
of a l l transducers, power su p p lie s, readout devices, etc.
D .3-10
t e s t r e s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t of
t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t where Q uality Assurance action is
requi red.
6 . 1 Personnel p r e q u a l i f i c a t i o n .
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p re q u a lifie d as de
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the te s t setup, the
te s t in g , the completed Form L-D.3-1 sha ll be reviewed and signed
o f f only i f c o r re c t.
sha ll maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q ua lity Assurance shall v e r if y
th a t s e ria l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are
recorded on Form L-D.3-1.
6 .3.3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies of Form L-D .3-1.
D.3-11
pg. 1
T r ia x ia l Compressive Creep o f Rock Core

! • Elevated Temperature
Project ____________________________ Rock Type

Sample No. _________________________

D e s c rip tio n S eria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Sample H e ig h t ____________ Sample Diameter
Average ____________ Average
Temp. Confining Axial Deformation

Date Time By °C Pressure Load No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Form L-D.3-1 pg. 2
Temp. Confining A xial Deformation

Date Time By °C Pressure Load No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
Remarks:
Test S u p e rv is o r________________________________ Date

Q ua lity Assurance ______________________________ Date
P roject E n g in e e r_______________________________ Date
Procedure L -E .1
Thermal Expansion o f Laboratory Rock Samples
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . The te s t measures the s tr a in In a
rock sample caused by changing the temperature o f the sample.
The c o e f f i c i e n t of thermal expansion Is calcu la ted from t h i s data.
1.1.2 Methods. This procedure discusses two methods o f measuring
thermal expansion, using d lla to m e te rs and s tr a in gages. The
d lla to m e te r method has a longer h is to r y and can measure s tra in s at
higher temperatures. The s t r a in gage method Is simpler to perform
and can be e a s ily used to evaluate the anisotropy o f thermal pro
p e rtie s In a s in g le sample.
1 .1 .3 .1 This procedure measures thermal expansion In
unstressed samples o n ly. The s tr a in gage method may be used
w ith s u ita b le p re s s u rlz a tlo n equipment to determine the
thermal expansion p ro p e rtie s at elevated stress le v e ls .
1 . 1 .3 . 2 This te s t procedure measures thermal expansion
over the temperature range from cryogenic to approximately
2200®F (1200°C), depending on equipment l im it a t io n s .
1.2.1 D lla to m e te r method. A rock core sample Is cut to length
and the ends are machined f l a t . The sample Is placed In a
d lla to m e te r and heated o r cooled to a spe cifie d temperature.
S tra in Is measured and thermal expansion Is c a lcu la ted .
1.2.2 S tra in gage method. S tra in gages are attached to a rock
sample and a standard sample o f known thermal p ro p e rtie s . The
two specimens are placed In an oven/cooler and heated or cooled
to the s p e c ifie d temperature. The d i f f e r e n t i a l s tra in between
the specimens Is measured and the c o e f f ic ie n t o f thermal expansion
of the rock Is c a lc u la te d .
1.3 Data reduction.
1 .3 .1 .1 Linear thermal expansion - the change In length
per u n it length r e s u ltin g from a change In the temperature
of the sample.
E.1-1
1.3.2 Equations - d lla to m e te r method.
1 .3 .2 .1 The l i n e a r thermal s t r a i n , i s c a lcu la te d using:
( 1)
where:
AL = change in sample length
Lq = o r ig in a l sample length
= thermal s t r a in o f d lla to m e te r.
1 .3 .2 . 2 The l i n e a r thermal s t r a in o f the d lla to m e te r, is

c a lc u la te d using:
^ d = T ^ -^ s (2)
os
where:
AL = change in standard length
Los = o r ig in a l standard length
e = c a lc u la te d thermal s t r a in o f standard,
s
The d e ta ils o f d lla to m e te r c a lib r a t io n are discussed in
Section 4 .2 .1 .
1 .3 .2 .3 The mean c o e f f i c i e n t o f li n e a r thermal expansion,
i s c a lc u la te d using:
a■m
„ A ( 3)
where:
Ae I = change in s t r a in in the sample between temperatures
T j and Tg
AT = d iffe re n c e between temperatures T^ and T2 .
1 .3 .2 .4 The instantaneous c o e f f i c i e n t o f li n e a r thermal

e x p a n s io n ,a j, i s c a lc u la te d by:
a T - YT
E.1-2
where:
9eL
= slope o f the s t r a in - temperature curve at
any p o in t.
1 .3 .2 .5 I f the rock sample is assumed to be homogeneous and
i s o t r o p i c , the c o e f f i c i e n t o f volum etric thermal expansion, a ,
may be calcu la ted using:
a y = (5)
where:
a.^ = c o e f f i c i e n t o f l i n e a r thermal expansion calcu la ted
from e i t h e r Equation 3 or 4.
1.3.3 Equations - s t r a i n gage method.

1 .3 .3 .1 The mean c o e f f i c i e n t o f li n e a r thermal expansion, a^,
i s c a lc u la te d using:
where:
AU = change in d i f f e r e n t i a l s tr a in between sample and
reference m aterial over the temperature range
T^ to T2
AT = d iffe re n c e between temperatures Tj^ and T2
a = mean c o e f f i c i e n t o f li n e a r expansion of the
reference m aterial over the temperature range
-Tj^ to T2 .
1 .3 .3 . 2 The instantaneous c o e f f i c i e n t o f lin e a r thermal

expansion, O j , is c a lc u la te d using:
^ /7N
T " -aT “ rT
where:
3U
g-y = slope o f the d i f f e r e n t i a l s t r a in vs. temperature
curve a t temperature T
a ^ j = instantaneous c o e f f i c i e n t o f lin e a r thermal ex
pansion o f the reference m aterial at temperature T.
1 .3 .3 .3 The c o e f f i c i e n t o f volum etric thermal expansion, a ^
is c a lc u la te d using:
V ^Lx '^ L y
E.1-3
where:
a, , a, , a. = c o e f f ic ie n t s o f l i n e a r thermal ex-
^ ^ pansion calcu la te d by Equation 6 or
7 in the x , y , and z d ir e c tio n s ,
r e s p e c tiv e ly .
I f the rock sample is homogeneous and i s o t r o p i c . Equation 8
reduces to Equation 5.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, Test Designation E 228, "Standard Method o f Tests
f o r Lin e a r Thermal Expansion o f R igid S olids w ith a Vitreous
S i li c a D ila to m e te r," Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 30.
Mechanics Testing Manual, OMWI-310, O ffic e o f Nuclear Waste
I s o la t io n , B a tte l!e Memorial I n s t i t u t e , Columbus, OH.
1.4.3 Micro-Measurements, 1976, "Temperature-Induced Apparent
S tra in and Gage Factor V a ria tio n in S tra in Gages," Tech Note
TN-128-2, Measurements Group, Raleigh, N.C.
1.4 .4 R ic h te r, S ., and Simmons, G ., 1974, "Thermal Expansion
Behavior o f Igneous Rocks," I n t . J. Rock Mech. Min. Sci and
Geomech. A b s t r . , 11.
1.4.5 U.S. Bureau o f Mines, 1974, "Thermal Expansion", Bureau
of Mines Test Procedures f o r Rocks, Inform ation C irc u la r IC 8628.
Technicians and Test Supervisor, s h a ll be fo rm a lly p r e q u a lifie d
s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be v e r if ie d .
I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0 , the m anufacturer's
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment sh a ll be the required level o f
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is ge nerally done by
c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib r a tio n
and documentation s h a ll be accomplished according to standard
depend p a r t l y on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the te s t r e s u lts .
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f form ations.
E.1-4
w hile a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n of a candidate
re p o s ito ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a sing le formation.
The f i n a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the technical
judgment and experience o f p r o je c t personnel.
must be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r
e va luatio n o f the r e s u lts . Rock types which are hig hly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order
to evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u tie s in the rock mass, such
as j o i n t s , in c lu s io n s , void s, e t c . , can influ ence the thermal
expansion of the rock. These should be sampled and tested to
provide an estimate o f t h e i r e f f e c t .
2.4 Moisture c o n d itio n o f samples.
The moisture c o n d itio n o f the rock can influ ence the measured
thermal expansion. I t is recommended th a t samples be tested
in both natural and dry c o n d itio n s . For natural c o n d itio n s, the
moisture content o f the rock core sh a ll be preserved between
the time o f recovery and t e s t in g as described in Procedure GT-A.4,
"Handling and Storage o f Rock Core Samples," see Ref. 1.4.2.
2.5 Documentation.
3.1 Di lato m ete r method.
3.1.1 Di lato m ete r. The d ila to m e te r holds the sample in p o s itio n
and tra n s fe rs thermal expansion to the measurement transducer
by means o f a rod. The d ila to m e te r may also contain mountings
f o r thermocouples and the tube furnace.' A d ila to m e te r constructed
of a m aterial w ith a low c o e f f i c i e n t o f thermal expansion,
such as fused q u a rtz , is recommended. The d ila to m e te r sha ll be
capable o f measuring both p o s itiv e and negative s tra in s .
3.1.2 Displacement transducer. The displacement transducer
measures the thermal expansion o f the sample. The transducer
shall have an accuracy o f no less than 50 x 10” s t r a in ,
in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by readout equipment, and a re s o lu tio n
of at le a s t 20 x 10” s t r a i n . Mechanical d ia l gages, lin e a r
v a ria b le d i f f e r e n t i a l tra nsfo rm ers, in te rfe ro m e te rs , or other types
o f transducers are s a tis fa c to r y i f they s a t is f y the above
requi rements.
3.1.3 Heating u n i t . The heating u n it sha ll be capable of
m aintaining a uniform temperature throughout the sample to w ith in
3 . 6 °F (2°C). The u n it sh a ll incorporate co n tro ls so th a t the
E.1-5
sample may be heated o r cooled a t a ra te not gre a te r than 3.6°F
(2°C) per minute. The heating u n i t sh a ll be capable o f main
ta in in g the mean temperature o f the sample to w ith in 3.6°F (2°C).
3.1.4 Temperature transducer. The instrument chosen to monitor
temperature depends p r im a r ily on the te s t apparatus and the
maximum t e s t temperature. Special L im its o f E rro r thermocouples
o r platinum re sistance thermometers (RTDs) are recommended.
T h e t e m p e r a t u r e t r a n s d u c e r s h a l l b e a c c u r a t e t o a t l e a s t + 0.9°F
(jf 0.5°C) w i t h a r e s o l u t i o n o f a t l e a s t 0.18®F (0.1°C). T w o
t r a n s d u c e r s s h a l l be m o u n te d on t h e s a m p le , o n e n e a r e a c h e n d .
3.1.5 C a lib r a tio n standard. The length o f the c a lib r a t io n
standard s h a ll be the same as the length o f the te s t sample to
w ith in 10%. The standard may be any m aterial whose thermal
expansion c h a r a c te r is tic s are known, so th a t thermal s t r a in at
any temperaturegCan be ca lc u la te d to an accuracy o f no less
than 50 X 10“ s t r a i n . Platinum or quartz cut p a r a lle l to the
A axis is o fte n used.
3.2 S tra in gage method.
3.2.1 S tra in gages. S tra in gages sha ll be f o i 1-re s is ta n c e type
w ith a re sistance o f at le a s t 350 ohms. The type o f s tr a in gage
and the adhesive used f o r mounting s h a ll be s u ita b le f o r the
temperature range o f the t e s t . The size o f the s t r a in gage sha ll
be at le a s t 1 0 times the la rg e s t g rain diameter in the sample.
Gages covering a la rg e r area are recommended to minimize s e l f
heating. For core samples, two s t r a in gages sh a ll be mounted
w ith the axes o f s e n s i t i v i t y p a r a lle l to the long axis o f the
sample or reference, a t m id-height o f the sample, on opposite ends
of a diameter. Two a d d itio n a l s t r a in gages s h a ll be mounted w ith
the axes o f s e n s i t i v i t y normal to the long axis of the sample
or reference, also at m id -h e ig h t, on opposite ends o f a diameter.
On p ris m a tic samples, a t h i r d set o f gages s h a ll be mounted in
an o r ie n ta tio n orthogonal to the other two sets. A ll s tr a in
gages in s im ila r o r ie n ta tio n on the sample and reference specimen
sha ll be from the same manufacturing l o t . The fo u r gages in
s im ila r o r ie n ta tio n on the sample and reference sha ll be wired
tog eth er in a f u l l Wheatstone bridge c o n fig u ra tio n as shown on
Figure 3.1.
3.2.2 Power supply. The power supply sha ll be capable of
p roviding AC or DC voltage accurate and sta b le to at le a s t + lOmV.
The voltage level s h a ll be chosen so as to minimize s e lf- h e a tin g
e ffe c ts . In general, 1 to 2 V has been found s a tis fa c to r y .
3.2.3 Signal c o n d itio n in g and readout devices. These may be
e it h e r manual or automatic. Voltmeters sha ll be capable o f
reading to 10" mV. The cumulative e r ro r o f the readout equip
ment and s t r a i n gages s h a ll meet the requirements o f Section 3.1 .2
above.
E.1-6
SAME CONFIGURATION
ON OPPOSITE SIDE
A. LOCATION OF GAGES ON CORE SAMPLE
POWER HIGH
SAMPLE GAGE NO. REFERENCE GAGE
SIGNAL HIGH SIGNAL LOW
REFERENCE GAGE NO. 2 SAMPLE GAGE NO. 2
POWER LOW
B. WHEATSTONE BRIDGE CONFIGURATION
FIG. 3.1 STRAIN GAGE METHOD FOR THERMAL EXPANSION
E.1-7
3.2.4 Reference specimen. The dimensions o f the reference
specimen s h a ll be equal to those o f the t e s t sample w ith in 1 0 %,
and i t s h a ll be composed o f a m a teria l w ith a c o e f f i c i e n t o f
thermal exgansion which is known to w ith in 0.56 x 10" /°F
(0.1 X 10“ /°C ) over the temperature range o f i n t e r e s t . The
c o e f f i c i e n t o f thermal expansion o f the reference sh a ll d i f f e r
s i g n i f i c a n t l y from the estimated c o e f f i c i e n t o f the rock sample,
in order to maximize the output o f the d i f f e r e n t i a l s tr a in
c irc u it. S ta in le s s s t e e l, w ith a c o e f f i c i e n t g e n e ra lly higher
than rock, o r tita n iu m s i l i c a t e , w ith a c o e f f i c i e n t lower than
rock, has been used.
3.2 .5 Heating u n i t . The heating u n it sh a ll be large enough to
contain the t e s t sample and reference specimen. I t sh a ll s a t is f y
the performance requirements stated in Section 3 .1 .3 .
3.2.6 Temperature tra nsdu cers. The temperature transducers
sha ll s a t i s f y the requirements o f Section 3 .1 .4 . Two transducers
sha ll be mounted on the sample and two on the reference, one
near each end.
4.0 Procedure
4.1.1 Dimensions. Samples sh a ll be r ig h t c i r c u l a r c y lin d e rs or
r ig h t prisms. The minimum dimension sha ll be at le a s t 1 0 times
the size o f the la rg e s t mineral g ra in .
4 .1 .1 .1 For the d ila to m e te r method, the longest sample
th a t can be contained by the d ila to m e te r is recommended
to increase the measured s t r a i n .
sample be s h o rte r than 2 in . (51 mm).
In no case sh a ll the I
4 .1 .1 .2 For the s t r a i n gage method, the length o f the
samples sh a ll be a t le a s t as long as the diameter. A
le n g th -to -d ia m e te r r a t i o o f 2 i s recommended.
4.1 .2 Surface prepa ratio n.
4 .1 .2 .1 For the d ila to m e te r method, the sample ends shall
be f l a t to w ith in 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). The ends sha ll be
p a r a lle l to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.05 mm) and perpendicular to
the long axis o f the sample to w ith in 0 . 0 1 in . over 2 in .
(0.025 mm over 51 mm).
4 .1 .2 .2 For the s t r a in gage method, the areas on the
sample where the gages are to be mounted sh a ll smooth
to w ith in 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
4 . 1 . 2 .3 The rock s h a ll not be degraded during the machining
process. Thermal fr a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by cooling
w ith an ap pro pria te f l u i d as required. G enerally, water
is used f o r hard rock, but some m a te ria ls re q u ire special
f l u i d s , such as saturated b rin e f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin f o r
expansive shales.
T
Manufactured by Corning Glass Co., Corning, NY, product code 7971.
E.1-8
4.1.3 Mounting s t r a i n gages. For the s t r a in gage method, the
gages sh a ll be mounted in accordance w ith the manufacturer's
d ir e c tio n s . I f the adhesive requires a heat cure, the temperature
of the sample sh a ll be raised and lowered at a rate no greater
than 3.6°F (2°C) per minute.
4.1.4 Drying. I f the sample is tested under dry c o n d itio n s ,
i t sh a ll be heated to 221° jf4°F (105°C _+2°C) at a ra te not
gre a te r than 3.6°F (2°C) per minute and maintained at th is
temperature f o r a t le a s t 24 hours. The sample sh a ll be cooled
to ambient temperature at a ra te no greater than 3.6°F (2°C)
per minute.
4.1.5 Measurement. The dimensions o f the sample sha ll be

measured w ith a micrometer c a lip e r capable o f measuring to
0.001 in . {0.025 mm). The measurements sh a ll be recorded as
shown on Form L - E .1-1.
4 .1 .5 .1 For c y l i n d r i c a l samples, three length measurements
s h a ll be taken at equal in t e r v a ls . The diameter shall be
measured at to p , m id -h e ig h t, and bottom o f the sample.
4 .1 .5 .2 For p ris m a tic samples, the length sha ll be measured
across the cen ter o f the face adjacent to the ends. The
length o f the sample sh a ll be measured across two opposite
sides in t h i s way, as well as the depth and width.
4.2 Testing.
4.2.1 System c a l i b r a t i o n . I f the d ila to m e te r method is used,
the system s h a ll be c a lib r a te d by te s tin g the standard speci
men. The same heating and coo lin g cycle sha ll be used as fo r
the t e s t sample. The system s h a ll be c a lib ra te d more often
as hig iie r temperatures are used.
4.2 .2 Heating and co o lin g ra te . Samples shall be heated and
cooled a t a ra te not g re a te r than 3.6°F (2°C) per minute to
minimize th e rm a lly induced fra c tu re s .
4 .2 .3 Thermal e q u ilib riu m . The sample w i l l be considered to
have atta in e d thermal e q u ilib riu m when the s tr a in transducer
reading is constant f o r a t le a s t three readings over a period of
not less than 30 minutes, except f o r normal flu c tu a tio n s caused
by the l i m i t a t i o n s o f the t e s t system.
4.2 .4 Number of p o in ts . At le a s t 10 data points shall be
recorded at eq ually spaced temperature in te r v a ls fo r each of the
heating and cooling curves. The system sh a ll reach thermal
e q u ilib riu m f o r each data p o in t.
4.2.5 Number of c y cle s. At le a s t two complete heating and cooling
cycles sha ll be performed consecutively on each sample to check
f o r changes induced by heating.
4.2 .6 Data recording requirements. The data shown on Form
L - E . l - I sh a ll be recorded as a minimum f o r the t e s t . The exact
format w i l l be determined by the readout system, but the format
shown on Form L -E .1-1 s h a ll be followed as c lo s e ly as p ra c tic a b le .
E.1-9
4.3 C orrections to data - s t r a i n gage method.
4.3.1 Voltage no rm a liz a tio n . The output voltages sha ll be
normalized w ith respect to inp ut voltages.
4.3.2 Bridge e fe c ts . C orrections s h a ll be made f o r the e ff e c ts
of Wheatstone bridge n o n lin e a r response.
4.3 .3 Gage f a c t o r . The c o rre c t s t r a in gage fa c to r f o r the
t e s t temperature sh a ll be used. This in fo rm a tio n is supplied
w ith the gages by the manufacturer.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose of t h i s section i s to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. F u rthe r d e ta ils may be added as
A p p lic a tio n s o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h is proce
dure, but may be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s t in g programs. In th a t
case, an a p p lic a tio n s section compatible w ith the format described
5.1 In tro d u c to ry section o f the re p o rt.
purpose o f the te s t in g program, and the c h a r a c te r is tic s o f the
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te s te d . In a large report
covering the r e s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types or
over several temperature ranges, the t e s t m atrix is best
presented in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 Rationale f o r sample sel-’ c tio n . The reasons
f o r the number and types o f samples tested s h a ll be c le a r ly
s ta te d .
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s t in g program. The areas
o f i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s t in g program
and the li m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas of
a p p lic a tio n sh a ll be discussed in general terms.
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tru c tu re
and f a b r i c , grain s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s or voids, and weathering
of the samples sha ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general is
not re quire d. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several rock types,
many samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation
is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the
equipment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sh a ll be included in the
re p o rt. The name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s o f each
major piece s h a ll be l i s t e d .
E.1-10
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t
sha ll be l i s t e d in d e ta ile d steps.
v a r ia tio n and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ffe c t
of the v a r ia t io n upon the t e s t r e s u lts sh a ll be discussed.
5.3.1 Data re duction equations. A ll equations used to reduce
assumptions inherent in the equations or lim it a t io n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll be noted, and the e ff e c t on the re s u lts
di scussed.
la b o ra to ry t e s t c o n d itio n s conform to the assumptions
contained in the data reduction equations sha ll be discussed.
5 .3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to r s . Any fa c to rs or methods applied
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n shall
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary. A summary ta b le o f re s u lts in c lu d in g t e s t s u ite
designations, temperature ranges, average c o e ffic ie n t s o f thermal
expansion, ranges, and u n c e rta in tie s sha ll be presented.
5.4.2 In d iv id u a l re s u lts . A ta b le o f re s u lts f o r in d iv id u a l
samples in c lu d in g , as a minimum, in d iv id u a l sample number, rock type,
temperature range, and c o e f f i c i e n t o f thermal expansion sha ll be
presented.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types of analysis or presen
ta t io n may be included as a p pro pria te.
5 .4 .3 .1 Histograms o f re s u lts .
5 .4 .3 .2 C o e ffic ie n t of thermal expansion as a fun ctio n o f
temperature.
5 .4 .3 .3 C o rre la tio n w ith o th e r rock pro p e rtie s such as
s p e c ific g r a v ity or modulus o f deformation.
5 .4 .3 .4 Comparison o f re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous s tu d ie s.
The r e s u lts s h a ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l
methods. A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be c a lcu la ted using a 95%
confidence i n t e r v a l .
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r r o r associated w ith a sin g le
t e s t s h a ll be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts
of a l l transducers, power sup p lie s, readout devices, etc.
E.1-11
mean value of thermal expansion, range, standard d e v ia tio n , and
95% confidence l i m i t s f o r the mean s h a ll be calc u la te d as a
minimum. The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite sh a ll be compared
w ith the measurement u n c e rta in ty to determine whether measurement
e r r o r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c t o r in the r e s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e la t io n . When a p p ro p ria te , the means o f groups
s h a ll be compared to determine whether the observed d iffe re n c e
between groups i s s i g n i f i c a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
5.6.1 Data curves. A s t r a in vs. temperature curve f o r each t e s t
sample s h a ll be included in an appendix.
5.6.2 Data forms. A completed data Form L -E .1-1 f o r each t e s t
sample shal be included in an appendix.

t e s t re s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t
o f t h i s section to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to
i d e n t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q u a lity Assurance
a c tio n i s required.
in Section 2.1.
Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the t e s t setup, the pro
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . A fte r t e s t in g ,
the completed Form L - E .1-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed o f f
only i f c o r re c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance
s h a ll m aintain complete c a l i b r a t i o n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numers. Q u a lity Assurance sha ll v e r if y
th a t s e ria l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are recorded
Form L -E .1-1.
6.3.3 Test s ig n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f Form L - E .1-1.
E .1-12
Pg. 1
Thermal Expansion o f Laboratory Rock Samples

Test Data Sheet - Form L-E .1-1
Project_ Sample No.

Date Rock Type__
Tested by_ O rie n ta tio n
Test Temperature Range_
Equipment Date o f
D escrip tio n S eria l No. Cali b r a ti on
Dimensions
Core Samples:
Average Average
P rism atic Samples:

Length _________ Width Depth
Average Average_ Average
Temperature, °C Deformation Reading

Time No. 1 No. 2 Axial C ircum ferential Other
Form L -E .1-1
Pg . 2
Temperature, °C Deformation Reading__________

Time No. 1 No. 2 A xial C ircum fere ntial Other
Remarks:
Test S u p e rv is o r_________________________________ Date_

Q u a lity Assurance _______________________________ Date_
P ro je c t E n g in e e r________________________________ Date_
Procedure L -E .2
S p e c ific Heat o f Laboratory Rock Samples
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . This t e s t measures the change in
enthalpy o f a rock sample as i t s temperature is changed. S p e c ific
heat a t a p a r t i c u l a r temperature may be calc u la te d from t h i s data.
1.1.2 A p p l i c a b i l i t y . The sample may be e it h e r s o lid or in powder
form. The temperatures a t which the s p e c ific heat may be i n v e s t i
gated w ith t h i s procedure range from cryogenic to approximately
1200°C. For s i m p l i c i t y , t h i s procedure is w r itte n f o r te s ts con
ducted a t elevated temperature.
A rock sample i s heated to a s p e c ifie d temperature. The sample
is dropped in t o a c o n ta in e r in a water bath. This system is
designed to be a b ia b a tic . The sample and re ceiving system reach
thermal e q u ilib riu m . The sample enthalpy is c a lc u la te d . This
procedure i s repeated a t several temperatures. The re la tio n s h ip
of sample enthalpy to temperature is determined, from which the
s p e c ific heat i s c a lc u la te d .
1.3 Data Reduction.
1 .3 .1 .1 A diab atic - an a d ia b a tic system is one which is per
f e c t l y th e rm a lly in su la te d from i t s surroundings.
1 .3 .1 .2 Enthalpy - a measure o f the energy content o f systems
under constant pressure. In t h i s procedure, enthalpy is equiv
a le n t to heat energy.
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2.1 The change o f enthalpy, AH, i s calcu la ted using:
AH = CpM AT (1)
where:
Cp = s p e c ific heat (heat cap acity) o f a substance
M = mass o f the substance
AT = temperature change of the substance.
1 .3 .2 .2 The change in enthalpy,AHr, o f an ad ia b a tic system
composed o f a metal re c e iv e r and a water bath is calculated
using:
AH = (C M + C M )( T . - T .) (2)
r ' pm m pw w ' ' f '
E.2-1
where:
C„ = s p e c ific heat o f metal re c e iv e r
pm
M„ = mass o f metal re c e iv e r
m
Cpw = s p e c ific heat o f water
M,, = mass o f water
w
= f i n a l system temperature
= i n i t i a l system temperature
1 .3 .2 .3 The loss o f en tha lp y, AH., in the system because i t

is not completely a d ia b a tic is c a lc u la te d by:
M^(T^ - I , ) - (3)
1 pr r ' r f' r
where:
C = s p e c if ic heat o f a reference m aterial at T„
pr r
M = mass o f reference m aterial
r
I = reference m aterial temperature when introduced
in t o a d ia b a tic system
= e q u ilib riu m temperature of a d ia b a tic system plus
the reference m a te ria l.
AH i s c a lc u la te d from Equation 2 f o r a t e s t using the r e f e r -
en£e m a te r ia l.
1 .3 .2 .4 The enthalpy o f a t e s t sample, AH^, is ca lcu la ted
using.
AHg = AH^ + AH^ (4)
where:
AH = enthalpy change o f the system when the sample is
te s te d , ca lc u la te d from Equation 2
AH, = enthalpy loss o f the system, determined by c a l i b r a
t i o n w ith a reference m a te ria l, as shown in Equa
t i o n 3.
1 .3 .2 .5 The s p e c ific heat, C , o f a sample is c alcu la ted
using: ^
d(AH )
^ps " dTg
where:
T = sample temperature before entrance in to a d ia b a tic
system.
E.2-2
The enthalpy change as a fu n c tio n o f a temperature f o r a
ty p ic a l rock i s shown in Figure 1.1. I t may be noted th a t
enthalpy change is referenced to 0 a t a sample temperature
o f 32°F ,(0°C).
1.3.3 Factors in flu e n c in g the data. The s p e c ific heat te s t is
very s e n s itiv e to enthalpy losses during the te s t which do not
re s u lt in ra is in g the temperature o f the water bath. These occur
p r im a r ily du ring t r a n s f e r o f the sample from the furnace to the
re c e iv e r and during e q u i l i b r a t i o n . They are corrected f o r using
the c a l i b r a t i o n given by Equation 3. However, the t e s t procedure
must be q u ite standardized, so th a t i t can be repeated to the fin e s t
d e ta il p o s s ib le . The same te c h n ic ia n should perform both the
c a l i b r a t i o n and the t e s t , and environmental fa c to rs should be
constant as f a r as p o ssible.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1973, Test Designation C 351, "Standard Test Method fo r
Mean S p e c ific Heat o f Thermal In s u la tio n " , Annual Book o f ASTM Standards,
Part 18.
1.4.2 U.S. Bureau o f Mines, 1974, "Thermal C apacity", Bureau o f Mines
Test Procedures f o r Rocks, Inform ation C ir c u la r IC 8628.
A ll personnel involved in performing the t e s t , inc lu d in g the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, s h a ll be form ally p re q u a lifie d
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures established as part of
I f no requirements are stated in Section 3.0, then manufacturer's
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the required level
o f performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is generally done by
c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement systems. C a lib ra tio n
and documentation sh a ll be accomplished according to standard
Q u a lity Assurance procedures.
2.3.1 P roje ct scope. The number and type o f rock cores tested
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n o f the s it e
might re q u ire several samples from a v a rie ty o f formations, w hile
The f in a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e avily on the technical
E.2-3
250
>«
O -
200 300 400 500

TEMPERATURE,“C
FIG. 1.1 ENTHALPY CHANGE AS A FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE

FOR A TYPICAL ROCK.
I
E.2-4
2.3.2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested must be
s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r evaluation
of the re s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly v a ria b le w i l l
re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to
evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. M aterial d iffe re n c e s w ith in the rock
mass, such as f i l l e d vugs, in c lu s io n s , and a lt e r a t io n zones, can
s i g n i f i c a n t l y in flu e n c e the s p e c ific heat o f the rock. These should
be sampled and tested to provide an estimate o f t h e i r e f f e c t .
2.4 Documentation.

3.1 C a lo rim e te r.
The c a lo rim e te r con s is ts o f the re ce ivin g vessel, the water bath,
the a d ia b a tic c o n ta in e r, and the necessary support mechanisms.
The re c e iv in g c o n ta in e r s h a ll be constructed o f metal with high
thermal c o n d u c tiv ity and known s p e c ific heat c h a r a c te r is tic s .
Copper is recommended. D i s t i l l e d water sha ll be used fo r the
water bath. The a d ia b a tic con ta in e r sha ll be a Dewar fla s k w ith
an in s u la te d l i d . When performing the t e s t , i t is de sirab le fo r
the system e q u ilib r iu m temperature to d i f f e r from the i n i t i a l
temperature by only 3.5° to 7.0°F (2° to 4°C) in order to minimize
heat losses. As discussed in Section 1 .3 .2 , the mass o f the water,
re c e iv e r and sample, as well as the sample temperature, determine
the temperature change during the t e s t . The components o f the
c a lo rim e te r s h a ll be sized to s a t i s f y t h i s requirement. The
re c e ive r s h a ll be supported in such a way as to minimize heat
loss by conduction. A schematic o f the c a lo rim e te r and t e s t
assembly is shown on Figure 3.1.
3.2 Heater.
The heater s h a ll be a tube furnace open at i t s lower end. I t shall
be o f s u f f i c i e n t length to accomodate the sample capsule. The
furnace s h a ll provide a uniform temperature w ith in 1.8°F (1°C)
over the length o f the sample capsule and sha ll be capable of
m aintaining a temperature constant to w ith in 3.6°F (2°C) over a
period of time.
3.3 Sample capsule.
The capsule to contain the rock during the t e s t shall be constructed
of metal which w i l l not react w ith the sample or atmosphere during
the t e s t . An a llo y o f 90% platinum and 10% rhodium has been success
f u l l y used. The capsule s h a ll be sealable, f o r example w ith a screw
cap or by welding.
E.2-5
TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS
RELEASE MECHANISM
MOUNTING APPARATUS
TUBE FURNACE
SAMPLE CAPSULE
INSULATION TI
INSULATING
METAL RECEIVER
WATER BATH TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS ITYR)
DEWAR FLASK-
RECEIVER SUPPORT
MAGNETIC STIRRER
FIG. 3.1 SCHEMATIC OF SPECIFIC HEAT APPARATUS
E.2-6
3.4 Temperature transducers.
The exact type o f temperature transducer used depends on the te s t
temperature and the equipment c o n fig u ra tio n . Special L im its o f
E rro r thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers (RTDs) are
recommended. In the furnace, the temperature transducers sh a ll be
accurate to a t le a s t _+1.8°F ( h^1®C), in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced
by readout equipment, and s h a ll have a re s o lu tio n o f at le a s t
0 . 18°F ( 0 . 1°C). Two transducers s h a ll be mounted in the furnace,
one a t each end o f the sample capsule. In the c a lo rim e te r, the
temperature transducers s h a ll have an accuracy o f at le a s t +0.2°F
(+^0.1°C), in c lu d in g e rro rs introduced by readout equipment, and a
re s o lu tio n of a t le a s t 0 . 1°F ( 0 . 05°C). Two transducers sh a ll be
placed in the water bath and two s h a ll be incorporated in the
metal re c e iv e r.
3.6 Mounting apparatus.
The furnace s h a ll be mounted over the c a lo rim e te r. An in s u la tin g
medium s h a ll be in place a t the base o f the furnace and on the top
of the Dewar fla s k a t a l l times except when the sample capsule is
being tra n s fe rre d from the furnace to the c a lo rim e te r. The mounting
sh a ll contain apparatus f o r suspending the sample capsule at a repeatable
lo c a tio n in the furnace. This apparatus sha ll be capable o f releasing
the sample capsule in a c o n tro lle d and repeatable manner. I t is
recommended th a t a system which au tom a tic a lly removes the in s u la tio n
from the bottom o f the furnace and top o f the c a lo rim e te r, releases
the sample capsule, and replaces the in s u la tio n over a short and
fixe d time period be incorporated in to the mounting apparatus.
3.7 Magnetic s t i r r e r .
The c a lo rim e te r sh a ll be placed on a magnetic s t i r r e r w ith a v a ria b le
speed c o n tr o l.
3.8 Reference m a te r ia l.
A reference m a teria l w ith known s p e c ific heat shall be used to
c a lib r a t e the system. The reference sha ll be approximately the
same mass as the sample. Copper and fused quartz have been used
s u c ce ss fu lly .
3.9 Weighing apparatus.
Apparatus s h a ll be a v a ila b le f o r determining the mass o f the water
bath, metal re c e iv e r, and Dewar fla s k to an accuracy o f at le a s t
+0.004 oz (_+0.1 g). The mass o f the sample capsule and sample
sh a ll be determined to an accuracy o f at le a s t +3.5 x 10* oz
(+0 . 0 1 g).
4.0 Procedure
4 .1 .1 Dimensions. In ta c t rock core, fragments, or powder may be used.
At le a s t 3.5 oz (100 g) o f sample sh a ll be tested.
E.2-7
4 .1.2 D rying. The sample s h a ll be placed 1n the sample con ta in e r
but not sealed. The sample and c o n ta in e r s h a ll be placed In an
oven and drie d a t 221“ jf4“ F (105° ^ 2 “ C) f o r at le a s t 24 hours.
4.2 T e s tin g .
4.2.1 Sample h e ating. The sealed capsule co n tainin g the sample
s h a l 1 be heated u n t i l the average furnace temperature s t a b iliz e s
w ith in 3 .6 “ F (2“ C) o f the desired t e s t temperature. The furnace
s h a ll be maintained a t th a t temperature f o r at le a s t 1 hour
before the sample Is te s te d . The readings o f the two furnace
temperature transducers s h a ll not d i f f e r by more than 1.8“ F (1“ C)
a t the time o f the t e s t .
4 .2 .2 Temperature m o n ito rin g . The temperature o f the furnace
and c a lo rim e te r s h a ll be monitored a t 30-second In te rv a ls f o r 10
minutes before the t e s t . The c a lo rim e te r temperatures s h a ll be
monitored a t 30-second In te r v a ls during the f i r s t 10 minutes a f t e r
the release o f the sample capsule, and a t 2-m1nute In te rv a ls th e re
a f t e r u n t i l the ra te o f temperature change becomes constant w ith
time. This g e n e ra lly takes 30 to 60 minutes.
4.2 .3 Number o f t e s t s . The sample s h a ll be tested at le a s t th re e
times at each t e s t temperature. At le a s t f i v e t e s t temperatures
e q u a lly spaced over the range o f I n t e r e s t s h a ll be used to obtain
the enthalpy-tem perature curve. The same sample should be used
fo r a ll te s ts .
4.2 .4 System c a l i b r a t i o n . The loss o f enthalpy s h a ll be d e te r
mined by t e s t in g the reference m aterial In the same manner and
at the same temperatures as the rock sample.
4.2 .5 Test environment. The temperature o f the t e s t room s h a ll
be maintained to w it h in ^ 3 .6 “ F (jf2“ C). The apparatus shall be
protected from d r a fts during the t e s t .
4.2 .6 S t i r r i n g . The water bath s h a ll be s t i r r e d a t the minimum
ra te necessary to achieve uniform readings o f the temperature
sensors In the bath. In order to minimize heat Introduced In to
the system by a g it a t io n .
4.3 Data ha nd lin g .
The average c a lo rim e te r temperature s h a ll be p lo tte d as a fu n c tio n
of tim e , and the e q u ilib riu m temperature sh a ll be determined by
e x tra p o la tin g the constant temperature change ra te back to the re
lease time (see Figure 4 .1 ).
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section Is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
a p p ro p ria te , and the order o f Items may be changed I f necessary.
A p p lic a tio n s o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s proce
dure, but may be an In te g ra l p a rt o f some te s t in g programs. In th a t
case, an a p p lic a tio n s section compatible w ith the format described
below should be Included.
E.2-8
22.0
ElQUILIBRIU
TEMPERATl
THERMAL DRIFT
21.5
33
21.0
20.5
S A M P i CAPSULE RELEASE
I TfMPERATUjlE AT RELEASE
PRE-TEST THERMAL DRIFT
20.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
TIM E, MIN.
FIG. 4.1 TYPICAL CALORIMETER TEMPERATURE VS TIME CURVE
E.2-9
The in tr o d u c to ry section i s intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the t e s t in g program, and the c h a r a c te r is tic s o f the
5.1.1.1 Number o f samples te s te d . In a large re p o rt covering
the r e s u lts o f te s t s o f several rock types, the t e s t m a trix
is best presented in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 R ationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r the
number and types o f samples tested s h a ll be c le a r ly stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas o f
i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the t e s t in g program, and
sh a ll be discussed in general terms.
5.1 .2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock ty p e , s tr u c
tu re f a b r i c , g rain s iz e , d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , void s, and weathering
of the samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. F u rthe r d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general i s not
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presen tatio n is recom
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the equip
ment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll be included' in the re p o rt.
piece sh a ll be l i s t e d .
5.2 .2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll
be l i s t e d i n d e ta ile d steps.
5.2 .3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure varies
and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e f f e c t o f the v a r ia
t io n upon the t e s t re s u lts s h a ll be discussed.
5.3 T h eoretical background.
5.3.1 Data re duction equations. A ll equations used to reduce the
data sh a ll be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assump
tio n s inh ere nt in the equations or l i m i t a t i o n s in t h e i r a p p li
cations s h a ll be noted, and the e ff e c t on the re s u lts discussed.
5.3.2 S i t e - s p e c if ic in flu e n c e s .
5 .3 .2 .1 Assumptions. The degree to which the actual lab ora
to r y t e s t c o n d itio n s conform to the assumptions contained
in the data reduction equations s h a ll be discussed.
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s it u a t io n shall be
E.2-10
5.4 Results.
5.4.1 Summary o f r e s u lts . A summary ta b le c o n ta in in g , as a m in i
mum, rock s u ite i d e n t i f i c a t i o n , t e s t temperature range, the func
tio n a l fo rm u la tio n of s p e c ific heat over th a t range, and the un
c e r ta in ty s h a ll be presented.
5.4 .2 In d iv id u a l r e s u lt s . A ta b le o f re s u lts in c lu d in g , as a
minimum, in d iv id u a l sample numbers, t e s t temperature ranges, and
the fu n c tio n a l form u la tio n s o f s p e c ific heat over th a t range shall
be presented.
5.4.3 Graphics p re s e n ta tio n . A p lo t o f s p e c ific heat as a fun ctio n
of temperature sh a ll be included f o r each rock s u ite .
5 .4.4 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses may be included as
ap pro pria te.
thermal c o n d u c tiv ity or s p e c ific g r a v ity .
5 .4 .4 .3 Comparison o f re s u lts w ith other rock suite s or
to previous stud ies.
5.5 E rro r e stim ate.
The re s u lts sh a ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be c a lc u la te d using a 95% confidence
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r r o r in enthalpy change and tem
perature associated w ith a s in g le t e s t sha ll be evaluated. The
e r r o r in s p e c ific heat sh a ll be determined.
5.5.2 Sample v a r i a b i l i t y . For each s u ite o f rock samples,the
mean, range, standard d e v ia tio n and 95% confidence l i m i t s fo r
the mean s p e c ific heat a t in d iv id u a l temperatures sh a ll be
calcu la te d as a minimum. The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite shall
be compared w ith the measurement u n ce rta in ty to determine whether
measurement e r r o r o r sample v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c to r
in the r e s u lts .
5 .5.3 Group c o r r e la t io n . When ap pro pria te, the means o f groups
between groups is s i g n if ic a n t a t the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
5.6.1 Curves. The temperature-time curves and enthalpy-tim e
curves f o r each sample sh a ll be included in an appendix.
5.6.2 Data forms. A completed data form L -E .2-1 f o r each sample
sh a ll be included in an appendix.
E.2-11
6.0 Q u a lity Assurance.
those p o in ts during the t e s t a t which Q u a lity Assurance ac tio n is
requi red.
in Section 2.1.
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . A fte r t e s t in g ,
the completed Form L-E.2-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed o f f only
i f c o r r e c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll
m aintain complete c a l i b r a t i o n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6 .3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll v e r if y
on Form L-E.2-1.
6.3 .3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance s h a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f L-E.2-1.
E.2-12
p. 1
S p e c ific Heat o f Laboratory Rock Samples

Test Data Sheet - Form L-E.2-1
P roje ct Sample N o ._
Date Rock Type__
Tested By Sample Form_
Room Temperature

D escription S erial No. C a lib ra tio n
Mass o f Capsule____________________ Mass o f Capsule and sample_

Mass o f Metal re c e iv e r and s up port_ Mass o f Dewar fla s k
Mass o f Calorimeter plus water b ith
Furnace Temp, °C Receiver Temp, °C Water Bath Temp, °C

Time No. 1 No. 2 Non Nnr No. 1 No. 2
Form L-E.2-1
P.2
Furnace Temp, °C Receiver Temp, °C Water bath Temp, °C

Time No. 1 No. 2 N o^] No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
Remarks:
Test S u p e r v is o r _______________________________ Date_

Q u a lity Assurance______________________________ Date_
P ro je c t Manager________________________________ Date_
Procedure L-E.3
Thermal C o n d u c tivity o f Laboratory Rock Samples
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . This t e s t determines the thermal
c o n d u c tiv ity o f a rock core sample under stea dy-state heat flow
c o n d itio n s . Thermal r e s i s t i v i t y may also be calcu la ted .
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . This procedure is ap plic a b le to is o tr o p ic
rock m a te ria ls o n ly. S e le c tiv e ly sized and orie nte d samples
should be tested i f several types o f m aterial are present.
A thermal stack i s assembled c o n s is tin g , in order, o f a heat source,
an upper heat flow meter, the t e s t sample, a lower heat flow meter,
a cold p la t e , and a heat sink. The stack is insu la ted or supplied
w ith guard heaters to minimize heat loss through the sides. A
fix e d temperature d iffe re n c e is maintained between the heat source
and the cold p la te w h ile the system comes to thermal e q u ilib riu m .
The temperature at each m aterial in te rfa c e in the stack is then
measured and the thermal c o n d u c tiv ity is c a lc u la te d .
1.3 .1 .1 Guard heater - a c o n tr o lla b le c y lin d r ic a l heater
surrounding the thermal stack used to minimize heat losses
through the sides o f the stack.
1 .3 .1 .2 Heat flo w meter - a specimen o f m aterial w ith a known
thermal c o n d u c tiv ity . I f the temperature d iffe re n c e between
the ends is known and the re i s no heat loss through the sides,
the heat flow through the specimen may be calcu la ted .
1 .3 .1 .3 Thermal c o n d u c tiv ity - an inherent property o f every
m aterial re la ted to i t s a b i l i t y to conduct heat.
1 .3 .1 .4 Thermal stack - the assembly o f heat sources and
s in k s , heat flow meters, sample, and temperature measurement
devices placed to g e th e r in the thermal c o n d u c tiv ity t e s t .
1.3.2 Equations.
1.3 .2 .1 The thermal c o n d u c tiv ity , K, o f a material is
c a lcu la te d using:
" fe- (1)
E.3-1
where
Q = heat flow through the m aterial
L = thickn ess o f the m aterial
A = c ro s s -s e c tio n a l area o f the m aterial
a T = temperature d iffe re n c e between the two
sides o f the m a te ria l.
1 .3 .2 .2 The thermal r e s i s t i v i t y , r , is c a lcu la te d using:
r = 1 ^ (2 )
1 .3 .2 .3 The heat flow through each heat flow meter is

c a lc u la te d by rearranging Equation 1:
Q. T (3)
1.3.3 Factors in flu e n c in g the data. The above equations are fo r
s te a d y-s ta te one-dimensional heat flow through a homogeneous
m a te ria l. To m aintain the ste a d y-sta te requirements, i t is
important th a t the t e s t system comes to thermal e q u ilib riu m . To
achieve one-dimensional heat flo w , the heat flow through the edges
of the thermal stack must be minimized. F i n a l l y , to measure the
tru e thermal c o n d u c tiv ity o f the m a te ria l, thermal "short c i r c u i t s , "
o r paths o f anomalously high c o n d u c tiv ity , must be avoided in the
sample.
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ASTM, 1976, Test Designation C-177, "Test f o r Steady-State
Thermal Transmission P rop ertie s by Means o f the Guarded Hot P la te ,"
1.4.2 ASTM, 1976, Test Designation C-518, "Standard Test Method
f o r Steady-State Thermal Transmission P roperties by Means o f the
Heat Flow M eter," Annual Book o f ASTM Standards, Part 18.
1.4.3 Morgan, M. T . , and West, G. A ., 1980, "Thermal C on ductivity
of the Rocks in the Bureau of Mines Standard Rock S u ite ," Oak Ridge
National Laboratory ORNL/TM-7052.
E.3-2
s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the required level of
performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is generally done by
documentation s h a ll be accomplished according to standard Q ua lity
2.3.1 P roje ct scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f formations, w hile a
d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate re posito ry
rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le form ation. The f in a l
te s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the technical judgment and
experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
2.3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested must
be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r evalu
a tio n of the re s u lts . Rock types which are hig h ly v a ria b le w i l l
re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks, in order to
evaluate the r e s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3.3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass such as
j o i n t s , a l t e r a t i o n zones, fr a c tu r e f i l l i n g s , v a ria b le p o ro s ity ,
e tc . can s i g n i f i c a n t l y in flu e n c e the thermal c o n d u c tiv ity o f the
rock mass. These should be sampled and tested in d iv id u a lly to
provide an estimate o f t h e i r e f f e c t .
2 .3 .4 A nisotropy. Anisotropy in th e rock mass should be evaluated
by te s t in g samples taken at d i f f e r e n t o r ie n ta tio n s .
2.4 Documentation.
Each sample sh a ll be f u l l y documented before te s tin g according to
standard Q ua lity Assurance procedures.

3.1 Hot p la t e .
A hot p la te of the same diameter as the t e s t sample sh a ll be used
to apply heat to the thermal stack. The hot p la te sha ll be
constructed so th a t the side in contact w ith the thermal stack is
isotherm al. This side sha ll be f l a t and smooth to w ith in 0.001 in.
3.2 Cold p la t e .
A cold p la te sh a ll be used to c o n tro l the temperature gradient in
the stack. I t sh a ll meet the s p e c ific a tio n s o f Section 3.1.
3.3 Heat s in k .
A heat sink sh a ll be provided on the side of the cold p la te
opposite the thermal stack.
E.3-3
3.4 Temperature con trol u n i t .
A u n it to c o n tro l the temperatures o f the hot and cold plates sh a ll
be provided. The temperature at each face o f the te s t sample shall
not vary during the t e s t by more than 0 . 27°F ( 0 . 15°C). The con trol
u n it s h a ll also be capable of achieving the desired average sample
temperature w it h in 1.8°F (1°C). The co n tro l u n it shall allow the
sample to be heated at a ra te not g re a te r than 3 . 6 °F (2°C) per
minute.
3.5 Heat flow meters.
The heat flow meters sha ll be constructed o f a m aterial o f known
thermal c o n d u c tiv ity which is s im ila r to th a t of rock. Fused
s i l i c a i s recommended. The heat flow meters shall be the same
diameter as the sample and have a le n g th -to -d ia m e te r r a t io between
1/5 and 1/3. The faces sh a ll be f l a t and smooth to w ith in 0.001 in .
(0.025 mm) and p a r a lle l to each other to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.05 mm).
3.6 In s u la tio n /g u a rd h e ate r.
In s u la tio n sh a ll be placed around the thermal stack to minimize
heat flow through the sides. The thickness and type of in s u la tio n
sh a ll s a t i s f y the heat loss requirements o f Section 4.2.5.
A lt e r n a t i v e l y , a guard heater c o n s is tin g o f a c y lin d r ic a l furnace
and co n tro l u n its may be placed around the thermal stack. I t is
recommended th a t the guard heater have at le a s t three zones w ith
independent temperature c o n tro ls to provide a thermal gradient
s im ila r to th a t o f the stack.
Temperature s h a ll be measured at several loc a tio n s in the thermal
stack as shown on Figure 3.1. Special L im its o f E rro r 30 AWG
thermocouples are recommended. The w ire and in s u la tio n sha ll not
degrade a t the maximum t e s t temperature. The thermocouples sha ll
be positioned at the center of the faces o f the samples and heat
flow meters. A small s lo t sha ll be cut in the face of the sample
or heat flow meter to accommodate the bare thermocouple w ire s, as
shown on Figure 3.2. The wires sh a ll be cemented in to the s lo t
w ith a grout s u ita b le f o r the te s t temperature. The thermocouples
sh a ll be accurate to at le a s t +0.1°F (j+ 0.05°C) and have a re s o lu
t i o n of at le a s t 0.02°F (0 .0 1 °^).
3.8 Thermal compound.
To ensure good thermal contact between the sample, heat flow meters,
and heaters, a th e rm a lly conductive viscous compound may be applied
a t each in te r fa c e .
3.9 Holding frame.
A frame fo r applying axia l load to the thermal stack shall be used
to ensure good contact between the components of the stack. The
frame s h a ll be capable o f applying a stress o f 10 psi (0.07 MPa) con
stan t to w ith in I psi (0.007 MPa) fo r the du ratio n of the t e s t .
^Morgan and Uest, 1980 (see Ref. 1 .4 .3 ).

E.3-4
HOT PLATE ZONE I CONTROL
HEAT FLOW METER
ZONE 2 CONTROL GUARD
SAMPLE HEATER
HEAT FLOW METER ZONE 3 CONTROL
COLD PLATE
HEAT SINK
THERHÔ UPLE ! TEMPERATURE
*~ R E “A 0 0 u f ” ' CONTROLLER
FIG. 3.1 SCHEMATIC OF THERM AL STACK
SAMPLE OR HEAT FLOW METER

THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION
BARE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE SLOT
INSULATED-^
THERMOCOUPLE
WIRE
TO READOUT
FIG. 3 .2 SCHEMATIC OF THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATION

(AFTER REFERENCE 1.4.3)
E.3-5
4.0 Procedure
4 .1 .1 Dimensions.
4 .1 .1 .1 The diameter o f the sample sh a ll be at le a s t 10 times
la r g e r than the la rg e s t mineral g ra in , but in no case less
than 1.5 in . (38 mm). NX-size (2 in . nominal diameter; 51 mm)
cores are recommended f o r a l l except very coarse-grained
rocks. The diameter sh a ll be measured across two perpendic
u la r diameters at m id-height o f the sample w ith a d ia l micro
meter capable o f measuring to 0.001 in . (0.025 mm). These
readings s h a ll be recorded as shown on Form L-E.3-1.
4 .1 .1 .2 The thickness o f the sample sh a ll be at le a s t 1 0 times
the diameter o f the la rg e s t g ra in , but in no case less than
0.5 i n . (12.7 mm). The le n g th -to -d ia m e te r r a t i o o f the t e s t
sample s h a ll be between 1/5 and 1/3. The length sha ll be
measured a t th re e eq u a lly spaced in t e r v a ls w ith a d ia l m icro
meter capable o f measuring to the nearest 0.001 in . (0.025 mm).
These readings s h a ll be recorded as shown on Form L-E.3-1.
4 .1 .2 Faces. The sample faces s h a ll be f l a t and smooth to w ith in
0.001 in . [0.025 mm) and p a r a lle l to w ith in 0.002 in . (0.05 mm).
The rock s h a ll not be degraded during the machining process.
Thermal f r a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by coo lin g w ith an appro
p r ia t e f l u i d as required. G enerally, water is used f o r hard rock,
but o th e r m a te ria ls may re q u ire special f l u i d s , such as saturated
b rin e f o r s a lt o r g ly c e r in f o r s laking mudstones.
4.1 .3 S tru c tu re s . Small j o i n t s and seams are p o t e n t ia lly hig h-
c o n d u c tiv ity heat flow routes through the sample. M aterial which
has fra c tu re s running a x i a l l y through the t e s t sample should be
avoided.
4 .1 .4 D rying. Samples s h a ll be dried p r i o r to t e s t in g by heating
in an oven at 221° _+4°F (105° _+ 2°C) f o r at le a s t 24 hours. The
ra te of heating and co o lin g o f the sample sh a ll not exceed 3.6°F
(2°C) per minute. Rocks which degrade at t h i s temperature may be
drie d in a vacuum d e s ic c a to r.
4.2 T e s tin g .
4.2 .1 A xial load. An a x ia l load o f 10 psi (0.07 MPa) sh a ll be
applied to the thermal stack.
4 .2 .2 Heating r a te . The sample s h a ll be heated at a rate not
g re a te r than 3 .6 “ F (2°C) per minute.
4 .2 .3 Temperature d i f f e r e n t i a l . A temperature gradient o f 46°F
per in . (1°C per mm) s h a ll be maintained across the sample.
4 .2 .4 Thermal e q u ilib r iu m . Temperature readings o f a l l thermo
couples s h a ll be taken a t 3-minute in te r v a ls during the t e s t . The
system s h a ll be considered to have achieved thermal e q u ilib riu m
E.3-6
when the temperatures are constant to w ith in 0.27°F ( 0 . 15°C) f o r
three consecutive readings.
4 .2 .5 Heat lo s s . The heat flow ind ica ted by the upper and lower
heat flow meters s h a ll not d i f f e r by more than 10%. The in s u la tio n ,
guard he ate r, or dimensions o f the sample may be adjusted to
s a t is f y t h i s requirement. The average value o f the two heat flow
meters s h a ll be considered the heat flow through the sample.
4.2 .6 Data re c o rd in g . The data shown on Form L-E.3-1 sha ll be
recorded, as a minimum. The exact format w i l l depend on the
temperature readout equipment, but sh a ll be as close to th a t shown
on Form L-E.3-1 as p ra c tic a b le .
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section i s to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements fo r
a complete and usable re p o rt. F urther d e ta ils may be added as appro
p r ia t e , and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary. A pplica tio n s
o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s procedure, but may be
an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s t in g programs. In th a t case, an a p p lic a tio n s
purpose o f the te s tin g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s o f the
material te ste d .
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te ste d . In a large report covering
the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, the t e s t m atrix is
number and types o f sample tested sha ll be c le a r ly stated.
in t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and the
li m i t a t i o n s of the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n shall
5.1 .2 B r ie f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tru c tu re ,
f a b r i c , gra in s iz e , d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , voids, and weathering o f the
samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il depends on
the a p p lic a tio n of the r e s u lts , but in general is not required. In
v a ria b le m aterial o r f o r several rock types, many samples may be
described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recommended f o r c l a r i t y .
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the equipment
a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sh a ll be included in the re p o rt. The
name, model number, and basic s p e c ific a tio n s of each major piece
sh a ll be l i s t e d .
^Morgan and West, 1980 (See Ref. 1 .4 .3 ).
E.3-7
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sha ll
5.2.3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment o r procedure varie s
and the reasons f o r i t sh a ll be noted. The e f f e c t o f the v a r ia tio n
5.3.1 Data reduction equations. A l l equations used to reduce the
data shal 1 be c le a r ly presented and f u l l y defined. Any assumptions
inh ere nt in the equations o r l i m i t a t i o n s in t h e i r a p p lic a tio n s
s h a ll be noted, and the e f f e c t on the re s u lts discussed.
5.3.2 S i t e - s p e c i f i c in flu e n c e s .
la b o ra to ry t e s t co n d itio n s conform to the assumptions contained
in the data reduction equations s h a ll be discussed.
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s it u a t io n shall be
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Summary t a b l e . A summary ta b le in c lu d in g , as a minimum,
rock s u ite i d e n t i f i c a t i o n , temperature, average thermal conduc
t i v i t y , range, and u n c e rta in ty s h a ll be presented.
5.4.2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A ta b u la r presentation o f re s u lts
in c lu d in g , as a minimum, sample numbers, t e s t temperatures, and
thermal c o n d u c t iv itie s s h a ll be presented.
5.4.3 Graphic p re s e n ta tio n . A p lo t o f thermal c o n d u c tiv ity versus
■êmperature s h a ll be included f o r each rock s u ite .
5 .4.4 Other a n a ly s is . The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses and
presentations may be included as ap pro pria te.
5 .4 .4 .1 Histogram o f re s u lts .
5 .4 .4 .2 C o rre la tio n w ith oth er rock p ro p e rtie s such as
s p e c ific heat and s p e c ific g r a v ity .
5 .4 .4 .3 Comparison o f re s u lts to oth e r rock s u ite s or to
previous s tu d ie s .
The re s u lts s h a ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be calcu la te d using a 95% confidence
i n te r v a l.
s h a ll be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts o f a l l
thermocouples, heaters, readout devices, e tc .
E.3-8
mean thermal c o n d u c tiv ity , the range, standard de v ia tio n and 95%
confidence l i m i t s f o r the mean s h a ll be c a lc u la te d , as a minimum.
The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite sha ll be compared w ith the
measurement u n c e rta in ty to determine whether measurement e r ro r or
sample v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
between groups is s i g n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L-E.3-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.

t e s t re s u lts are defendable and tra ce a b le . I t is not the in te n t of
those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q u a lity Assurance action is
requi red..
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p re q u a lifie d as described
in Section 2.1.
cedure, and the equipment performance v e r if ic a t i o n . A fte r t e s t in g ,
the completed Form L-E.3-1 sh a ll be reviewed and signed o f f only
i f c o r re c t.
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q ua lity Assurance shall
m aintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3.2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q ua lity Assurance sha ll v e r if y
th a t s e ria l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the t e s t are recorded
on Form L-E.3-1.
6.3 .3 Test s ig n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain s ig n e d -o ff
copies of Form L-E.3-1.
E.3-9
Pg. 1
Thermal C on ductivity o f Laboratory Rock Samples

Test Data Sheet - Form L-E.3-1
P ro je ct_______________________________ SampleNo._________
Date__________________________________ RockType_________
Tested By___________________________ Test Temperature
Load

D escrip tio n S erial No. C a lib ra tio n
Sample Thickness Sample Diameter
E = :
Average_______ Average
Heat Flow Meter 1 Thickness

Heat Flow Meter 2 Thickness
Thermocouple Temperature, “ C
Time h ^2 ^3 ^4
Form L-E.3-1
Page 2
Thermocouple Temperature, C
Time H ^2 ^3 ^4
Remarks:
Test Supervisor_______________________________________ Date

Q u a lity Assurance_____________________________________ Date_
P ro je c t Engineer______________________________________ Date
Procedure L - F .l
! •
F lu id P erm eab ility o f a Rock Sample
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . The o b je c tiv e o f t h is t e s t is
to determine f l u i d p e rm e a b ility f o r disk-shaped or c y lin d r ic a l
rock specimens a t ambient temperature and c o n fin in g pressure.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . Use o f t h i s procedure is lim ite d to specimens
which have a s u f f i c i e n t l y high p e rm e a b ility th a t the flow o f f l u i d
through the specimen can be measured w ith a flow meter. Commer
c i a l l y a v a ila b le l i q u i d permeameters can be used on rock down to
about 3.9 X 10" in . (1 x 10" cm) per second, and special high-
pressuregpermeameters can measure to about 3.9 x 10" in .
(1 X 10" cm) per second.
Care must be exercised th a t the rocks tested w ith the liq u id
permeameter are not s e n s itiv e to the f l u i d being used. When
water i s used, i t must be fre s h ly d i s t i l l e d or prepared in such
a way th a t the growth o f b a c te ria is prevented. In the micro
p e rm e a b ility range, b a c te ria l growth in the water can block the
pores. As a standard procedure, water used f o r perm eability
determ inations is f i l t e r e d through a 0 . 2 2 m filte r .
In p e rm e a b ility t e s t in g , f l u i d i s forced through a rock specimen
under pressure. The pressure i s measured at the entrance t o , and
the e x i t from, the specimen, the run length is recorded and the
q u a n tity o f seeping f l u i d is determined using a flow meter. E ith e r
of two specimen c o n fig u ra tio n s are commonly used: disks or c y l i n -
de rs.
For disk-shaped specimens, pressure is applied to each face,
e s ta b lis h in g a pressure gradie nt between them. For c y lin d r ic a l
specimens, the te s t in g f l u i d is e it h e r forced from the outside
wall of the sample to the in sid e (compressional stress f i e l d ) , or
i t i s forced from the in s id e w all to the outside (tensional
s tre s s f i e l d ) . Flow through the c y lin d e r wall is monitored and
p e rm e a b ility i s c a lc u la te d .
1.3 .1 .1 Darcy: U nit o f permeabi1i t y . A porous medium has
a p e rm e a b ility o f 1 darcy when a f l u i d of 1 centipoise
v is c o s ity [w ater has 1 centipose v is c o s ity at 6 8 °F (20°C)]
flows throug^ i t at a ra te o f 0.06 in . ( 1 cm^) per second
per 0.16 in . (1 cm ) o f c ro s s -se ctio n a l area and 0.39 in .
( 1 cm) o f length at a pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l of 1 atmosphere
[407 i n . (1034 cm) o f water at the same temperature].
F.1-1
1 .3 .1 .2 V e lo c ity o f flo w : Through a rock o f u n it permea-
b i l i t y , water o f 1 c e n tip o is e v is c o s ity moves 0.39 i n . ( l cm)
per second a t 100% g ra d ie n t. Note th a t t h i s ra te o f flo w is
the same as stated in d e fin in g the darcy, although in t h i s
case the g ra d ie n t i s 1:1 ra th e r than 1034:1. The term
" v e lo c it y o f flo w " i s most commonly used in c i v i l engineering
geology and s o il mechanics (1 cm per second = 1034 da rcy).
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2 .1 For disk-shaped specimens, p e rm e a b ility is calcu la te d
using the fo llw in g r e la tio n s h ip :
A'(P^-P q )
where: k = p e rm e a b ility , darcy

T) =
v is c o s ity o f the f l u i d a t the temperature o f the
experiment, c e n tip o ise
3
Q = ra te o f flow o f the o u t l e t f l u i d , cm per second
L = thickn ess o f the specimen, cm
A = c ro s s -s e c tio n a l area o f the specimenperpendicular
to d ir e c t io n o f flo w , cm
= absolute pressure at the i n l e t , atmosphere
= absolute pressure at the o u t l e t , atmosphere.
1.3 .2 .2 For c y l i n d r i c a l specimens, ra d ia l p e rm e a b ility is

obtained from the fo llo w in g equation:
k = ---------- 2--------
. L p.2 - p^2
where: k = p e rm e a b ility , darcy

n = v is c o s it y o f the f l u i d at the temperature o f the
experiment, c e n tip o is e
3
= r a te o f flow o f o u t le t f l u i d , cm per second
r^ = o u te r radius o f specimen, cm
r^ = in s id e radius o f specimen, cm
L = a x ia l length o f core, cm
p^ = absolute pressure at the i n l e t , atmosphere
Pq = absolute pressure at the o u t l e t , atmosphere.
In = n a tura l logorithm
F .1 -2
1.4 References.
1.4.1 Jaeger, C . , 1972, Rock Mechanics and Engineering, Cambridge
Un1ve rs1ty Press, 417 p.
1.4.2 Lama, R.D., and V u tu k u ri, V .S ., 1978, Handbook on Mechanical
P roperties o f Rocks - Testing Techniques and R esu lts, Vol. IV,
pg. 356-380.
1.4.3 U.S. Bureau o f Mines, 1974, "P erco lation o f Gas and Water
in Rock", Bureau o f Mines Test Procedures f o r Rocks, Inform ation
C ir c u la r IC 8628.
A l l personnel involved in performing the t e s t , inc lu d in g the
Technicians and Test Supervisor, sh a ll be fo rm a lly p re q u a lifie d
under the Q u a lity Assurance.procedures established as part of
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the p e r fo r
mance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be
manufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment sh a ll be the
required level o f performance. Performance v e r if ic a t i o n is
g e nerally done by c a l i b r a t i n g the equipment and measurement
systems. C a lib r a tio n and documentation s h a ll be accomplished
according to Standard Q u a lity Assurance procedures.
2 .3.1 P roject scope. The number and types o f rock cores tested
depend p a r t l y on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the t e s t r e s u lts .
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n of the s ite
might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f formations,
w hile a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate
The f in a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the technical
2.3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested
must be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis fo r
e va luatio n o f the re s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly v a ria b le
w i l l re q u ire more te s t s than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks to evaluate
the r e s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.3 .3 Nonhomogeneities. D is c o n tin u itie s in the rock mass, such as
j o i n t s , weathered zones, in c lu s io n s , voids, etc . may c o n tro l rock
mass p e rm e a b ility . These should be sampled and tested to provide
an estimate o f t h e i r e f f e c t .
2.3 .4 A n iso tro p y. P erm eab ility is a h ig h ly d ir e c t i o n a l l y depend-
ent property. TFerefore, t e s t cores should be taken such th a t
p e rm e a b ility can be measured in several d i f f e r e n t d ir r e c tio n s .
F.1-3
2.4 Documentation.

The main components o f the apparatus used f o r p e rm e a b ility t e s t in g are
shown schem atically on Figure 3.1.
3.1 H ydraulic power supply.
A pressure pumping system i s required which i s capable o f • pro
ducing and m a in tain in g the desired i n l e t pressure. The capacity
of the h y d ra u lic power supply w i l l depend upon the desired flo w
ra te and i n l e t pressure.
3.2 Pressure r e g u la to r .
A s u ita b le pressure re g u la to r should be provided to supply the
i n l e t f l u i d a t a constant pressure.
3.3 F lu id sep ara tor.
The purpose o f the f l u i d separator i s to is o la t e the t e s t f l u i d ,
which is u s u a lly water o r b rin e , from the h yd ra u lic system. A
f l u i d separator is required only i f the h y d ra u lic power supply
f l u i d i s d i f f e r e n t from the t e s t f l u i d .
3.4 Pressure gages.
I n l e t and o u t l e t pressure must be accu rate ly measured. For low
pressure t e s t s , w a te r-, o i l - or m e r c u r y - fille d manometers are
u s u a lly used. For te s t s where the i n l e t pressure exceeds 14.5
psi (100 kPa) a bourdon tube gage or e le c tr o n ic pressure t r a n s
ducer is u s u a lly used.
3.5 Specimen h o ld e r.
The specimen holder must be designed such th a t when pressure is
applied to one end o f the system, a l l flow is through the s p e c i
men. Care must be taken th a t no f l u i d bypasses the sample e it h e r
through an imperfect seal between the core holder and sample or
between the sample and the supporting m a te ria l, i f the sample is
mounted.
3.6 Flow meter.
A device to measure the flow ra te a t the o u t le t is required. In
a d d itio n , a flo w meter at the i n l e t i s recommended to v e r if y th a t
the specimen holder does not leak.
4.0 Procedure
To ensure th a t the surface pores o f the sample do not become
obstructed during sample p re p a ra tio n , the specimen should be
saturated w ith the c u tt in g f l u i d . Longitudinal samples s h a ll, n o t
be used to measure p e rm e a b ility o f less than 10* cm per sec.
1
Lama, R .D ., and V u tu k u ri, V.S. , 1978, (see Ref. 1.4 .2)
F.1-4
HYDRAULIC POWER SUPPLY
PRESSURE PRESSURE
REGULATOR GAUGE
FLUID SEPARATOR
I SPECIMEN HOLDER
FLOW
METER
DISCHARGE'
FIG. 3.1 P E R M E A B IL IT Y TE ST SETUP
F.1-5
4.1.1 Dimensions. Pore size varies w ith d i f f e r e n t m a te ria ls .
I f the pore size is assumed to be approximately the same size
as the mineral grains in the sample, the s h o rte s t distance f o r
the t e s t in g medium to flo w through the sample sh a ll be 20 to 30
grain diameters.
4 .1 .1 .1 Length. For lo n g itu d in a l t e s t s , the sample sh a ll
be 20 to 30 gra in diameters long. Minimum length w i l l be
a t le a s t 0.5 in . (12.7 mm). For ra d ia l te s ts the sample
s h a ll be approximately 180 g rain diameters long. This w i l l
allow the usable length o f the ce n tra l hole to be fou r
times the t e s t in g medium tra v e l distance (Figure 4 .1 ).
4 .1 .1 .2 Diameter. Longitudinal samples sh a ll have a m in i
mum diameter o f 7.8 in . (19.8 cm, EX co re ). Radial sample
diameter s h a ll be such th a t r ^ - r ^ i s at le a s t 30 grain
diameters (Figure 4 .1 ).
4.1 .2 P a ra lle lis m . Sample ends sh a ll be p a r a lle l to each oth er
to w ith in 0.OO2 i n . 2(0.05 mm). Sides s h a ll be tru e to 0.002 in .
(0.05 mm) diameter.
4 .1 .3 Machining. The rock sh a ll not be degraded during the
machining process. Thermal fr a c t u r in g s h a ll be prevented by
coo lin g w ith an ap pro pria te f l u i d as re quire d. Generally water
i s used f o r hard rock, but oth er m a te ria ls re q u ire special f l u i d s ,
such as saturated b rin e f o r s a lt or g ly c e rin e f o r slaking mud
stones.
4.2 Procedure.
4.2.1 S a tu ra tin g the specimen. The specimen must be saturated
w ith the t e s t f l u i d p r i o r to te s t in g . The specimen is saturated
by placing i t in a vacuum o f at le a s t 0.022 psi (150 Pa) f o r a
minimum o f 30 minutes. Then the vacuum chamber is flooded w ith
the t e s t f l u i d w h ile m aintaining the vacuum. A f t e r the samples
are covered w ith the t e s t f l u i d , the vacuum i s maintained f o r
at le a s t 15 minutes before a llow in g the specimen to re turn to
atmospheric pressure.
4 .2 .2 I n s t a l l i n g the specimen. When i n s t a l l i n g the specimen in
the specimen h o ld e r, care must be exercised to prevent the spe ci
men from d ry in g . A lso, the specimen must be sealed in the f i x t u r e
so th a t a l l the t e s t f l u i d passes through the specimen during the
te s t.
4.2 .3 Bleeding the system. A f t e r pla cin g the specimen in the
specimen h o ld e r, the pressure system must be bled to ensure th a t
no a i r is present in the pressure lin e .
4 .2 .4 Data a c q u is it io n . The te s t is performed by a d ju s tin g the
pressure re g u la to r to the desired i n l e t pressure and monitoring
the i n l e t pressure, o u t l e t pressure and flow ra te . A ll data
sh a ll be recorded as shown on Form L - F . 1-1.
r
USBM, 1974, (see Ref. 1.4 .3 )
F.1-6
i
zs
k
150 l(10
1
25
t
^ 6 0 ->
FIG. 4.1 D IM E N S IO N S OF R A D IA L PE R M EA B ILITY SAMPLE ( IN MM )

( A fte r Jaeger, 1972)
F.1-7
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section i s to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
f o r a complete and usable re p o rt. F urther d e ta ils may be added as
A p p lic a tio n s o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s t in g programs. In
The in tro d u c to ry sectio n i s intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the t e s t in g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tie s o f the
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te s te d . In a large report
covering the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types o r at
various ax ia l loads, the t e s t m atrix is best presented in
a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 R ationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r
stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the t e s t in g program. The areas o f
i n t e r e s t which are not covered by the t e s t in g program and
the li m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a
t i o n s h a ll be discussed in general terms.
5.1 .2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type , s t r u c
t u r e , f a b r i c , grain s iz e , d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , void s, and weathering
o f the samples sh a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general i s not
re quire d. In v a ria b le m aterial or f o r several rock types, many
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presen tatio n is recom
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the equip-
5.2 .2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll
5.2 .3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure has
v a r ia tio n and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ff e c t
o f the v a r ia t io n upon the t e s t r e s u lts sh a ll be discussed.
assumptions inherent in the equations o r lim i t a t i o n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s sh a ll be noted, and the e ff e c t on the re s u lts d i s
cussed.
F.1-8
5.3 .2 S it e - s p e c i f i c in flu e n c e s .
o ra to ry t e s t c o n d itio n s conform to the assumptions con
tain ed in the data reduction equations s h a ll be discussed.
5 .3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to rs . Any fa c to rs or methods ap
p lie d to the data to c o rre c t f o r a nonideal s itu a tio n sha ll
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Summary o f r e s u l t s . Summary ta b le s f o r each rock type
s h a ll be prepared. The in fo rm a tio n sh a ll include as a minimum
rock s u ite d e s ig n a tio n , number o f t e s t s , average value, range,
and u n c e rta in tie s .
5.4 .2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A summary ta b le o f in d iv id u a l te s t
re s u lts s h a ll be prepared in c lu d in g sample number, sample dimen
sions, i n l e t and o u t l e t pressure, flow ra te and pe rm e ability
as a minimum.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses or presenta
tio n s may be included as a p pro pria te.
5 .4 .3 .1 Photographs of specimens.
5 .4 .3 .3 C o rre la tio n w ith o th e r rock prope rties such as
p o ro s ity .
5 .4 .3 .4 Comparison o f re s u lts to oth er rock suite s or to
previous stud ies.
The re s u lts s h a .1 be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l methods.
A l l u n c e rta in tie s sh a ll be calc u la te d using a 95% confidence
in te rv a l.
5.5.1 Measurement e r r o r . The e r r o r associated w ith a s in g le
t e s t sh a ll be evaluated. This includes the combined e ffe c ts of
a l l pressure gages, flow meters, readout devices, etc .
mean values o f the p e rm e a b ility , ranges, standard deviations and
95% confidence l i m i t s f o r the means sh a ll be calculated as a
minimum. The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite sha ll be compared
e r r o r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c to r in the re s u lts .
5.5 .3 Group c o r r e l a t io n . When ap pro pria te, the means o f groups
between groups i s s i g n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L - F .1-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.
F.1-9
t e s t r e s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t of
t h i s sectio n to e s ta b lis h Q u a lity Assurance procedures, but to iden
t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q u a lity Assurance actio n
i s re quire d.
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p r e q u a lifie d as
described in Section 2.1.
t e s t in g , the completed Form L - F . 1-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed
s h a ll maintain complete c a l i b r a t i o n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
6.3 .2 Equipment s e r ia l numbers. Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll v e r if y
corded on Form L - F .1-1.
6.3 .3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f L - F .1-1.
F.1-10
F lu id P erm eability o f a Rock Sample
Test Data Sheet - Form L-F.1-1
P roject Sample No.

Date Rock Type
Tested by
Equi pment Date of Next

D e s crip tio n S eria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Specimen Dimensions:
Length ___________
Outside Diameter
Inside Diameter _
I n l e t Pressure ___
O u tle t Pressure __
FIow Rate
P erm eability
Test Supervisor _ Date

Q ua lity Assurance Date
P roject Engineer Date
Procedure L-F.2
Water Content o f a Rock Sample
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective o f t h i s t e s t . This t e s t is Intended to measure
the water contained in a rock sample as a percentage o f the oven-
dry sample w eight.
1.1.2 L im it a t io n s . I f in s i t u water content is desired, pre
cautions must be taken to re ta in the natural water content during
sampling and storage.
The water content o f a rock sample is determined by weighing the
sample before and a f t e r d ryin g i t . The d iffe re n c e in weight
before and a f t e r d ryin g i s the weight o f the water in the sample.
1 .3 .1 .1 Grain w eight. The weight o f the mineral grains in
the sample.
1 .3 .1 .2 Pore water w e ig h t. The weight o f the water in the
specimen p r i o r to d ry in g .
1 .3 .1 .3 Water co n te n t. The r a t i o o f pore water weight to
gra in weight expressed as a percentage o f the grain weight.
1.3.2 Equations. Water content is determined using the
fo llo w in g equation:
w - ^ 100%
where: w = water content, %

A = weight o f the sample co n ta in e r, g
8 = weight o f the sample plus sample container before
d ry in g , g
C = weight o f the sample plus sample container a f t e r
d ry in g , g.
1.4 References.
Tests, 1972, "Suggested Method f o r Determining the Water Content
of a Rock Sample.", Suggested Methods fo r Determining Water Content,
P o ro s ity , D ensity, Absorption and Related P roperties and Swelling
and S la k e - D u ra b ility Index P ro p e rtie s , ISRM Committee on Labora-
to ry te s t s . Document No. 2.
F.2-1
1.4.2 Lama, R.D. and V u tu k u ri, V .S ., 1978, Handbook on Mechanical
P roperties o f Rocks, Vol IV, Trans Tech P u b lic a tio n s , pp. 351-352.
1.4.3 U.S. Army Corps o f Engineers, 1980, "Method f o r Determina
t io n o f the Water Content o f a Rock Sample," Rock Testing Hand-
book, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment S ta tio n , Vicksburg,
MI.
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures e sta blishe d as pa rt o f
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the perform
ance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be
m anufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment s h a ll be the
required leve l o f performance. Performance v e r i f i c a t i o n is
ge nerally done by c a l i b r a t i n g the equipment and measurement
system. C a lib r a tio n and documentation s h a ll be accomplished
2.3.1 P roject scope. The number and types o f rock samples
tested depends p a r t ly on the intended a p p lic a tio n o f the te s t
r e s u lts . For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n o f
the s i t e might re q u ire several samples from a v a r ie ty o f forma
t io n s , w hile a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a
candidate re p o s ito ry rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le
form ation. The f i n a l t e s t in g program w i l l depend h e a vily on
the te c h n ic a l judgment and experience o f p r o je c t personnel.
2.3 .2 S t a t i s t i c a l requirements. The number o f samples tested
f o r e v a lu a tio n o f the r e s u lts . Rock types which are hig h ly
v a ria b le w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e l a t i v e l y uniform rocks,
in order to evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r t a in t y .
2.4 Preservation o f moisture c o n d itio n o f the samples.
In order to determine the natural water con ten t, i t is important
to seal f i e l d samples immediately a f t e r removal from the sampling
lo c a tio n . Sample sealing i s commmonly accomplished by coating
w ith melted p a r a f f in .
2.5 Documentation.
Each sample s h a ll be f u l l y documented before t e s t in g according
F.2-2
3.1 Oven.
The oven must be capable o f m aintaining a temperature o f 221°F
(105°C) to w it h in 5°F (+^3°C) f o r a period of at le a s t 24 hours.
3.2 Sample c o n ta in e r.
The sample c o n ta in e r, in c lu d in g an a i r - t i g h t l i d , must be o f non-
c o rro d ib le m a te ria l.
3.3 D is ic c a to r .
A d is ic c a t o r to hold sample containers during cooling is required.
3.4 Balance.
The balance must be o f adequate c a p a c ity , and capable o f weighing
to an accuracy o f 0.01% o f the sample weight.
4.0 Procedure
4 .1.1 Dimensions. Any shape sample may be tested. The to t a l
sample weight should be at le a s t 17.63 oz (500 g).
4.1.2 Sample s e le c tio n . I f p o ss ib le , each te s t sample should
be taken from the center p o rtio n o f a f i e l d sample in order to
obtain t e s t samples w ith moisture contents as close as possible
to the in s it u c o n d itio n s .
4.2 Procedure.
4.2.1 Container w eigh t. The con taine r and i t s l i d are cleaned,
d r ie d , and weighed.
4.2.2 Sample w eigh t. The sample is placed in the con ta in e r,
the l i d i s replaced and the weight o f the sample plus the con
ta i n e r is determined.
4 .2 .3 D rying. The l i d is removed and the sample is dried to
constant weight at a temperature of 221°F (105°C) f o r at le a st
24 hours.
4 .2 .4 Dry w eigh t. The l i d i s replaced and the sample is allowed
to cool in the d e s ic a to r f o r 30 minutes. The weight o f the
sample plus the con taine r i s determined.
4.2 .5 Data recording requirements. Test data sh a ll be recorded
as shown on Form L-F.2-1.
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
a p p ro p ria te , and the order of items may be changed i f necessary.
A p p lic a tio n s o f the t e s t r e s u lts are beyond the scope of the pro
F.2-3
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some t e s t in g programs. In
cribed below should be Included.
The In tro d u c to ry section Is Intended to present the scope and
purpose o f the te s t in g program, and the c h a r a c te r is tic s o f the
stated.
I n t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s t in g program and
the li m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas o f a p p lic a tio n
s h a ll be discussed In general terms.
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type , s tr u c -
tu r e , f a b r i c , g rain s iz e , d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s , void s, and weathering
of the samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but In general Is not
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation Is recom
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g o f the equip
ment a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t s h a ll be Included In the re p o rt.
5.2 .2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sh a ll
be l i s t e d In d e ta ile d steps.
5.2 .3 V a ria tio n s . I f the actual equipment or procedure has
varied from the requirements contained In t h i s procedure, each
v a r ia tio n and the reasons f o r I t sh a ll be noted. The e ffe c t o f
the v a r ia t io n upon the t e s t re s u lts sh a ll be discussed.
assumptions Inherent In the equations o r l i m i t a t i o n s In t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll be noted, and the e f f e c t on the re s u lts d i s
cussed.
5.3.2 S i t e - s p e c i f i c In flu e n c e s .
tained In the data reduction equations s h a ll be discussed.
F.2-4
5.4 R esu lts.
5.4.1 Summary o f r e s u lt s . Summary tab les f o r each rock type
s h a ll be prepared. The in fo rm a tio n s h a ll in clu d e , as a minimum,
rock s u ite d e s ig n a tio n , number o f t e s t s , average value, range, and
u n c e rta in tie s .
5.4 .2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A summary ta b le of in d iv id u a l t e s t
r e s u lts s h a ll be prepared in c lu d in g sample number, grain weight,
pore water w eight, and water content as a minimum.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses or presen
ta tio n s may be included as appro pria te.
5 .4 .3 .2 C o rre la tio n w ith o th e r rock prope rties such as
bulk d e n s ity , p o ro s ity , or g rain de nsity.
5 .4 .3 .3 Comparison o f re s u lts to other rock suites or to
previous stud ies.
A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be c a lcu la ted using a 95% confidence
in t e r v a l.
t e s t sh a ll be evaluated.
mean water content values, ranges, standard deviations and 95%
confidence l i m i t s f o r the means s h a ll be calcu la ted as a minimum.
The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite s h a ll be compared w ith the
measurement u n c e rta in ty to determine whether measurement e r r o r
or sample v a r i a b i l i t y i s the dominant fa c t o r in the re s u lts .
5.5.3 Group c o r r e l a t io n . When a p p ro p ria te , the means of groups
between groups is s i g n i f i c a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
5.6 Appended data.
Each completed t e s t Form L-F.2-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.

t e s t r e s u lts are defendable and tra c e a b le . I t is not the in te n t o f
t i f y those p o ints during the t e s t at which Q uality Assurance action
i s required.
F.2-5
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p r e q u a lifie d as de
Q u a lity Assurance personnel sh a ll review the t e s t setup, the
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-F.2-1 s h a ll be reviewed and signed
6.3.1 Equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n . Q u a lity Assurance
s h a ll maintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
corded on Form L-F .2 -1 .
6.3.3 Test s i g n - o f f s . Q u a lity Assurance sh a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f L-F.2-1.
F.2-6
Water Content o f a Rock Sample
P roject ___________________________ Sample No.

D a te ______________________________ Rock Type
Tested by

D e s c rip tio n S e ria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Container Weight, g
Wet Weight, g _____
Dry Weight, g _____
Water Weight, g _
Grain Weight, g _
Water Content, %
Test S u p e rv is o r_____________________________ Date

Q uality Assurance ___________________________ Date
P roject E n g in e e r____________________________ Date
Procedure L-F.3
Apparent P orosity o f a Rock Sample
1.0 Background
1.1 Scope.
1.1.1 O bjective of t h i s t e s t . The t e s t is intended to measure
the apparent p o ro s ity o f a rock sample in the form o f lumps or
aggregate o f i r r e g u l a r geometry. I t may also be applied to a
sample in the form o f specimens o f re gula r geometry.
1.1.2 L im ita tio n s . This method should only be used f o r rocks
th a t do not swell appreciably o r d is in te g r a te when oven-dried
and immersed in water.
The apparent p o ro s ity i s given by the r a t i o o f the interconnected
pore volume to the bulk volume o f a t e s t sample. The in te rc o n
nected pore volume i s determined by measuring the amount o f water
required to sa tu ra te a dry sample. The bulk volume is determined
by measuring the amount o f water which the specimen displaces
when submerged.
1 .3 .1 .1 Apparent p o ro s ity - the p o ro s ity o f the in te rc o n
nected pore volume in a rock.
1 .3 .1 .2 Pore volume - the volume o f the interconnected
pore space.
1 .3 .1 .3 Symbols
Wsub = Net weight o f submerged specimen
Wsat = Weight o f satu rated, surface dry specimen
W^s = Weight o f submerged specimen and basket
Wsb = Weight o f submerged basket
Wg = Weight o f sample con taine r plus saturated specimen
W^ = Weight o f dry sample container
Wg = Grain weight o f specimen
W^ = Weight of sample con taine r plus dry specimen
V|^ = Bulk volume o f specimen
Vp = Interconnected pore volume of specimen
= Density o f water
F.3-1
1.3.2 Equations.
1 .3 .2 .1 The surface dry weight o f the specimen is c a lc u la te d
using:
“ sat = “ s - “ c
1 .3 .2 .2 The g ra in weight is c a lc u la te d using:
Wn = W. -
g d c
1 .3 .2 .3 The bulk volume i s c a lc u la te d using:
_ ^sa t “ '^sub
^b
pw
1 .3 .2 .4 The pore volume is c a lc u la te d using:
V = ’^sat ' ’^g

P pw
1 .3 .2 .5 The apparent p o ro s ity is c a lc u la te d using:
V
n = X 100 percent
''b
1.4 References.
1.4.1 ISRM Commission on S tan dardization o f Laboratory and
F ie ld Tests, 1972, "Suggested Method f o r P o ro s ity /D e n s ity Deter
mination using S a tu ra tio n and Buoyancy Technique," Suggested
Methods f o r Determining Water Content, P o ro s ity , D ensity, Absorp
t i o n and Related P ro p e rtie s , and Swelling and S la k e -D u ra b ility
Index P ro p e rtie s , Committee on Laboratory Tests, Document No. 2.
1.4.2 V u tu k u ri, V.S. and Lama, R .D ., 1978, Handbook on Mechanical
P roperties o f Rocks, Testing Techniques and R esults, J_V, Trans
Tech P u b lic a tio n s , C la u s th a l, Germany.
under the Q u a lity Assurance procedures esta blishe d as part o f
The compliance o f a l l equipment and apparatus w ith the perform
ance s p e c ific a tio n s in Section 3.0 o f t h i s procedure sha ll be
F.3-2
m anufacturer's s p e c ific a tio n s f o r the equipment sha ll be the
required level o f performance. Performance v e r if ic a t i o n is
g e nerally done by c a lib r a t in g the equipment and measurement
system. C a lib r a tio n and documentation sh a ll be accomplished
For example, an i n i t i a l mechanical c h a ra c te riz a tio n o f the s it e
might re q u ire several samples from a v a rie ty o f form ations, w hile
a d e ta ile d thermo-mechanical in v e s tig a tio n o f a candidate re p o si
to r y rock may re q u ire many te s ts from a s in g le formation. The
f i n a l te s t in g program w i l l depend h e a v ily on the technical judg
ment and experience o f p ro je c t personnel.
must be s u f f i c i e n t to provide an adequate s t a t i s t i c a l basis f o r
eva lu a tio n of the re s u lts . Rock types which are h ig h ly
v a ria b le w i l l re q u ire more te s ts than r e la t i v e l y uniform rocks,
in order to evaluate the re s u lts w ith equal c e r ta in ty .
2.4 Documentation.
3.0 Equipment and apparatus.

3.1 Oven.
The oven must be capable o f m aintaining a temperature of 221°F
(105“ C) to w it h in 5.5°F (3°C) f o r a period o f at le a s t 24 hours.
3.2 Sample c o n ta in e r.
The sample c o n ta in e r, in c lu d in g an a i r - t i g h t l i d , must be of
noncorrodible m a te ria l.
3.3 D esicator
A d e s ic a to r must be a v a ila b le to hold sample containers during
coo lin g.
3.4 Vacuum pump.
Vacuum s a tu ra tio n equipment is required such th a t the sample can
be immersed in water under a vacuum o f less than 6 t o r r (800 Pa)
f o r a period o f at le a s t 1 hour.
3.5 Balance.
A balance o f adequate capacity and capable o f weighing to an
accuracy o f 0.01% o f the sample weight is required.
3.6 Immersion bath.
An immersion bath and a w ire basket o r perforated container are
re quire d, such th a t the sample immersed in water can be fr e e ly
suspended from the s t i r r u p o f the balance to determine the
F.3-3
saturated-submerged w eight. The basket should be suspended from
the balance by a f in e w ire so th a t only the w ire in te rs e c ts the
water surface in the immersion bath.
4.0 Procedure.
4.1.1 Dimensions. A re pre se n ta tive sample is selected, p r e fe r -
ably comprising a t le a s t 10 rock lumps each weighing at le a s t
1.8 oz (50 g ) , to give a t o t a l sample weight o f at le a s t 18 oz
(500 g ). Aggregate o f sm aller or la r g e r size may, however, be
tested in a s i m i l a r manner.
4 .1 .2 Cleaning. A ll samples should be washed in water to remove
dust.
4.2 Procedure.
4.2.1 S aturate sample. The sample is saturated by water immer-
sion in a vacuum o f le s s than 6 t o r r (800 Pa) f o r a period o f at
le a s t 1 hour, w ith p e rio d ic a g ita t io n to remove trapped a i r .
4.2.2 Weigh submerged w ire basket. The w ire basket is submerged
in the immersion bath and weighed.
4.2.3 Weigh saturated-submerged sample. The sample is tra n s
fe rre d under w ater to the w ire basket in the immersion bath. I t s
saturated-submerged w eight, W . , i s determined to an accuracy o f
0.004 oz (0.1 g) from the d iffe re n c e between the saturated-sub
merged weight o f the basket plus sample and th a t o f the basket
alone.
4 .2 .4 Weigh dry sample c o n ta in e r. The sample con taine r w ith i t s
l i d i s cleaned and d r ie d , and i t s weight is determined.
4.2.5 Weigh satu ra te d , surface-dry sample. The sample is removed
from the immersion bath and s u rfa c e -d rie d w ith a moist c lo th ,
care being taken to remove only surface water and to ensure th a t
no rock fragments are l o s t . The sample is tra n s fe rre d to the
sample c o n ta in e r, the l i d i s replaced, and the weight o f the satu
ra ted, su rfa c e -d ry sample plus co n ta in e r is measured.
4.2 .6 Dry sample. The l i d i s removed and the sample d rie d to
constant weight a t a temperature o f 221°F (105°C), the l i d is
replaced and the sample is allowed to cool f o r 30 minutes in a
d e ss ic a to r.
4.2.7 Weigh dry sample. The weight o f the oven-dry sample plus
c o n ta in e r i s determined.
4 .2 .8 Data recording requirements. Test data s h a ll be recorded
as shown on Form L-F.3-1.
F.3-4
5.0 Reporting
The purpose o f t h i s section is to e s ta b lis h the minimum requirements
ap p ro p ria te , and the order o f items may be changed i f necessary.
A p p lica tio n s o f the t e s t re s u lts are beyond the scope o f t h i s pro
cedure, but may be an in te g ra l p a rt o f some te s tin g programs. In
purpose o f the te s t in g program, and the c h a ra c te ris tic s o f the
5 .1 .1 .1 Number o f samples te ste d . In a large report
covering the re s u lts o f te s ts in several rock types, the
t e s t m a trix i s best presented in a ta b u la r form.
5 .1 .1 .2 R ationale f o r sample s e le c tio n . The reasons f o r
the number and types o f samples tested sha ll be c le a r ly
stated.
5 .1 .1 .3 L im ita tio n s o f the te s tin g program. The areas of
in t e r e s t which are not covered by the te s tin g program and
the l i m i t a t i o n s o f the data w ith in the areas of a p p lic a tio n
5.1.2 B r i e f d e s c rip tio n o f the samples. The rock type, s tr u c
tu r e , f a b r i c , gram s iz e , d is c o n t in u it ie s , voids, and weathering
o f the samples s h a ll be described as a minimum. Further d e ta il
depends on the a p p lic a tio n o f the r e s u lts , but in general is not
samples may be described, and a ta b u la r presentation is recom
5.2 Test method.
5.2.1 Equipment and apparatus. A d e ta ile d l i s t i n g of the equip-
piece s h a l1 be l i s t e d .
5.2.2 Procedure. The procedure a c tu a lly used f o r the t e s t sha ll
v a r ia tio n and the reasons f o r i t s h a ll be noted. The e ff e c t of
the v a r ia tio n upon the t e s t r e s u lts sha ll be discussed.
F.3-5
5.3.1 Data re duction equations. A ll equations used to reduce
assumptions inh ere nt in the equations or li m i t a t i o n s in t h e i r
a p p lic a tio n s s h a ll be noted, and the e f f e c t on the re s u lts d i s
cussed.
5.3 .2 S i t e - s p e c i f i c in flu e n c e s .
tain ed in the data re duction equations sh a ll be discussed.
5 .3 .2 .2 C orrection fa c to r s . Any fa c to rs or methods applied
to the data to c o rre c t f o r a non-ideal s itu a tio n sh a ll be
5.4 R esults.
5.4.1 Summary o f r e s u l t s . Summary ta b le s f o r each rock type
s h a ll be prepared. The in fo rm a tio n s h a ll include rock s u ite
d e sig n a tio n , number o f te s t s , average value, range, and uncer
t a i n t i e s as a minimum.
5 .4 .2 In d iv id u a l r e s u l t s . A summary ta b le o f in d iv id u a l te s t
re s u lts s h a ll be prepared in c lu d in g sample number and p o ro s ity
as a minimum.
5.4.3 Other. The fo llo w in g o th e r types o f analyses or presenta
tio n s may be included as ap pro pria te.
p e rm e a b ility o r t o t a l p o ro s ity .
5 .4 .3 .3 Comparison o f re s u lts to o th e r rock suite s or to
previous stud ies.
5.5 E rro r e stim ate.
The re s u lts s h a ll be analyzed using standard s t a t i s t i c a l
methods. A ll u n c e rta in tie s s h a ll be c a lc u la te d using a 95%
confidence i n t e r v a l .
t e s t s h a ll be evaluated.
5.5 .2 Sample v a r i a b l i t y . For each s u ite o f rock samples, the
mean apparent p o ro s ity values, ranges, standard de viation s and
95% confidence l i m i t s f o r the means s h a ll be calcu la ted as a
minimum. The u n c e rta in ty o f the sample s u ite sh a ll be compared
e r r o r or sample v a r i a b i l i t y is the dominant fa c t o r in the
re s u lts .
5.5 .3 Group c o r r e l a t io n . When a p p ro p ria te , the means o f groups
between groups i s s i g n if ic a n t at the 95% confidence le v e l.
F.3-6
5.6. Appended data.
li Each completed t e s t Form L-F.3-1 s h a ll be included in an appendix.

t i f y those p o in ts during the t e s t at which Q uality Assurance action
i s required.
P r io r to t e s t in g , a l l personnel s h a ll be p re q u a lifie d as des
cribed in Section 2.1.
'Q u a lity Assurance personnel s h a ll review the t e s t setup, the
t e s t in g , the completed Form L-F.3-1 sh a ll be reviewed and signed
s h a ll m aintain complete c a lib r a t io n records and c e r t i f i c a t e s .
th a t s e r ia l numbers o f a l l equipment used in the te s t are re
corded on Form L-F.3-1.
6.3 .3 Test sign o f f s . Q ua lity Assurance sh a ll maintain signed-
o f f copies o f L-F.3-1.
F.3-7
Apparent P orosity o f Rock Samples
P roje ct __________________________ Sample No.______

D a ta _____________________________ RockTyp e______
Tested by _______________________

D e s crip tio n S e ria l No. C a lib ra tio n
Weight of submerged specimen plus basket W^^ =

Weight o f submerged basket W^^^ =
Net weight of submerged specimen W^^l^ =
Weight o f dry sample con taine r W^ =
Weight o f sample con taine r plus saturated specimen W^ =
Weight of sample con taine r plus dry specimen W^ =
Weight o f saturated surface dry specimen W^^^ =
Specimen gra in weight W^ =
Bulk volume V. =
b
Pore volume Vp =
P orosity ri =
Test S u p e rv is o r______________________________ Date

Q ua lity Assurance____________________________ Date
P roje ct E n g in e e r_____________________________ Date
ONWI-311
Public Draft
Technical Report
MASTER
October, 1981
Frank S. Shuri
John D. Cooper
M olly L Hamill
Foundation Sciences, Inc.

Portland, OR 97205
Ot^WI
O ffic e o fiN u c le a rW a s te Is o la tio n
Battelle
fifsrfflBurioir if this oocttKif is uniiR l

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA _
Foundation Sciences, inc., 1981. Laboratory Rock Mechanics Testing Manual, ONWI-311, •I
O ffice o f Nuclear Waste isolation, Battelle M em o rial Institute, Colum bus, O H , Public Draft.
NOTICE
This report was prepared as an account of w ork sponsored by an agency o f the U nited States
G overnm ent. N either the U nited States G overnm ent nor any agency thereof, nor any of their
employees, makes any warranty, express or im plied, or assumes any legal liability or
responsibility fo r the accuracy, completeness, or usefulness of any inform ation, apparatus,
product, or process disclosed, or represents that its use w o uld not infringe privately owned
rights. Reference herein to any specific com m ercial product, process, or service by trade
name, tradem ark, m anufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or im ply its
endorsem ent, recom m endation, or favoring by the U nited States G overnm ent or any agency
thereof. The views and opinions o f authors expressed herein do not necessarily state or reflect
those o f the U nited States G overnm ent or any agency thereof.
P rin te d in th e U n ite d States o f A m e ric a

A v a ila b le fro m
N a tio n a l T ec h n ic a l In fo rm a tio n Service
U.S. D e p a r tm e n t o f C o m m e rc e
5285 Port Royal Road
S p rin g fie ld , V A 22161
N TIS p ric e codes

P rin te d C o p y : A15
M ic r o fic h e cop y: A01

Rock Mechanics Lab Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Rock Mechanics Lab Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ONWI-311

Laboratory Rock Mechanics Testing Manual

Foundation Sciences, inc.

fliSTRIBUTION IF TH!£ DOClHilflir IS IM U M fn i

This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an

Portions of this document may be illegible in

This re p o rt was p re p a re d as an a ccou n t o f w o rk sponsored by an agency o f the U n ite d States

P rin te d in th e U n ite d States o f A m e ric a

N TIS p ric e codes

Laboratory Rock Mechanics Testing Manual

Foundation Sciences, Inc.

^h;[ nribWENT is iKHIMITa)

T his r e p o r t w as p r e p a r e d by F o u n d a tio n S c ie n c e s , In c . u n d e r S u b c o n tra c t E 515-0 41 00 w ith B a tte lie

General Inform ation

1.0 In tro d u c tio n

2.0 Generalized la b o ra to ry operations

y = f(u ,v ,x ...) (1)

The theory o f propagation o f e rro rs re la te s the uncertainty

where w^ = u n c e rta in ty o f the value of y

For example, a modulus o f deformation te s t is run on a basalt

where o= stre ss in the sample

where S = pressure gage reading

The s t r a in in the sample, e , i s c a lcu la te d using:

where AV = change in output voltage from LVDT

The area o f the sample, A^, i s c a lcu la te d using:

where d = the measured diameter.

Applying Equation 2 to Equation 6, the e r r o r , w^ , associated

where w^ = the u n c e rta in ty in the sample diameter.

The sample diameter was measured w ith a micrometer c a lip e r capable

S = 100 psi (Q.689 MPa)

Solving Equation 8, w a i s found t o be approximately 15 psi (0.103 MPa).

.,2 ,, 2 ^ AV^ , 2 ^ A v V ,,2 (9)

The value of AV is chosen to correspond to the averagechange

Solving Equation 9, the e r r o r associated w ith the s tra in measure­

3.0 Test equipment performance v e r i f i c a t i o n

(S p e c ific c a l i b r a t i o n procedures w i l l be included at a l a t e r d a te .)

For example, modulus te s ts are run on a s u ite of basalt samples

In p r a c tic e , s is more e a s ily c alcu la ted from the a lg e b ra ic a lly

where s = standard d e v ia tio n

E = 9.61 + 0.59 X 10^ psi (6.63 + 0.41 x 10^ MPa)

*The S tudent's t d i s t r i b u t i o n is s im ila r to the standard normal d i s ­

Confidence C o e ffic ie n ts f o r Student's t D is tr ib u tio n

1 31.82 6.31 3.08

5 3.36 2.02 1.48

10 2.76 1.81 1.37

15 2.60 1.75 1.34

20 2.53 1.72 1.32

25 2.48 1.71 1.32

30 2.46 1.70 1.31

Adapted from M i l l e r , I . and Freund, J.E^ 1965, P ro b a b ility and S t a t is t ic s

where = average value o f group 1

The confidence level f o r the value o f t c a lcu la te d from Equation

= 9.85 X 10® psi (6.79 x 10^ MPa)

The t value c a lc u la te d from Equation 15 is 1.99. For 11 degrees

5.0 Q ua lity Assurance

*^sat ~ ^sub (1)

1 .3 .2 .2 The bulk d e n s ity , p|^. Is c a lcu la ted using:

where: M = the mass o f the sample, e ith e r dry or under

3.0 Equipment and apparatus

6.0 Q u a lity Assurance

P ro je c t__________________________ Sample No._

Equipment Date of Next

"•sf " '"t ■ "’p (2)

Solving Equation 9, the e r r o r associated w ith the s tra in measure

*The S tudent's t d i s t r i b u t i o n is s im ila r to the standard normal d i s

Test Supervisor_____________________ |_ Date

Grain Size In te rv a ls _ Number___ Percentage

Q ua lity Assurance _ ____ Date